JP2023146224A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of performing a more optimized process regarding a control process and an informing performance when the number of prize balls acquired by a player exceeds a fixed number and a game is forced to be completed.SOLUTION: A game machine includes game stopping means for performing a stopping process for stopping a process regarding a game when second predetermined information stored by second predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value. The game stopping means is configured to execute a stopping process after completion of a special game when the second predetermined information stored by the second predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value during the special game, and performs a counting process by first counting means without performing a counting process by second counting means during a special game when executing a stopping process after completion of the special game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5-1-1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines are known to have a stop function that forcibly ends the game when the number of prize balls won by a player exceeds a certain number (for example, Patent Document 1)

JP2014-217645A

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when a game is forcibly terminated, sufficient measures have not been taken regarding control processing and notification effects before and after the forced termination.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and improves the control processing and notification effect when the game is forcibly ended when the number of prize balls won by a player exceeds a certain number. The purpose is to provide gaming machines with

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. Note that reference numerals of embodiments to be described later are given in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) Special game execution means (e.g., main control) that can execute special games (e.g., jackpot game, small win game) that are advantageous to the player when a player wins in a random number lottery (e.g., jackpot lottery processing) during a game. section 520, special symbol management processing (S1031));
a first counting means (e.g., main control unit 520, performance display LED aggregation/division processing (S1048)) that performs a counting process of counting first predetermined information (e.g., base value) based on gaming performance;
specific display means (e.g. performance display LED 521) capable of displaying the first predetermined information;
A second counting means (main control unit 520, safety device counting process (S1528, S1512), difference ball Counter counting processing (S1531, S1541)),
a second predetermined information storage means (e.g., a difference ball counter) capable of storing the second predetermined information;
A game stopping unit (main control unit 520, game stopping process (S1520, S1509 to S1511)) and
Equipped with
The game stopping means is configured to execute a stopping process after the special game ends when the second predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means becomes a predetermined value during the special game,
When a stop process is executed after the end of the special game, the second counting means does not perform the counting process during the special game, and the first counting means performs the counting process.
(2) comprising a second predetermined information clearing means (main control unit 520, out-of-area game start setting processing (S1503), (S1507, S1537, S1559)) that clears the second predetermined information storage means after power is turned on;
The game stopping means executes a stopping process after the special game ends even if the power is cut off during the special game and the second predetermined information storage means is cleared by the second predetermined information clearing means. The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that:

According to the present invention, it is possible to perform more optimized processing regarding control processing and notification effects when the number of prize balls won by a player exceeds a certain number and the game is forcibly ended.

FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front exploded perspective view of the same pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the same pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of the control system of the same pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of the same pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a memory map in the main control section of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart (first half) of the system processing of the main control part of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart (second half) of the system processing of the main control part of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of the main control part of the same pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing outside the main loop within the main loop and an outside processing within the timer interrupt of the main control unit of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the system setting process of the performance control part of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing of the performance control part of the same pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of the performance control part of the same pachinko machine. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart (second half) of system processing of the main control unit according to Embodiment 1-1 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the out-of-area game start setting of the main control part based on Embodiment 1-1 of this invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the main control unit according to Embodiment 1-1 of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of main loop in-area out-of-area processing and a timer interrupt in-area out-of-area process of the main control unit according to Embodiment 1-1 of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of safety device counting processing of the main control unit according to Embodiment 1-1 of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of safety device operation management processing of the main control unit according to Embodiment 1-1 of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a flowchart of game stop processing of the main control unit according to Embodiment 1-1 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the out-of-area game start setting of the main control part based on Embodiment 1-2 of this invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of safety device counting processing of the main control unit according to Embodiment 1-2 of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of safety device operation management processing of the main control unit according to Embodiment 1-2 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the out-of-area game start setting of the main control part based on Embodiment 1-3 of this invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the main control unit according to Embodiment 1-3 of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of safety device counting processing of the main control unit according to Embodiment 1-3 of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the main control unit according to Embodiments 1-4 of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of main loop in-area out-of-area processing and a flowchart of timer interrupt in-area out-of-area processing of the main control unit according to Embodiments 1-4 of the present invention. This is a time chart when the safety device is activated during the jackpot game according to Embodiment 2-1 of the present invention, and is a diagram showing the operating states of various functional units controlled by the main control unit, production control unit, and payout control unit. be. This is a time chart when the safety device is activated during the symbol variation game according to Embodiment 2-2 of the present invention, and is a diagram showing the operating states of various functional units controlled by the main control unit, production control unit, and payout control unit. It is. This is a time chart when the safety device is activated during the symbol variation game according to Embodiment 2-3 of the present invention, and is a diagram showing the operating states of various functional units controlled by the main control unit, production control unit, and payout control unit. It is. This is a time chart when the safety device is activated during non-gaming (standby) according to Embodiment 2-4 of the present invention, showing the operating states of various functional units controlled by the main control unit, production control unit, and payout control unit. FIG. This is a time chart when the safety device is activated during non-gaming (standby) according to Embodiment 2-5 of the present invention, showing the operating states of various functional units controlled by the main control unit, production control unit, and payout control unit. FIG. It is a time chart of the jackpot end INT according to Embodiment 3-1 of the present invention, and is a diagram showing the effect mode during the jackpot end INT.

Hereinafter, the following contents regarding the embodiments of the invention will be explained in detail based on each drawing.
(gaming slot)
(launch handle unit)
└(Fire handle unit 2)
(middle push button unit)
└(Middle push button unit 2)
(saucer)
└(Saucer 2)
(Volume adjustment button)
└(Volume adjustment button 2)
(light intensity adjustment button)
└(Light intensity adjustment button 2)
(cross button)
└(cross button 2)
(speaker)
(Ball rental button, return button)
└(Ball lending button, return button 2)
(side unit)
└(Side unit 2)
(Prize ball payout device)
└(Prize ball payout device 2)
(board case)
(back cover)
(External terminal board)
└(External terminal board 2)
(Block Diagram)
(power supply board)
(control board)
(Payout control unit)
(Payout launch control board)
(Frame release switch)
(Main control section)
(Main control board)
(RWM clear switch)
(setting key switch)
(Performance display LED)
(Production control section)
(Production IF board, LCD control board, LCD IF board, ROM board)
(game board)
(Board game parts)
(Design display device)
(Special symbol 1 variable display, special symbol 2 variable display)
(Special symbol 1 memory display, special symbol 2 memory display)
(Normal pattern fluctuation display)
(Normal symbol memory display)
(Electric chew support)
(Jackpot game)
(Small winning game)
(Round display)
(gaming state)
(Right-handed display)
(Status display)
(Decorative symbol variation game, pending display)
(Advance preview)
(pseudo notice)
(Step up notice)
(Background change notice)
(movable object)
(memory map)
(Main control system processing)
(Setting change processing)
(RWM error processing)
(RWM clear processing)
(Setting confirmation process)
(Backup restoration process)
(main loop processing)
(Processing outside the main loop area)
(timer interrupt processing)
((1) Power supply abnormality check process)
((2) Timer management processing)
((3) Input management processing)
((4) Random number circuit processing)
((5) Prize ball management processing)
((6) Normal symbol management processing)
((7) Ordinary electric accessories management process)
((8) Special design management processing)
((9) Special electric accessories management process)
((10) Error management processing)
((11) Game information notification management process)
((12) External terminal management processing)
((13) Solenoid management processing)
((14) LED management processing)
((15) Area migration processing & timer interrupt outside area processing)
(Timer interrupt outside area processing)
((16) Out command sending process)
((17) SPI communication start)
((18) WDT clear processing)
(Production control system settings)
(Production control main processing)
(Production control timer interrupt processing)
(Safety device)
(Main control system processing_safety device 1)
(Outside area game start setting process_safety device 1)
(Timer interrupt processing_safety device 1)
(Timer interrupt outside area processing_safety device 1)
(Processing outside the main loop area_safety device 1)
(Safety device counting process_Safety device 1)
(Safety device operation management process_safety device 1)
(Outside area game start setting process_safety device 2)
(Safety device counting process_Safety device 2)
(Safety device operation management process_safety device 2)
(Outside area game start setting process_safety device 3)
(Timer interrupt processing_safety device 3)
(Safety device counting process_safety device 3)
(Timer interrupt processing_safety device 4)
(Timer interrupt outside area processing_safety device 4)
(If the safety device is activated during a jackpot game)
(If the safety device is activated during symbol variation game 1)
(If the safety device is activated during symbol variation game 2)
(If the safety device is activated while not playing 1)
(If the safety device is activated while not playing 2)
(Regarding the jackpot end INT when the safety device is activated)
[Configuration example 1] to [Configuration example 7]

1-1 and 1-2 are perspective views of the gaming machine 1 shown in this embodiment.

(gaming slot)
The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a wooden outer frame 2 formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, an inner frame 3 made of synthetic resin located in front of the outer frame 2, and an inner frame 3 located in front of the inner frame 3. It is composed of a game frame 5 including a front frame 4 made of synthetic resin.

The inner frame 3 is rotatably opened/closed and/or detachably attached to the outer frame 2 via outer frame hinges 6 joined to the upper and lower parts of the left end side of the outer frame 2. The outer frame 2 is locked in a closed state by a locking device 6 disposed at the lower right end of the frame.

The front frame 4 is rotatably opened/closed and/or detachably attached to the inner frame 3 via inner frame hinges 7 joined to the upper and lower parts of the left end side of the inner frame 3. The inner frame 3 is locked in a closed state by a locking device 6 disposed at the lower right end.

The inner frame 3 is provided with an inner frame opening 9 for mounting the game board 8 thereon, and the inner frame opening 9 has a game board mounting part provided so that the game board 8 can be attached or detached. (not shown) is formed. When the game board 8 is mounted on this game board mounting portion, the front frame opening 10 of the front frame 4 is located on the front side of the game board 8.

The front frame 4 is formed with a glass plate unit mounting portion (not shown) to which a transparent glass plate unit can be mounted so as to correspond to the front frame opening 10 . The glass plate constituting the glass plate unit is transparent, and the player is configured to be able to see the game board 4 attached to the inner frame 3 from the front of the game frame 5 through the glass plate unit. There is.

Furthermore, a plurality of non-transparent decorative covers 11 and transparent transparent decorative covers 12 are disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the front frame opening 10, thereby changing the design shape of the front frame 4. is formed. Furthermore, a plurality of front frame LED boards (not shown) having LEDs are disposed inside the transparent decorative cover 12, and the player can see the colored lights received from the LEDs through the transparent decorative cover 12. It is visible.

(launch handle unit)
A firing handle unit 13 is arranged at the lower right part of the game frame 5. This firing handle unit includes a firing handle 13a, a firing stop button (not shown), a handle touch sensor 13b, a firing intensity adjustment section (not shown), and a firing handle LED board (not shown) having an LED. ing.

When the player touches the firing handle 13a, the game ball can be launched by the firing device, and the flight distance of the fired game ball can be arbitrarily adjusted.

(middle push button unit)
At the lower center of the game frame 5, a middle press button unit 14 (performance button unit) that can be operated by the player is arranged. The middle push button unit 14 includes a middle push button pressing part 14a (operating means), a middle push button detection switch 14b, a middle push button position detection switch 14c, a middle push button movable part (not shown), a middle push button movable part motor 14d, and an LED. It is composed of a middle push button LED board (not shown).

The player is configured to be able to execute or switch predetermined effects (images, lamps, sounds, movable objects, etc.) by operating the middle press button pressing portion 14a.

(saucer)
A tray is arranged at the lower left side of the game frame 5. The tray is composed of an upper tray 15 and a lower tray (not shown). The tray is formed so that the player can freely take out game balls and roughly check the number of game balls stored in the tray.

(Volume adjustment button)
A volume adjustment button 16 is arranged at the lower left side of the game frame 5. The volume adjustment button includes an upper volume button 16a, a lower volume button 16b, an upper volume button switch 16c, and a lower volume button switch 16d (volume button detection switch). When the player operates the upper volume button 16a (or lower volume button 16b), the upper volume button switch 16c (or lower volume button switch 16d) detects the operation, and outputs from each speaker 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d. The output volume can be changed.

(light intensity adjustment button)
At the lower left side of the game frame 5, a light amount adjustment button 17 is arranged. The light amount adjustment button 17 includes an upper light amount button 17a, a lower light amount button 17b, an upper light amount button switch 17c, and a lower light amount button switch 17d (light amount button detection switch). When the player operates the upper light amount button 17a (or the lower light amount button 17b), the upper light amount button switch 17c (or the lower light amount button switch 17d) detects the operation, and the light amount of each LED 63a, 64a can be changed. has been done.

(cross button)
A cross button 18 is arranged at the lower left side of the game frame 5. The cross button 18 has four buttons (top button 18a, right button 18b, bottom button 18c, left button 18d) arranged on the top, bottom, left and right sides, four button detection switches 49a corresponding to the top, bottom, left and right buttons, It is composed of 49b, 49c, and 49d (cross button detection switch). The player is configured to be able to perform or switch predetermined effects (images, lamps, sounds, movable objects, etc.) corresponding to each operation by operating any of the up, down, left, and right buttons.

(speaker)
An upper left speaker 19a and an upper right speaker 19b are arranged at the upper left and right sides of the game frame 5, a lower left speaker 19c and a lower right speaker 19d at the lower left and right, and a lower speaker (not shown) at the lower right side. Each of the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, and 19d is used to reproduce and output sounds such as sound effects, and the lower speaker in particular is configured to output bass sounds.

An upper left LED board (not shown) and an upper right LED board (not shown) each having an LED are arranged near the upper left speaker 19a and the upper right speaker 19b, respectively. In addition, on the front side of the upper left speaker 19a and the upper right speaker 19b, there is a light guide part (not shown) that can guide the light of the LED, and an upper left speaker cover 19e and an upper right speaker cover 19f that are made of synthetic resin and have transparency. are provided, and when the LEDs on the upper left LED board or the upper right LED board emit light, each speaker cover 19e, 19f is configured to emit light in accordance with the color of the emitted light.

Further, a lower left speaker cover 19g and a lower right speaker cover 19h are provided in front of the lower left speaker 19c and the lower right speaker 19d, respectively, and punching metal is used for these covers 19g and 19h.

Furthermore, a non-transparent lower speaker cover 19I made of synthetic resin is provided on the front side of the lower speaker. This lower speaker cover 19I is located on the rear side of the handle unit 13, and when audio is output from the lower speaker, the lower speaker is transmitted to the player's hand holding the firing handle 13a through the lower speaker cover 19I. It is designed to convey the wind pressure associated with the sound output.

(Ball lending button, return button)
At the lower right side of the game frame 5, a ball lending button 20 and a return button 21 are arranged. When the player operates the ball lending button 20, game balls are paid out to the trays (upper tray 15 and lower tray), and the game balls are loaned to the player. Furthermore, when the player operates the return button 21, settlement processing regarding the gaming value balance is performed.

(side unit)
An inverted L-shaped side unit 22 is removably arranged on the upper right side of the front frame 4. This side unit 22 includes a blower device 22a equipped with an air blower, a touch device 22b having a touch sensor, a side unit movable part (not shown) and a side unit movable part motor 22c, a side unit position detection switch 22d, and an LED. It is composed of a side unit LED board (not shown).

This side unit 22 is configured to be detachable from the front frame 4 without using any tools with the front frame 4 open. Specifically, there is a hand screw (not shown) provided on the back side of the front frame 4 and provided penetrating from the back side toward the front side, and a hand screw (not shown) provided on the back side of the front frame 4 and provided on the side unit 22 side. It is designed to be detachable by operating a clamp (not shown) for locking the provided locking portion 22e. One hand screw is placed on the upper left side of the front frame, two places on the right side of the front frame, and one clamp is placed on the upper right side of the front frame.

Furthermore, an opening 22f is provided at the upper part of the back side of the side unit 22 for accessing the connection connector provided inside the side unit. By making it possible to attach and detach the harness and the connector inside the side unit, the side unit 22 can be electrically connected and disconnected.

In this way, by forming a part of the front frame 4 into a unit and making the unit part relatively easy to replace, the design of the game frame 5 can be changed easily and at low cost. In addition, by simply replacing the unit, it is possible to adopt a frame design or functional device that matches the motif of the model being sold, dramatically increasing the degree of freedom in development.

FIGS. 1-3 are perspective views of the back side of the gaming machine 1 shown in this embodiment.

(Prize ball payout device)
A prize ball payout device 23 is provided from the top to the right side of the back of the gaming machine 1. The prize ball payout device 23 includes a storage tank 23a, a payout motor 23b, a ball counting switch 23c, an out-of-supply detection switch 23d, a payout cassette 23e, a payout rotary body (not shown), and a discharge lever (not shown). . By operating the prize ball payout device 23, a payout operation of game balls is executed, and the game balls are paid out to the player.

(board case)
In the lower part of the back of the game machine 1, a power board case 24 in which a power board 50 was stored, and a payout firing control board 51 arranged on the back side so as to overlap with the power board case 24 in the front-back direction were stored. A payout board case 25, a main board case 26 located above the main board case 26 in which the main control board 52 is stored, and a production IF board 53, a liquid crystal control board 54, a liquid crystal IF board 55, and a ROM board 56 located above it. The stored effect board cases 27 are arranged to be removable. Further, the power supply board case 24 and the payout board case 25 are mounted on the game frame 5 side, and the main board case 26 and the production board case 27 are mounted on the game board 8 side. Here, each of the board cases 24, 25, 26, and 27 is colorless and transparent, and is shaped so that the board inside can be easily seen through.

Case heat radiation holes 25a, 26a, and 27a are formed on the upper surface of each board case 24, 25, 26, and 27 to radiate heat generated from electronic components within the board to the outside. The payout board case 25, the main board case 26, and the effect board case 27 have case heat radiation holes 25a, 26a, and 27a formed relatively smaller than those of the power board case 24. This is to prevent tampering such as accessing electronic components inside the board from the case heat radiation holes 25a, 26a, and 27a. On the other hand, the power supply board case 24 is provided with relatively large case heat radiation holes (not shown) with emphasis on heat radiation efficiency.

Further, each of the board cases 24, 25, 26, and 27 is configured to house each board therein by combining an upper case body and a lower case body. Here, the payout board case 25, the main board case 26, and the effect board case 27 are provided with caulking parts (not shown) that seal the upper case body and the lower case body inseparably after they are combined. The caulking portion is constituted by a caulking pin integrally molded on the lower case body, and when coupled, the caulking pin is inserted into the upper case body to create a sealed state, making it impossible to easily open the seal. In this way, by making it difficult to open the case, it is possible to suppress trifling behavior.

Further, the payout board case 25 and the main board case 26 are further provided with a seal (not shown) and a seal cutter (not shown), and the seal cutter always destroys the seal when opening the case. is configured to be As a result, if the caulked portion is broken and the case is opened, the seal will also be damaged, so it is possible to leave traces of the opening.

(back cover)
A transparent resin back cover (not shown) is provided on the back of the gaming machine 1 so that it can be opened and closed. When the back cover is closed, the power supply board case 24 stores the power supply board 50, the payout board case 25 stores the payout firing control board 51, the main board case 26 stores the main control board 52, and the production IF board. 53, an effect board case 27 in which a liquid crystal control board 54, a liquid crystal IF board 55, and a ROM board 56 are housed is arranged so as to be housed inside the back cover. As a result, each of the substrates 50 to 56 is arranged so as to be visible through the back cover, and is also protected by the back cover.

Further, the back cover is provided with back cover heat radiation holes corresponding to the arrangement positions of each board for radiating heat generated from electronic components in each board to the outside. In addition to the heat radiation holes, an opening is provided to allow access to the setting key switch 523 provided on the main control board 52 when the back cover is closed.

(external terminal version)
An external terminal board 60 is provided on the upper back side of the gaming machine 1. A plurality of connectors (connectors 1 to 13) for external output are arranged on the external terminal board 60, and the gaming machine of this embodiment transmits a predetermined external signal to the hall computer (via the external terminal board 60). It is configured so that it can be transmitted to the hall facilities (equipment on the hall facility side).

(Block Diagram)
FIGS. 1-4 show block diagrams of the control system of the gaming machine 1 shown in this embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 shown in this embodiment includes a power supply board 50 that generates and supplies the necessary power to each board of the gaming machine 1 from an external power supply, a payout control by a prize ball payout device 23, and a firing handle unit 13 (launching). A payout firing control board 51 that controls the firing of game balls based on the amount of operation of the handle 13a), a main control board 52 that centrally controls gaming operations, a performance IF board 53 that executes performance operations, and a liquid crystal control board. 54, a liquid crystal IF board 55, and a ROM board 56. In Figure 1-4, the connection relationship between each board is shown by arrows. As shown in the figure, one-sided arrows indicate one-way communication, and double-sided arrows indicate two-way communication (the direction of the arrow indicates communication direction). Similarly, the connection relationships of electronic components (switches, sensors, solenoids, motors, speakers, devices, units, display devices, etc.) connected to each board are also illustrated. Furthermore, the boards and electronic components surrounded by dotted lines as frame-side mounted components indicate that they are mounted on the gaming frame 5 side of the gaming machine 1, and other boards and electronic components are It shows that it is mounted on the game board 8 side. The details of each are described below.

(power supply board)
A power switch 500 is provided on the power supply board 50, and by operating the power switch 500, it is possible to input external AC power (such as 100V from a commercial power supply or 24V transformed by a transformer) to the gaming machine. It becomes. The power supply board 50 includes a rectifier circuit for converting the taken-in AC power into DC power and a conversion circuit for converting the generated DC power into a predetermined DC voltage. The power supply board 50 is connected to a payout firing control board 51, a main control board 52, and a performance IF board 53 via connectors, and supplies DC power of a predetermined voltage converted by a conversion circuit to each board 51 to 56. are doing. This DC power source includes a backup power source, and by supplying the backup power source to the payout firing control board 51 via the main control board 52 and the backup board 61, the main control CPU 520 of the main control board 52 and The payout control CPU 510 of the payout firing control board 51 is configured to perform backup processing. Further, the power supply board 50 has a power supply monitoring section that monitors turning on and off of the AC power supply, and is configured to output a power abnormality signal when the power supply monitoring section detects the cutoff of the AC power supply. This power supply abnormality signal is output to the dispensing and firing control board 51 and the main control board 52, and is used in the processing for determining a power supply abnormality by the dispensing control CPU 510 of the dispensing and firing control board 51 and the main control CPU 520 of the main control board 52. Ru.

(control board)
As a board for executing various controls related to the game, a payout/discharge control board 51, a main control board 52, a production IF board 53, a liquid crystal control board 54, a liquid crystal IF board 55, and a ROM board 56 are provided.

The payout and launch control board 51 is a board that mainly controls the payout and launch of game balls, and is a payout control unit of a one-chip microcontroller having a CPU core (payout control CPU 510) and built-in memory (built-in ROM, built-in RWM). 510 (dispensing control means) is installed. The payout control unit 510 is arranged so as to be visible from the outside of the payout board case 25.

The main control board 52 is a board that performs overall control regarding the game, and is a main control unit 520 (main control means) of a one-chip microcontroller having a CPU core (main control CPU 520) and built-in memory (built-in ROM, built-in RWM). ), a performance display LED 521, an RWM clear switch 522, and a setting key switch 523 are installed. The RWM clear switch 522 and setting key switch 523 are provided so as to be operable from outside the main board case 26, and the main control unit 520 and performance display LED 521 are arranged so as to be visible from the outside of the main board case 26. has been done.

The production IF board 53, the liquid crystal control board 54, the liquid crystal IF board 55, and the ROM board 56 (collectively referred to as the production control board) are used for various production means (speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d, LEDs 63a, 64a, This is a board that controls the animal motors 14d, 22c, 30, and LCD unit 31) to execute the performance operation, and the performance IF board 53 has movable parts (middle button movable part, side unit movable part, board side movable part). (Lower movable part 30a, upper movable part 30b) The liquid crystal control board 54 includes a control ROM 542 that stores programs for processing by the production control unit 540 (production control CPU, production control means), VDP circuit 541, and production control unit 540. It is installed. Further, the ROM board 56 is equipped with a performance ROM 560 (CGROM) that stores image data. The production IF board 53, the liquid crystal control board 54, the liquid crystal IF board 55, and the ROM board 56 are connected by drawer connectors 32, respectively, and when the boards are combined together, they are placed in a common board case (production board case 27). ) is stored in.

(Payout control unit)
The payout control unit 510 includes a payout control CPU that is an 8-bit microprocessor, a ROM that stores programs and data related to games, and an RWM that has a work area that stores game information and a stack area that stores a stack pointer. It is configured.

Although not shown, the payout control unit 510 includes a clock generation circuit for generating an internal clock, and a WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring program stoppage or runaway and resetting the payout control unit 510 and internal functions. ), a PTC (timer circuit) that counts a timer value and outputs an interrupt request signal when it reaches a predetermined value, and an interrupt controller that can execute an interrupt processing program by accepting the interrupt request signal from the PTC. , a serial communication circuit (asynchronous serial communication circuit) for serial communication with the outside, a parallel input/output port for parallel communication with the outside, and multiple types of resets (power supply to the payout control unit 510). A reset controller that generates a system reset (which occurs when the WDT drops, a WDT reset by the WDT, and a user reset which occurs when it is determined that a designated prohibited area of the program has been accessed), and built-in functions to control these functions. Equipped with registers etc.

The main role of the payout control unit 510 is to receive lending commands from the game ball lending device 33 and payout control commands from the main control unit 520, thereby dispensing game balls and issuing prize balls for prize balls. This is to execute payout control of the payout device 23.

(Payout launch control board)
The payout firing control board 51 receives power supply from the power supply board 50 to operate switches (ball counting switch 23c, out-of-supply detection switch 23d, firing stop switch 34, frame opening switch 35, ball jam detection switch 36), and drive. source (dispensing motor 23b, firing solenoid 37a, ball feeding solenoid 37b), sensors (handle touch sensor 13b), various boards (power board 50, main control board 52, external terminal board 60, backup board 61, frequency display board 62) ), and are electrically connected to an external device (gaming ball rental device 33) via a relay board (not shown) as necessary.

As a result, the payout control unit 510 can mainly receive the lending request signal from the game ball lending device 33 and the prize ball signal (prize ball command) from the main control unit 520, and receive the signal. Based on this, by driving the payout motor 23b, the payout control of game balls by the prize ball payout device 23 is executed. It also plays a role of executing firing control by driving the firing solenoid 37a and the ball feed solenoid 37b based on the detection by the handle touch sensor 13b when the firing handle 13a is operated by the player.

Further, the payout control unit 510 is configured to have the following functions (1) to (6).
(1) Based on the abnormality detection of the out-of-supply detection switch 23d, it is possible to know that there is a shortage of payout game balls.
(2) Based on the abnormality detection of the ball clogging detection switch 36, it is possible to know that the lower tray is full.
(3) Based on the detection of an abnormality in the ball counting switch 23c, it is possible to know that excessive payout of game balls is occurring.
(4) Based on the detection of the frame opening switches 35a and 35b, it can be determined that the inner frame 3 or the front frame 4 is open.
(5) Based on the detection of the firing stop switch 34, the firing solenoid 37a is de-energized to stop the firing of the game ball by the firing handle unit 13.
(6) It is possible to detect that the switches 23c, 23d, 34, 35a, 35b, and 36 are disconnected.

When the payout control unit 510 detects signals from the ball counting switch 23c, the out-of-supply detection switch 23d, the frame release switches 35a and 35b, and the ball jam detection switch 36, it can transmit the information to the main control unit 520. It is composed of Furthermore, when the power is turned on, when the startup of the payout control CPU is completed, a payout communication signal indicating that the payout control CPU is normally started can be transmitted to the main control unit 520.

By receiving backup power supplied from the backup board 61, the payout control unit 510 is able to store the contents of the built-in RWM even when the power is cut off, so that it can be restored from the backup when the power is turned on. configured to be possible.

(Prize ball payout device 2)
The payout control of the prize ball payout device 23 by the payout control unit 510 will be described in detail. The game balls supplied from the supply device (hall equipment installed to supply game balls to the storage tank 23a) pass through the storage tank 23a at the top of the game frame 5 and are located on the right side of the back of the game frame 5. The game balls are guided to the payout cassette 23e through a storage ball alignment path 23f provided in an inclined manner so as to align and roll in a line. The game balls that have reached the payout cassette 23e come into contact with a payout rotating body (not shown) in the payout cassette 23e and remain in a stationary state until a payout operation is executed. With the first game ball in the parked state in this way, the subsequent game balls are accumulated in the storage ball alignment path 23f and the storage tank 23a. This completes the loading of game balls into the game machine.

When the player operates the ball lending button 20 and a lending signal is sent to the payout control unit 510, the payout control unit 510 sends a motor control signal to the payout motor 23b located in the payout cassette 23e. In addition, each winning hole switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a of each winning hole 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45 arranged in the gaming area 8a of the game board 8 is operated. Similarly, when a ball passes and a winning signal is transmitted to the main control unit 520, and a winning signal is transmitted from the main control unit 520 that received the winning signal to the payout control unit 510, the payout control unit 510 A motor control signal is transmitted to the payout motor 23b located inside the payout cassette 23e. As a result, the payout operation of the game balls is executed.

When the dispensing motor 23b is driven, the dispensing rotating body rotates 90 degrees in conjunction with the drive of the motor. As a result, the game balls in contact with the payout rotary body are pushed out and guided toward the payout path. Furthermore, since the game balls that were in contact are guided to the payout passage, the subsequent game balls that have been accumulated are newly brought into contact with the payout rotary body.

A ball counting switch 23c is installed in the payout passage, and when the ball counting switch 23c detects a game ball, a ball counting signal is transmitted to the payout control section 510. The payout control unit 510 is capable of counting the paid game balls by receiving the ball counting signal. The payout control unit 510 drives the payout motor 23b and the payout rotary body until the number of game balls detected by the ball counting switch 23c reaches the number of balls scheduled to be paid out in advance, and ends the payout operation when the number of game balls detected reaches the number of balls to be paid out. do.

An out-of-supply detection switch 23d is provided in the storage bulb alignment path 23f. When the out-of-supply detection switch 23d enters the detection state (a state in which no stored balls are detected), an out-of-supply signal is transmitted to the payout control unit 510. When the dispensing control unit 510 receives the out-of-supply signal, it transmits a motor control signal to the dispensing motor 23b to stop driving the dispensing motor 23b. As a result, the payout operation is not performed unless the game machine is sufficiently loaded with game balls.

Further, the payout cassette 23e is provided with a discharge lever that guides the game balls in the payout cassette 23e to the discharge passage side so as to be located upstream of the payout rotary body. When the ejection lever is operated, the game balls accumulated in the payout cassette 23e are guided to the ejection passage side, pass through the ejection passage, and are discharged from the game ball ejection port at the bottom of the back of the gaming machine 1. is discharged to the outside. Here, as long as the operation of the discharge lever continues, all the game balls accumulated in the storage ball alignment passage 23f and the storage tank 23a will be guided to the payout passage side, leaving the gaming machine 1 in the unloaded state. It is now possible to do so. Incidentally, the game balls that are in contact with the payout rotary body and the game balls that stay between the payout lever and the payout rotary body remain without being guided to the discharge passage side.

(Ball lending button, return button 2)
Ball lending control by the payout control unit 510 will be described in detail. The ball lending button 20 and the return button 21 are provided on the frequency display board 62, and when a player operates the ball lending button 20, a lending signal is sent to the game ball lending device 33 installed on the hall facility side. Sent. When the game ball lending device 33 receives the lending signal, it outputs a lending request signal to the payout control unit 510. When the payout control unit 510 receives the lending request signal, it executes the lending process of a predetermined unit number of game balls. As a result, the game balls are paid out to the tray, and the game balls are lent to the player.

In addition to the ball lending button 20 and the return button 21, the frequency display board 62 is provided with a frequency display 62a. The balance display 62a displays information on the balance of money, etc. that the player has inserted into the game ball lending device 33. When the player operates the ball lending button 20, the above-mentioned lending process is performed, and the game ball lending device 33 updates the balance information on the frequency display 62a. On the other hand, when the player operates the return button 21, the game ball lending device 33 clears the balance information on the frequency display 62a, and the game value balance is settled for the player.

(Saucer 2)
The discharge control of game balls on the tray by the payout control unit 510 will be described in detail. The upper tray 15 stores the game balls that have been paid out and the game balls that have been thrown in by the player, and is formed to have an alignment path in which the stored game balls are arranged in a line. A static electricity shield plate for preventing static electricity is provided at the location where the game balls are lined up in a line. The alignment path is connected to the ball feeding cassette 23e driven by the ball feeding solenoid 37b, so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 15 are supplied to the ball feeding cassette 23e.

When the ball feeding solenoid 37b is energized by the payout control unit 510, the ball feeding cassette 23e is driven to supply game balls from the alignment path to the firing rail (not shown), and further, When the firing solenoid 36 is energized by the paying-out control unit 510, the game balls loaded on the firing rail are shot out with a mallet.

The upper tray 15 has an upper plate ball removing portion, and this upper plate ball removing portion is constituted by a ball removing button 48 and a ball removing shutter (not shown). When the ball extraction button 48 is operated, the ball extraction shutter is opened and the game balls stored in the upper tray 15 are guided to the lower tray. When the ball removal button 48 is no longer operated, the ball removal shutter is closed.

The lower tray contains the game balls that have been paid out, the game balls that have been guided when the upper tray 15 is full and cannot be stored, the game balls that have been guided by the opening of the ball removal shutter, and the game balls that have been launched from the launch rail. It is formed to store game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 8a formed on the game board 8. Incidentally, the game balls that have not reached the game area 8a are configured to be guided to the lower tray by passing through the foul ball passage.

Further, the lower tray has a lower plate ball removing portion, and this lower plate ball removing portion is constituted by a ball removing lever (not shown). When the ball removal lever is operated in the opening direction, an opening is formed in a part of the lower tray, and the game balls stored in the lower tray are discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 1. When the ball removal lever is operated in the closing direction, the opening portion is closed by the ball removal lever.

Further, a ball clogging detection switch 36 is provided in the supply path that supplies game balls to the lower tray. When game balls continue to be supplied even though the lower tray is full, game balls are accumulated in the supply passage. When the ball jam detection switch 36 detects the accumulated game balls, it sends a full detection signal to the payout control section 510. When the payout control unit 510 receives the full tank detection signal, it temporarily stops the payout operation of the game balls and transmits a lower tray full signal to the main control unit 520. When the main control section 520 receives the lower tray full signal, it transmits a lower tray full error notification command to the production control section 540. As a result, when the lower tray becomes full, the effect control unit 540 is configured to notify the lower tray that the lower tray is full.

(Fire handle unit 2)
The firing control of the firing handle unit 13 by the dispensing control section 510 will be described in detail. When the player touches the firing handle 13a, the handle touch sensor 13b senses the player's operation, and a handle touch sensor signal is transmitted to the payout control unit 510. By receiving this handle touch sensor signal, the payout control unit 510 becomes in a state where the firing solenoid 37a and the ball feeding solenoid 37b can be energized.

The firing intensity adjustment section detects a change in resistance value according to the amount of operation of the firing handle 13a, and transmits the detection result to the dispensing control section 510. When the payout control unit 510 receives the detection result, it energizes the firing solenoid 37a with a current value corresponding to the changed resistance value. In this way, by changing the current value received by the firing solenoid 37a, the launch distance of the game ball changes, and the player can arbitrarily adjust the flight distance of the game ball fired.

Furthermore, when the ball feed solenoid 37b is energized, the game ball is supplied to a firing rail (not shown), and the game balls loaded on the firing rail are driven by the aforementioned firing solenoid 37a. It is configured to be launched by a hammer (configuration of launcher). In this way, by repeatedly energizing the payout control unit 510, it is designed to be able to shoot out 99.9 game balls one by one per minute. Note that the game balls are supplied one by one to the firing rail.

When the firing stop button is operated, a firing stop switch signal is transmitted to the payout control unit 510. When the payout control unit 510 receives the firing stop switch signal, the firing solenoid 37a is de-energized and the firing of game balls is stopped. Note that even if the firing handle 13a is not operated, the firing stop switch 34 sends a firing stop switch signal to the dispensing control unit 510.

Further, when the game ball lending device 33 is not connected or when the firing control signal transmitted from the main control unit 520 is OFF, the payout control unit 510 is configured to stop energizing the firing solenoid 37a. There is.

In addition, by configuring the above-mentioned handle touch sensor signal to be sent not only to the payout control unit 510 but also to the production control unit 540, the production control unit 540 can perform the firing process when receiving the handle touch sensor signal. The structure is such that the LEDs on the handle LED board can be controlled to emit light.

(Frame release switch)
Information transmission by the payout control unit 510 to the main control unit 520 will be described in detail. The inner frame 3 is provided with a front frame release switch 35a for detecting opening of the front frame 4, and an inner frame release switch 35b for detecting opening of the inner frame 3 itself with respect to the outer frame 2. When the front frame 4 is in the open state, a front frame open signal is transmitted from the front frame open switch 35a to the payout control section 510. When the payout control unit 510 receives the front frame opening signal, it transmits a door/frame opening signal to the main control unit 520. When the main control unit 520 receives the door/frame opening signal, it transmits a door/frame opening error notification command to the production control unit 540. As a result, when the front frame 4 becomes open, the production control section 540 is configured to issue an error notification.

Further, when the inner frame 3 becomes open with respect to the outer frame 2, an inner frame open signal is transmitted from the inner frame open switch 35b to the payout control section 510. When the payout control unit 510 receives the inner frame opening signal, it transmits a door/frame opening signal to the main control unit 520. When the main control unit 520 receives the door/frame opening signal, it transmits a door/frame opening error notification command to the production control unit 540. As a result, when the front frame 4 becomes open, the effect control section 540 is configured to issue a door/frame opening error notification. Here, regardless of whether the front frame 4 is opened or the inner frame 3 is opened, the payout control section 510 sends information to the main control section 520, and the main control section 520 sends information to the production control section 540, respectively. The contents of the error notification by the performance control unit 540 are similar.

(Main control section)
The main control unit 520 includes a main control CPU of an 8-bit microprocessor, a ROM that stores programs and data related to games, a work area that stores information related to game information and game results, and a stack area that stores a stack pointer. It is composed of:

In addition to programs and data related to games, the ROM contains ROM comments that can set arbitrary data such as the title and version of the program, and the beginning of the call destination used in predetermined command processing (call command). A vector table for setting addresses, HW parameters for setting parameters for setting internal functions of the main control unit 520 in terms of hardware, etc. are stored.

Although not shown, the main control unit 520 includes a clock generation circuit for generating an internal clock and four types of random number circuits (8-bit fixed-length random number circuit, 16-bit fixed-length random number circuit) for generating random numbers. , 8-bit variable-length random number circuit, 16-bit variable-length random number circuit), a WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring program stoppage or runaway, and resetting the main control unit 520 and internal functions, and counting timer values. A CTC (counter timer) outputs an interrupt request signal when a predetermined value is reached, and by accepting the interrupt request signal from the CTC, an interrupt controller that can execute an interrupt processing program and serial communication with the outside are established. serial communication circuits (asynchronous serial communication circuits and synchronous serial communication circuits) to perform A reset controller that generates periodic resets based on settings and illegal access resets that occur when it is determined that there has been unauthorized access to a prohibited area of ROM or RWM, and built-in function registers to control these functions. It is equipped with such things as

In addition, the main control unit 520 uses a 16-bit variable-length random number circuit as a jackpot determination random number (0 to 65535) among the four types of random number circuits for generating random numbers, and The jackpot lottery process is executed by determining whether the acquired random number is within a predetermined range.

The main role of the main control unit 520 is to manage overall gaming operations such as jackpot lottery processing, and to determine abnormalities in the gaming machine 1. In addition, when necessary, by transmitting a payout control command to the payout control unit 510 or a production control command to the production control unit 540, the payout control unit 510 or the production control unit 540 can be controlled as necessary. It controls the operation of peripheral devices controlled by the controller. Incidentally, commands are transmitted and received with the payout control section 510 through serial two-way communication, and commands are transmitted with the production control section 540 through parallel one-way communication.

(Main control board)
The main control board 52 receives power supply from the power supply board 50, and operates switches (special symbol 1 starting opening switch 38a, special symbol 2 starting opening switch 39a, winning opening switches 40a, 42a, 43a, big winning opening switch 44a). , 45a, right gate switch 46a, out switch 47a), drive source (big prize opening opening/closing solenoids 70, 71, special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72), various sensors (magnetic sensor 73, radio sensor 74, vibration sensor 75) , various boards (power supply board 50, payout firing control board 51, production IF board 53), display device (symbol display device 76), and are electrically connected via a relay board (not shown) as necessary. .

As a result, the main control unit 520 controls the special symbol 1 starting opening switch 38a, the special symbol 2 starting opening switch 39a, the winning opening switches 40a, 42a, 43a, the big winning opening switches 44a, 45a, the right gate switch 46a (normal symbol starting By being able to receive the detection signal of the opening switch), it can be determined that the game ball has entered any of the winning holes 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45. After this determination, if it is necessary to play a prize ball, the main control unit 520 sends a prize ball signal to the payout control unit 510, thereby paying out a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) to the player. It will be done.

Furthermore, the main control unit 520 is configured to detect fraudulent acts using magnets, radio waves, and shocks by receiving detection signals from the magnetic sensor 73, radio wave sensor 74, and vibration sensor 75.

In addition, the main control unit 520 drives the large winning opening opening/closing solenoids 70, 71 and the special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72, thereby controlling the opening/closing plates 44b, 45b of the grand winning openings 44, 45 and the special symbol 2 starting opening 39. It is configured to displace the movable piece 39b and control opening and closing to make it easy or difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the big prize openings 44, 45 and the special symbol 2 starting opening 39.

Moreover, the main control unit 520 is able to grasp the number of game balls fired into the game area 8a by receiving the detection signal of the out switch 47a.

In addition, the main control unit 520 transmits display information to the symbol display device 76 to display special symbol 1 variable display, special symbol 2 variable display, special symbol 1 memory display, special symbol 2 memory display, normal symbol variation display, It controls the display of information regarding the normal symbol memory display, right-handed display, round display, and status display.

(RWM clear switch)
The RWM clear switch 522 is provided so as to be accessible from the outside of the main board case 26, and is configured to be able to switch to an ON state when pressed and to an OFF state when not pressed by performing a pressing operation.

The RWM clear switch 522 performs initialization processing to initialize the built-in RWM area when the power is turned on, and jackpot probability in multiple stages (setting 1 to To execute the setting change process (S1006) to change to 6 stages of setting 6) and the setting confirmation process (S1013) to check which setting the current setting stage (setting value) is set to. is set as one of the conditions.

When the power is turned on, the main control unit 520 determines whether the RWM clear switch 522 is pressed. If it is determined that the button has been pressed, initialization processing of the built-in RWM is executed. If it is determined that the button has not been pressed, the contents of the backup flag are determined to determine whether or not the contents of the built-in RWM are normal. (Determination may be made using a checksum) As a result, if the contents of the built-in RWM are determined to be normal, the state will be restored to the state before the power cut, and if it is determined to be abnormal, the internal RWM Executes initialization processing.

Further, the payout control unit 510 also determines whether the RWM clear switch 522 provided on the main control board 52 is pressed when the power is turned on. If it is determined that the button has been pressed, initialization processing of the built-in RWM is executed. If it is determined that the button has not been pressed, the contents of the checksum are determined to determine whether the contents of the built-in RWM are normal or not. (The determination may be made using a backup flag.) As a result, if the contents of the built-in RWM are determined to be normal, the state will be restored to the state before the power cut, and if it is determined to be abnormal, the internal RWM Executes initialization processing.

(setting key switch)
The setting key switch 523 (setting operation means) is provided so as to be accessible from the outside of the main board case 26, and can be turned on/off by inserting the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 523 and rotating it. It is configured so that the state can be switched.

The setting key switch 523 performs a setting change process (S1006) for changing the jackpot probability into multiple stages (six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) by determining the ON/OFF state in the program of the main control CPU. ), or is set as one of the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process (S1013) for confirming which setting stage (setting value) is currently set.

Since a setting key is required to perform the setting change process (S1006) or the setting confirmation process (S1013), it is possible for people other than hall personnel to easily change or confirm the setting stage. It is configured so that it is not possible. The settings change process (S1006) or settings confirmation process (S1013) is configured so that it can be executed as long as the execution conditions are met even if the jackpot probability is only in one level (setting 1 only). Good too.

(Performance display LED)
The performance display LED 521 (performance display monitor, performance display means) is arranged on the main control board 52 so as to be visible from the outside of the main board case 26, and is an aggregate of multiple 7-segment indicators (4 pieces). It is made up of. The performance display LED 521 functions as a display means for displaying the following (1) to (3) depending on the situation.
(1) Functions as a setting display means for displaying setting information regarding the jackpot probability setting stage during setting change (S1006) or setting confirmation (S1013).
(2) RWM error display that displays information ("E") indicating that the RWM error state is in the RWM error state (S1008) when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RWM memory contents when the power is turned on. It functions as a means.
(3) After the power is turned on, in cases other than (1) and (2) above, a performance display means that displays the base value ((number of paid out pieces in low probability low base state ÷ number of out pieces in low probability low base state) x 100) functions as

(1) Regarding the function as a setting display means Corresponding to the setting stage (1st to 6th stage), numerical values ``1'' to ``6'' are displayed as setting information on the performance display LED 521 (multiple 7-segment display (shown on one of the vessels). Here, during the setting change (S1006), setting information with dot points added such as "1." to "6." is displayed to indicate that the setting information is in an unconfirmed change state. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, during setting confirmation (S1013), since the setting information has already been determined, the configuration is such that setting information of "1" to "6" (no dot points) is displayed.

(2) Function as RWM abnormality display means During an RWM error (S1008), error information of "E" is displayed to indicate the RWM error state. While the RWM error state continues, error information of "E" is always displayed.

(3) Regarding the function as a performance display means The number of payouts, which is the information necessary to calculate the base value, is the number of payouts required for calculating the base value. This is the total number of game balls paid out as prize balls when winning (middle winning hole 41, lower left winning hole 42, right winning hole 43, upper large winning hole 44, lower large winning hole 45), and a special symbol. 1 starting hole 38 has 1 prize ball, special design 2 starting hole 39 has 1 prize ball, upper left prize hole 40 has 5 prize balls, middle left prize hole 41 has 5 prize balls, lower left prize hole 42 has 5 prize balls. As for the prize balls, the right prize opening 43 has 2 prize balls, the upper university prize opening 44 has 15 prize balls, and the lower university prize opening 45 has 10 prize balls.

In addition, the number of outs, which is information necessary when calculating the base value, is the number of outs that are fired into the game area 8a. This is the number detected by the out switch 47a when passing through and finally being ejected (≒ the number of game balls fired into the game area).

Information regarding the base value ((number of payouts in low probability low base state ÷ number of outs in low probability low base state) x 100) includes the real-time base value currently being measured, the first cumulative base value measured one time ago, The second cumulative base value measured the second time and the third cumulative base value measured three times before can be displayed.

Further, among the four 7-segment displays configured as performance display means, two displays are used as identification segments, and the remaining two displays are used as ratio segments. For example, when displaying the real-time base value, the "base value" is displayed with "bL." as the identification segment and the ratio segment.

Furthermore, when displaying the first cumulative base value, "b1." is used as the identification segment and "base value" is used as the ratio segment, and when displaying the second cumulative base value, "b2." is used as the ratio segment. When displaying the "base value" as the segment and the third cumulative base value, "b3." is displayed as the identification segment and "base value" as the ratio segment. The performance display means displays the real-time base value → first cumulative base value → second cumulative base value → third cumulative base value for 5 seconds each, and repeats this cycle to repeatedly display each base value. is configured to do so.

Here, each base value is aggregated for every 60,000 cumulative outs in all gaming states (low probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability low base state, high probability high base state, jackpot gaming state) It is a numerical value. Specifically, if 60,000 cumulative outs are reached during real-time base value measurement, the value of the second cumulative base value is stored as the third cumulative base value (the old third cumulative base value is discarded). ), the value of the first cumulative base value is stored as a second cumulative base value, and the information of the real-time base value is stored as the first cumulative base value. Then, a new measurement of the real-time base value is started until the cumulative out reaches 60,000 again.

When measuring the real-time base value, the display of the real-time base value is configured to blink until the cumulative number of outs reaches 6000 (from 0 to 5999), and after reaching 6000, the display is lit. ing. Here, the reason why the display blinks until the cumulative number of outs reaches 6000 is because the base value is temporarily unstable during a period when the cumulative number of outs is small (it may temporarily move upward or downward in a short period of time). This is to show that unreliable data is likely to occur because there is a possibility that the

In addition, as mentioned above, the first to third cumulative base values are accumulated by repeating the measurement of real-time base values every 60,000 pieces, but if they have not been accumulated yet, the first to third cumulative base values When displaying, "--" is displayed to indicate that there is no value.

Furthermore, after the power is turned on for the first time until the number of outs in all game states reaches 300, all of the real-time base value and the first to third cumulative base values are displayed as "--". This is also for the same reason as mentioned above, because the base value is temporarily unstable during a period when the cumulative number of outs is small.

(External terminal board 2)
The external terminal board 60 is connected to the main control section 520 via the payout and firing control board 51, and when the main control section 520 outputs an outer end signal related to predetermined external output information, the external terminal board 60 transmits the information to the hall computer. (hall facility equipment).

The external terminal board 60 is provided with a plurality of output terminals, and is configured to output external terminal signals from different output terminals according to the contents of the plurality of types of external output information output from the main control section 520. ing. This makes it possible to individually transmit information to the hall computer HC.

(Production control section)
The performance control unit 540 includes a performance control CPU that is a 32-bit microprocessor, a ROM 542 that stores programs and data related to the game performance, and an RWM that has a work area that stores information regarding the game performance and a stack area that stores a stack pointer. It is configured with

The production control unit 540 includes a VDP circuit 541 (drawing circuit) having a drawing function for drawing image data to be displayed on the LCD unit 31 (image display means), a sound circuit having a sound reproduction function, and an LED lighting circuit. It is composed of a composite chip that includes an LED circuit with a function, a motor circuit with a motor drive function, a production control section 540, a WDT circuit that resets internal functions, and the like. In this embodiment, only the VDP circuit 541 (drawing circuit) is used, and for audio reproduction and motor drive, the audio IC 532 and the movable object IC 531 arranged on the production IF board 53 are used. By doing so, effects are realized using the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, and 19d and movable parts (middle push button movable part, side unit movable part, board side movable part (lower movable part 30a, upper movable part 30b)). Further, as for the WDT circuit, although not shown, an external WDT circuit provided on the liquid crystal control board 54 is used.

The effect control unit 540 also controls the built-in VRAM used by the VDP circuit 541 (drawing circuit) to generate image data to be displayed on the image display means 31, and the drawing operation by the VDP circuit 541 (drawing circuit). A preload operation is performed in which the production ROM 560 (CGROM) is accessed in advance and the display list DL containing image data and drawing contents is temporarily transferred to the built-in VRAM or external DRAM (mounted on the liquid crystal control board 54). A preloader circuit for execution, a decoder circuit for decoding the compressed data of the image read from the performance ROM 560 (CGROM), and a decoder circuit for reading the image data drawn in the frame buffer area provided in the built-in VRAM, and decoding the data if necessary. It also includes a display circuit that outputs display image data to the LCD unit 31 after performing appropriate image processing, and an LVDS conversion circuit that converts the data output to the LCD unit 31 into an LVDS signal and transmits the signal. It is configured.

In addition, the production control unit 540 uses a DMAC circuit (Direct Memory Access Controller) that can transfer data (program data, variable data, lamp data, sound data, motor data, display list) without going through the production control CPU. Built-in.

In addition, the performance control unit 540 is configured to be able to appropriately obtain timekeeping information from an RTC circuit (mounted on the liquid crystal control board 54) having a timekeeping function.

The main role of the production control unit 540 is to receive production control commands from the main control unit 520, select production content based on the received production control commands, and display images using the VDP circuit 541 (drawing circuit). Display control of means 31, audio control by speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d using audio IC 532, light emission control of panel side LED 63a of panel side LED board 63 and frame side LED 64a of frame side LED board 64, for movable parts This is to perform drive control by movable parts (middle push button movable part, side unit movable part, panel side movable part (lower movable part 30a, upper movable part 30b)) using the IC531. In this way, by chronologically combining various performance controls by the performance control unit 540 according to the performance scenario, performance patterns such as symbol variation performance and preview performance are realized.

Note that the production control command from the main control unit 520 is formed of a 2-byte structure consisting of a 1-byte long upper command (MODE) and a lower command (EVENT). If there is a command to be transmitted, the main control unit 520 first transmits a first strobe signal to the production control unit 540, and then transmits a higher-level command (MODE). After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the transmission of the upper command (MODE), a second strobe signal is transmitted and the lower command (EVENT) is transmitted.

On the other hand, when the production control section 540 receives the first strobe signal from the main control section 520, it generates an interrupt process for command reception and executes the reception process of the upper command (MODE). Furthermore, when the second strobe signal is received, an interrupt process for command reception is similarly generated, and the reception process of the lower command (EVENT) is executed. In this way, by executing the production control command reception process using interrupt processing, the command reception process is not interrupted by the execution of other program processes, and reception errors due to complicated program processes can be avoided. It is designed not to.

(Production IF board, LCD control board, LCD IF board, ROM board)
The production IF board 53, the liquid crystal control board 54, the liquid crystal IF board 55, and the ROM board 56 (collectively referred to as the production control board) receive power from the power supply board 50, and operate switches (middle push button position detection switch 14c). , side unit position detection switch 22d, volume/light level button detection switch 16c, 16d, 17c, 17d, cross button detection switch 49a, 49b, 49c, 49d, panel side movable object position detection switch 77), drive source (side unit possible) Animal motor 22c, middle push button movable motor 14d, panel side movable motor 30), various devices (blower device 22a, touch device 22b, LCD unit 31), various boards (power supply board 50, main control board 52, panel side LED) It is electrically connected to the board 63 and the frame side LED board 64 via a relay board (not shown) as necessary. (The boards on which LEDs are mounted, such as the panel side LED board 63 and the frame side LED board 64, are collectively referred to as decorative boards.)

As a result, the production control unit 540 can receive detection signals from the middle press button position detection switch 14c, the volume/light level button detection switches 16c, 16d, 17c, 17d, and the cross button detection switches 49a, 49b, 49c, and 49d. It is configured to be able to detect that each button has been operated.

In addition, the production control unit 540 receives the detection signals of the middle press button position detection switch 14c, the side unit position detection switch 22d, and the board side movable object position detection switch 77, thereby detecting the movable objects (middle push button movable object, side unit movable object). It is configured such that drive control can be performed while grasping the movable positions of the animal and the movable parts on the board side (lower movable part 30a, upper movable part 30b). Also, based on the detection signals from each position detection switch 14c, 22d, 77, movable parts (middle push button movable part, side unit movable part, panel side movable part (lower movable part 30a, upper movable part 30b)) are movable. If it is determined that there is a malfunction in the position, the movable member is moved again until a detection signal is obtained from each of the position detection switches 14c, 22d, and 77, or a predetermined error notification regarding a movable object abnormality is issued.

In addition, the production control unit 540 controls the movable parts (middle push button movable part, side unit movable part, board side movable part) by driving the side unit movable part motor 22c, the middle push button movable part motor 14d, and the board side movable part motor 30. The animal (lower movable object 30a, upper movable object 30b)) is configured to be able to perform movable performance operations.

Furthermore, the effect control section 540 can blow out air for effect from the air outlet provided in the side unit 22 by driving the blower device 22a. Furthermore, by driving the touch device 22b, a predetermined effect can be executed in response to the player's operation of the touch device 22b.

In addition, the production control unit 540 sends lighting signals to the board-side LED 63a mounted on the board-side LED board 63 and the frame-side LED 64a mounted on the frame-side LED board 64, so that each LED 63a and 64a emit light ( (lit) is configured to be able to execute the performance.

Note that a motor driver (not shown) intervenes in the communication between the production control unit 540 and the movable parts (middle push button movable part, side unit movable part, board side movable part (lower movable part 30a, upper movable part 30b)). By sending drive data to the motor driver, the production control unit 540 allows the motor driver to control movable objects (middle push button movable region, side unit movable region, board side movable region (lower movable region)) according to the drive data. The animal 30a and the upper movable object 30b)) are being driven. Incidentally, in this embodiment, since the movable object IC 530 is used, the effect control section 540 transmits drive effect data to the movable object IC 530, and the movable object IC 530 transmits drive data corresponding to the received drive effect data to the motor. By transmitting the information to the driver, the movable parts (middle push button movable part, side unit movable part, panel side movable part (lower movable part 30a, upper movable part 30b)) are driven.

In addition, an LED driver (not shown) is involved in the communication between the production control unit 540 and each LED 63a, 64a, and the production control unit 540 transmits lighting data to the LED driver, so that the LED driver Lighting control of each LED 63a, 64a is executed according to lighting data. Incidentally, it is possible to control the lighting of a plurality of LEDs with one LED driver, and there is a panel-side LED driver for controlling the lighting of the plurality of panel-side LEDs 63a mounted on the panel-side LED board 63, and a panel-side LED driver mounted on the frame-side LED board 64. A plurality of frame-side LED drivers are provided for controlling lighting of the plurality of frame-side LEDs 64a.

(Middle push button unit 2)
The performance using the middle press button unit 14 by the performance control unit 540 will be described in detail. When the player operates the middle push button pressing part 14a (operating means), the middle push button detection switch 14b detects the player's operation and transmits an operation detection signal to the production control section 540. The effect control unit 540 is configured to be able to perform or switch predetermined effects (images, lamps, sounds, movable objects, etc.) by receiving an operation detection signal.

Further, based on a predetermined control signal transmitted from the main control section 520 to the production control section 540, a motor control signal is transmitted from the production control section 540 to the middle press button movable object motor 14d. As a result, the movable part motor is driven to move the middle push button movable part 14d. Here, although not particularly limited, a stepping motor may be used as the movable motor 14d. By driving the stepping motor to rotate as appropriate, the movable part of the middle press button can be moved or stopped according to a predetermined effect.

Further, in this embodiment, a DC motor (vibration means) is mounted as the movable motor 14d in addition to the above-mentioned stepping motor. By rotationally driving this DC motor, it is possible to perform a vibration effect that vibrates the middle press button pressing part 14d. Here, when executing the vibration effect, by appropriately changing the torque setting value of the DC motor, it is possible to change the intensity of the vibration of the vibration effect according to the winning expectation level. Incidentally, the middle push button pressing portion 14d may be driven by using an AC motor or a stepping motor instead of the DC motor.

Also, based on a predetermined control signal sent from the main control unit 520 to the production control unit 540, by transmitting an LED drive control signal from the production control unit 540 to the middle push button LED board, the LED on the middle push button LED board The structure allows the light emission to be controlled.

Further, the middle press button pressing portion 14d is used in a predetermined preview performance (operation performance). When the player performs a predetermined operation (single press, repeated press, long press, etc.) during the valid operation time set in the predetermined preview effect (operation effect), the predetermined effect (image, lamp, sound) is activated. , movable objects, etc.). It should be noted that during the valid operation period, the LED of the middle press button LED board is controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, thereby informing the player that the operation is valid.

(Volume adjustment button 2)
The performance using the volume adjustment button 16 by the performance control unit 540 will be described in detail. When the player operates the upper volume button 16a (or lower volume button 16b), the upper volume button switch 16c (or lower volume button switch 16d) detects the operation and transmits a volume operation detection signal to the performance control section 540. The performance control unit 540 changes the output volume output from the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, and 19d by receiving the volume operation detection signal.

The output volume that can be changed by the volume adjustment button 16 is comprised of 10 levels. Volume setting 1 is the lowest, the output volume increases as the volume setting level increases, and volume setting 10 is the highest output volume. The current volume setting is designed to be displayed on the image display means 31, and is displayed when the upper volume button 16a (or lower volume button 16b) is operated by the player. Based on the volume operation detection signal output in response, the performance control section 540 is configured to display volume setting information indicating the current volume setting on the image display means 31.

In addition, even if the player does not play a game for a predetermined period of time, the effect control section 540 is configured to display the current volume setting on the display means. Furthermore, the display mode of the volume setting information is changed depending on whether or not a game is being played. During gaming, the volume setting information is displayed in a smaller display size than when not playing, and the display position is designed to be displayed closer to the edge of the display screen. This is because there are more other displayed objects (symbol variation images, pending images, preview images, etc.) during gaming than during non-gaming, and the display positions should not overlap as much as possible.

(Light intensity adjustment button 2)
The effect using the light amount adjustment button 17 by the effect control unit 540 will be described in detail. When the player operates the upper light amount button 17a (or the lower light amount button 17b), the upper light amount button switch 17c (or the lower light amount button switch 17d) detects the operation and transmits a light amount operation detection signal to the performance control section 540. The effect control unit 540 changes the light intensity of each LED 63a, 64a by receiving the light intensity operation detection signal.

The amount of light that can be changed using the light amount adjustment button 17 is comprised of three levels. Light intensity setting 1 is the smallest, the light intensity increases as the light intensity setting step increases, and light intensity setting 3 is the largest light intensity. The image display means 31 is designed to display the level of the current light intensity setting, and is displayed in response to the player operating the upper light intensity button 17a (or the lower light intensity button 17b). The effect control section 540 is configured to display light amount setting information indicating the current light amount setting on the image display means 31 based on the light amount operation detection signal outputted from the light amount operation detection signal.

In addition, even if the player does not play a game for a predetermined period of time, the effect control section 540 is configured to display the current light amount setting on the display means. Furthermore, the display mode of the light amount setting information is changed depending on whether or not a game is being played. During gaming, the display size of the light amount setting information is smaller than when not playing, and the display position is designed to be displayed near the edge of the display screen. This is because there are more other displayed objects (symbol variation images, pending images, preview images, etc.) during gaming than during non-gaming, and the display positions should not overlap as much as possible.

In addition, the LEDs whose light intensity can be changed using the light intensity adjustment button 17 are frame-side decorative LEDs 64a for effects installed in various places on the game frame 5 whose display is controlled by the effect control unit 540, and effects installed in various places on the game board. The amount of light is limited to the amount of light from the decorative LED 63a on the board side. Therefore, for example, the light intensity cannot be changed using the light intensity adjustment button 17 for LEDs for displaying game results, such as the symbol display device 76 whose display is controlled by the main control unit 520. In addition, if a fluctuation display device 95 for displaying the fluctuation status of symbols, a reservation display LED for displaying the number of reservations for symbol fluctuations, etc. are installed as LEDs whose display is controlled by the production control unit 540, these LEDs may be used. It is also desirable to configure the LED so that the light intensity cannot be changed using the light intensity adjustment button 17.

Furthermore, although the LEDs whose light intensity can be changed by the light intensity adjustment button 17 are the frame-side decorative LED 64a and the board-side decorative LED 63a, a configuration may be adopted in which only one of them can be changed. Further, the backlight amount of the LCD unit 31 (the amount of light on the display screen) can be changed in addition to the frame side decoration LED 64a and the board side decoration LED 63a.

(Cross button 2)
The performance using the cross button 18 by the performance control unit 540 will be described in detail. When the player operates any of the up, down, left, and right buttons 18a, 18b, 18c, and 18d, button detection switches 49a, 49b, 49c, and 49d detect the operation and transmit a cross button operation detection signal to the performance control section 540. The effect control unit 540 is configured to be able to perform or switch predetermined effects (images, lamps, sounds, movable objects, etc.) corresponding to each operation by receiving a cross button operation detection signal. .

Although not particularly limited, the cross button is used in a predetermined preview performance (operation performance), or when executing a game customization function that can be set arbitrarily by the player, the player selects the customization settings. used to.

(Side unit 2)
The performance using the side unit 22 by the performance control section 540 will be described in detail. Based on a predetermined control signal transmitted from the main control section 520 to the production control section 540, the production control section 540 energizes the blower device 22a. As a result, the blower device is activated, and wind is blown out from the blower port (not shown) of the side unit 22 located on the upper front side of the game frame 5. Thereafter, when the blower device 22a is no longer energized, the operation of the blower stops. The blower device 22a is used in a predetermined preview effect (for example, air effect).

Further, the touch device 22b is used in a predetermined preview performance (eg, operation performance). When the player performs a predetermined operation (touch operation) on the touch device 22b during the valid operation time set in the operation performance, a sensing signal is transmitted to the performance control unit 540, and the performance control unit 540 detects the detection signal. By receiving a signal, it is possible to perform or switch predetermined effects (images, lamps, sounds, movable objects, etc.). It should be noted that during the valid operation period, the LED on the side unit LED board is controlled to emit light in a predetermined manner, thereby informing the player that the valid operation period is in effect.

The side unit LED board lights up the LEDs in a light emitting mode corresponding to each performance when air performance using the blower device 22a or operation performance using the touch device is executed. In addition, by comprehensive light emission control by the production control unit 540, by synchronizing with the light emission of the front frame LED board provided in the front frame 4, it is possible to execute a light emission production with a sense of unity in the entire gaming frame 5. ing.

(game board)
FIG. 1-5 shows a front view of the game board 8 of the game machine 1 shown in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1-5, the game board 8 includes a plywood board 80 (or a transparent resin board), and an inner rail 81a and an outer rail 81b (commonly called Guide rails 81) are arranged in an annular manner, and a game area 8a surrounded by the guide rails 81 forms a game area 8a in which a fired game ball can roll.

This gaming area 8a includes a center decoration 82, a special symbol 1 starting opening 38 (special symbol 1 starting means), a special symbol 2 starting opening 39 (special symbol 2 starting means), and other winning openings (upper left winning opening 40, left Middle winning opening 41, lower left winning opening 42, right winning opening 43), large winning opening (upper large winning opening 44, lower large winning opening 45), right gate 46 (normal symbol operating device), out opening 47, many games A nail 96, a windmill 83, etc. are arranged. Further, a symbol display device 76 is arranged at the lower part of the outside of the gaming area 8a (non-gaming area).

The guide rail 81 forms a gaming area 8a in an area surrounded by an upper left corner decoration 84 arranged over the left side and upper side of the game board 8 and a lower right corner decoration 85 arranged over the right side and lower side. are doing.

The center decoration 82 is removably attached to the opening hole of the plywood board 80 at the center of the game area 8a, and is arranged so as to be located in front of the display screen of the image display means 31. The center decoration 82 has an opening 86 formed therein so that the display screen of the image display means 31 can be viewed, and has an eaves part 87 extending toward the front so as to surround the opening 86. This eaves portion 87 prevents game balls rolling around the opening 86 of the center decoration 82 from entering the inside of the opening 86, thereby protecting the display screen area of the image display means 31.

The eaves part 87 located at the apex part of the center decoration 82 is provided with a predetermined inclination angle in the left and right directions, respectively, with the apex part 87a as a border, and the game ball launched into the game area 8a is The water is distributed to the left and right at the vertex 87a, and flows down either a left flow passage 88 located on the left side of the center decoration 82 and the image display means 31, or a right flow passage 89 located on the right side.

In addition, the center decoration 82 has a ball flow lower part 90 having a permeability that allows game balls to pass through the front side along the surface of the plywood board 80, and this ball flow lower part 90 is located in the left flow passage 88. A plurality of resin nails 90a are arranged to change the falling direction of the game ball.

Furthermore, the center decoration 82 has a stage 91 on its lower end side, on which a game ball can roll in the left-right direction. A passage hole 91a that allows balls to enter the stage 91 is arranged in an open state on the left downstream passage 88 side, and a game ball flowing down the left downstream passage 88 enters the passage opening 91a, so that the ball is placed above the stage 91. It is designed to guide the game ball to the ball. In the center of the stage 91, a falling path 91b is provided for dropping the game ball from above the stage 91 so as to guide the game ball toward the special symbol 1 starting port 38 arranged in an upward opening shape below the stage 91. ing. Due to the existence of this falling path 91b and the presence of the passage hole 91a that allows the ball to enter the stage 91 only in the left downstream path 88, the left downstream path 88 is lower than the game ball that has flown down the right downstream path 89. It is configured so that the game balls flowing down can enter the special symbol 1 starting hole 38 with a higher probability.

In addition, there is a higher probability that a game ball that passes through the passage port 91a and is guided onto the stage 91 has a higher probability than a game ball that flows down the left downstream passage 88 without passing through the passage hole 91a. Enter the ball to 38.

(Board game parts)
The game board 8 includes a left side decoration 92 placed at the bottom left of the game area 8a, and a special symbol 1 starting port unit 93 placed at the bottom center of the game area as game parts placed in the game area 8a. , and a center accessory unit 94 including a center decoration 82 arranged in the center of the game area 8a.

The left side decoration 92 is removably attached to correspond to the opening hole of the plywood board 80, and includes a base plate 92a through which a game ball can pass along the front side of the plywood board 80, and a base plate 92a into which a game ball can enter. It is configured with a plurality of winning holes (upper left winning hole 40, middle left winning hole 41, lower left winning hole 42) and an out hole 47. It also has a ball guide passage 92b that protrudes forward from the base plate 92a and is inclined at a predetermined angle in the left-right direction, so that a game ball flowing down may come into contact with this ball guide passage 92b. It is configured to change the downward direction of the game ball by rolling.

Inside each winning hole 40, 41, 42 of the left side decoration 92, a ball passage having a width of one game ball is formed. On the way of this ball path, winning a prize opening switches 40a, 42a are provided to detect the entry of game balls, and the game balls flowing down the ball path always pass through these winning a prize opening switches 40a, 42a. It is configured as follows. This makes it possible to always detect the game balls that have entered each of the winning holes 40, 41, and 42.

The game balls detected by the prize opening switches 40a and 42a then follow the ball path and are discharged to the back side of the game board. Here, among the winning holes 40, 41, and 42, the ball passages of the upper left winning hole 40 and the middle left winning hole 41 are formed so as to merge within the left side decoration 92, and the ball passages are installed at the merging point. It is configured so that the entry of a ball is detected by a common upper left middle winning opening switch 40a. Regarding the lower left winning opening 42, a lower left winning opening switch 42a is separately provided independently.

On the other hand, regarding the out port 47 provided on the left side decoration, a ball path with the width of one game ball is formed similarly to each winning hole 40, 41, and 42, but there is a ball path along the way of this ball path. No detection switch is provided, and the game balls that enter the game ball are only discharged to the back side of the game board 8 following the ball path. The game ball that enters the out port 47 is configured to pass through the out switch 46a provided in the ejection path after being ejected to the back side of the game board 8, so that it is counted as an out ball. It is now possible to do so.

Incidentally, the game balls that enter the out port 47 provided at the bottom of the gaming area 8a are similarly ejected to the back side of the game board 8, and then pass through the out switch 46a provided in the ejection path. By being configured to do so, it is possible to count it as an out ball.

The special symbol 1 starting port unit 93 is removably mounted in correspondence with the opening hole of the plywood board 80, and includes a base plate 93a through which the game ball can pass along the front surface of the plywood board 80, and a base plate 93a through which the game ball can pass. A special symbol 1 starting port 38 (special symbol 1 starting means) formed in a non-opening/closing type that allows ball entry and for starting the special symbol 1 variable display, and a special symbol 1 starting port LED board (not shown) having an LED. ). The special symbol 1 starting port 38 protrudes from the base plate 93a to the front side and is arranged in an upward opening shape. The special symbol 1 starting port LED board is arranged on the rear side of the special symbol 1 starting port 38, and is configured to illuminate the base plate 93a around the special symbol 1 starting port 38 from the rear by emitting light from the LED. There is.

Inside the special symbol 1 starting port 38 of the special symbol 1 starting port unit, a ball passage having a width of one game ball is formed. A special symbol 1 starting port switch 38a for detecting the entry of a game ball is provided along the path of this ball path, and the game ball flowing down the ball path must pass through this special symbol 1 starting port switch 38a. configured to pass. This makes it possible to detect the game ball that has entered the special symbol 1 starting port 38. The game ball detected by the special symbol 1 starting port switch 38a is then discharged to the back side of the game board 8 following the ball path.

The center accessory unit 94 is removably attached to the opening hole of the plywood board 80, and includes a base plate 94a through which a game ball can pass along the front side of the plywood board 80, and a center decoration 82. A right gate switch 46a (normal pattern starting port switch) for starting a normal pattern fluctuation display formed by a passage gate 46 through which a game ball can pass, and an open state in which a game ball can enter by displacement of the movable piece 39b. and a special symbol 2 starting port 39 (special symbol 2 starting means) for starting a special symbol 2 variable display formed by an opening/closing type that can change between a closed state in which ball entry is impossible (or more difficult than an open state); , a prize opening (right prize opening 43) into which a game ball can enter, and an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a ball cannot enter (or is more difficult than the open state) due to the displacement of the opening/closing plates 44b and 45b. A large winning opening (upper large winning opening 44, lower large winning opening 45) that can be changed to, an out opening 47, a movable piece 39b of the special symbol 2 starting opening 39 or an opening/closing plate 44b of the large winning opening 44, 45, Each solenoid for opening and closing 45b (upper large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 70, lower large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 71, special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72) and each fraud detection sensor (magnetic sensor 73) for detecting fraud. , a radio wave sensor 74), a fluctuation display device 95 that shows the fluctuation state of the special symbol 1, special symbol 2 and/or normal symbol, and a center accessory LED board (not shown) having an LED. There is.

The center accessory LED board is arranged at multiple locations such as the lower surface of the stage 91 of the center decoration 82, the special symbol 2 starting opening 39, the upper large winning opening 44, the lower large winning opening 45, and the back of the variable display device 95. , is configured to illuminate the stage 91, the special symbol 2 starting opening 39, the upper large winning opening 44, the lower large winning opening 45, and the variable display device 95 by emitting light from the LED.

A special symbol 2 starter switch 39a is provided inside the special symbol 2 starter 39 (special symbol 2 starter means), and when a ball enters the special symbol 2 starter 39 by this special symbol 2 starter switch 39a. It is possible to detect game balls.

In addition, inside the Upper University winning opening 44 and the Lower University winning opening 45, there are installed respectively a big winning opening switch (Upper University winning opening switch 44a, Lower University winning opening switch 45a). It is possible to detect a game ball that has entered the opening 44 or the lower prize opening 45.

By the way, special symbol 1 starting hole 38, special symbol 2 starting hole 39, upper left winning hole 40, middle left winning hole 41, lower left winning hole 42, right winning hole 43, upper large winning hole 44, lower large winning hole 45 are entered. The hit game ball is detected by each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a; Thereafter, it is ejected to the back side of the game board 8, and is configured to pass through an out switch 47a provided in the ejection path. As a result, the game balls fired into the game area 8a pass through the out switch 47a without leaking. Further, a firing switch for counting the game balls to be fired may be provided in place of the out switch 47a. This makes it possible to count all the game balls fired into the game area 8a.

(Design display device)
The symbol display device 76 is arranged at the bottom of the game board 8 and is configured as a part of the right corner decoration 85. An enlarged view of the symbol display device 76 is shown in FIG. 1-5.

The symbol display device is composed of a collection of 32 LEDs, and among the 32 LEDs 76a, 76b, 76c, 76d, 76e, 76f, 76g, 76h, 76i, and 76j, 8 are used as special symbol 1 variable display. 8 special symbol 2 fluctuation display LEDs 76b, 2 special symbol 1 memory display LEDs 76c, special symbol 1 memory display LEDs 76c, special symbol 2 memory display 2 LEDs 76d for special symbol 2 memory display, 2 LEDs 76e for normal symbol variation display as normal symbol variation display, 2 LEDs 76f for normal symbol memory display as normal symbol memory display, 2 right hand display for right strike display. A display LED 76g, four round display LEDs 76h as a round display, and two status display LEDs 76i and 76j are assigned to display the status.

Here, the 32 LEDs 76a, 76b, 76c, 76d, 76e, 76f, 76g, 76h, 76i, 76j are classified into 4 LED groups in 1 set of 8, and the 1st LED group is a special symbol 1 variation display. 76a, the second LED group displays special symbol 2 fluctuation display 76b, the third LED group displays special symbol 1 memory display 76c, special symbol 2 memory display 76d, normal symbol memory display 76f, and status displays 76i and 76j. A normal symbol variation display 76e, a right-handed display 76g, and a round display 76h are configured, respectively.

(Special symbol 1 variable display, special symbol 2 variable display)
The special symbol 1 fluctuation display using the symbol display device 76 is started on the condition that the special symbol 1 starting means 38 detects a game ball, and the eight special symbol 1 fluctuation display LEDs 76a emit light in the fluctuating light emission pattern. Is displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol 1 variable display LED 76a emits light in a stop light emission pattern, thereby ending the special symbol 1 variable display. Specifically, triggered by the detection of a game ball by the special figure 1 starting means 38, the main control unit 520 acquires a random number for determining a jackpot (0 to 65535), and executes a jackpot lottery process based on the obtained jackpot random number. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 520 executes the special symbol 1 variable display in the changing light emission pattern.

After executing the special symbol 1 fluctuation display using the fluctuating light emission pattern for a predetermined period of time, the main control unit 520 selects a jackpot stop light emission pattern if the lottery result is a jackpot, and selects a jackpot stop light emission pattern if the lottery result is a small win. A stop light emission pattern is selected, and if the lottery result is a loss, a loss stop light emission pattern is selected. The main control unit 520 causes the special symbol 1 variation display LED 76a to emit light based on the selected stop light emission pattern, and ends the special symbol 1 variation display. Here, if the stop light emission pattern is a jackpot stop light emission pattern, a jackpot game occurs, and if it is a small win stop light emission pattern, a small win game occurs.

The special symbol 2 variable display using the symbol display device 76 is started on the condition that the special symbol 2 starting means 39 detects a game ball, and the eight special symbol 2 variable display LEDs 76b emit light in the fluctuating light emission pattern. Is displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol 2 variable display LED 76b emits light in a stop light emitting pattern, thereby ending the special symbol 1 variable display. Specifically, triggered by the detection of a game ball by the special figure 2 starting means 39, a random number for jackpot determination (0 to 65535) is acquired by the main control unit 520, and a jackpot lottery process is executed based on the acquired jackpot random number. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 520 executes the special symbol 2 variable display with the changing light emission pattern.

After executing the special symbol 2 variable display using the fluctuating light emission pattern for a predetermined period of time, the main control unit 520 selects the jackpot stop light emission pattern if the lottery result is a jackpot, and selects the jackpot stop light emission pattern if the lottery result is a small win. A stop light emission pattern is selected, and if the lottery result is a loss, a loss stop light emission pattern is selected. The main control unit 520 causes the special symbol 2 variation display LED 76b to emit light based on the selected stop light emission pattern, and ends the special symbol 2 variation display. Here, if the stop light emission pattern is a jackpot stop light emission pattern, a jackpot game occurs, and if it is a small win stop light emission pattern, a small win game occurs.

In addition, for the fluctuating light emission pattern and each stop light emission pattern of the special symbol 1 variation display (or special symbol 2 variation display), the lights are turned off by eight special symbol 1 display LEDs 76a (or special symbol 2 variation display LEDs 76b). Or configured by a combination of lighting.

The main control unit 520 also generates a plurality of different jackpot stop light emission patterns depending on the type of jackpot, a plurality of different jackpot stop light emission patterns depending on the type of small win, and a plurality of different jackpot stop light emission patterns depending on the type of loss. It is configured to have different types of failure stop light emission patterns.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special symbol 1 variable display and the special symbol 2 variable display are not executed in parallel, and while one of the variable displays is being executed, the other variable display is not executed. First, after the fluctuating display being executed ends, the other fluctuating display is started. However, this is not particularly limited, and the special symbol 1 variable display and the special symbol 2 variable display may be configured to be executed in parallel.

(Special symbol 1 memory display, special symbol 2 memory display)
If the special symbol 1 starting means 38 detects a game ball during a special symbol variation pending period such as during special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol 2 variation display, jackpot game, small win game, etc., it will be triggered. The random numbers for jackpot determination obtained in the above are stored as special symbol 1 pending memory, with a predetermined upper limit number (eg, 4) as the limit. Thereafter, when the predetermined period ends and the number of special symbol 1 pending memories is 1 or more, the number of pending memories is 1 and the special symbol 1 variable display is started. This number of reserved memories is notified by the special symbol 1 memory display LED 76c of the symbol display device 76 as a special symbol 1 memory display. The special symbol 1 memory display has 5 types of display modes indicating a predetermined number (0 to 4) of the combination of the light emitting modes (e.g. lighting, flashing, extinguishing) of the two special symbol 1 memory display LEDs 76c. By displaying the symbol 1 memory display LED 76c by emitting light, the number of reserved memories of the special symbol 1 reserved memory can be notified.

If the special symbol 2 starting means 39 detects a game ball during a special symbol variation pending period such as during special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol 2 variation display, jackpot game, small win game, etc., it will be triggered. The random numbers for jackpot determination obtained in the above are stored as special symbol 2 pending memory, with a predetermined upper limit number (eg, 4) as the limit. Thereafter, when the predetermined period ends and the number of special symbol 2 pending memories is 1 or more, the number of pending memories of 1 is used up and execution of special symbol 2 variable display is started. This number of pending memories is notified by the special symbol 2 memory display LED 76d of the symbol display device 76 as a special symbol 2 memory display. The special symbol 2 memory display has 5 types of display modes that indicate a predetermined number (0 to 4) of the combination of the light emitting modes (e.g., lighting, flashing, and extinguishing) of the two special symbol 2 memory display LEDs 76d. By displaying the symbol 2 memory display LED 76d, it is possible to notify the number of reserved memories of the special symbol 2 reserved memory.

Further, in this embodiment, when there are one or more special symbol 1 pending memories and one or more special symbol 2 pending memories, the special symbol 2 pending memory is configured to be digested with priority. Therefore, if the ongoing special symbol 1 variation display or special symbol 2 variation display ends in a state where there are at least one special symbol 1 pending memory and one or more special symbol 2 pending memories, the special symbol 2 pending memory will be suspended. Since the stored number is preferentially consumed, the special symbol 2 variable display will be executed as the next variable display. However, there is no particular limitation, and it may be configured such that the special symbol 1 pending memory is digested with priority.

(Normal pattern fluctuation display)
The normal symbol fluctuation display using the symbol display device 76 is started on the condition that the right gate switch 46a (normal symbol start switch) detects a game ball, and the two normal symbol fluctuation display LEDs 76e light up during the fluctuation. The light is displayed in a pattern. Thereafter, the normal symbol variation display LED 76e is displayed in a stop light emitting pattern, thereby ending the normal symbol variation display. Specifically, triggered by the detection of a game ball by the right gate switch 46a, the main control unit 520 acquires a random number for determining a hit (0 to 30000), executes a winning lottery process based on the acquired random number, The main control unit 520 executes a normal symbol fluctuation display in a fluctuating light emitting pattern based on the lottery result.

After executing the normal symbol fluctuation display using the fluctuating light emission pattern for a predetermined period of time, the main control unit 520 selects a winning stop light emission pattern if the lottery result is a win, and selects a losing stop light emission pattern if the lottery result is a loss. Select. The main control unit 520 causes the normal symbol variation display LED 76e to emit light based on the selected stop light emission pattern, and ends the normal symbol variation display. Here, when the stop light emission pattern is a hit stop light emission pattern, an open game (electronic chew support) of the special figure 2 starting means 39 is generated.

Furthermore, it may be configured to have a plurality of types of winning stop light emission patterns that differ depending on the type of win, and a plurality of types of loss stop light emission patterns that differ depending on the type of loss.

(Normal pattern memory display)
If the right gate switch 46a detects a game ball during the normal symbol variation pending period, such as during the normal symbol variation display or during the opening game of the special figure 2 starting means 39, the random number for hit determination obtained at this moment is A predetermined upper limit number (eg, 4) is the limit, and the symbols are stored as normal symbol retention memory. After that, when the normal symbol fluctuation suspension period ends, if the number of normal symbol suspension memories is 1 or more, the number of suspension memories is one and the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation display is started.

This number of reserved memories is notified as a normal symbol memory display by the normal symbol memory display LED 76f of the symbol display device 76. The normal symbol memory display has five types of display modes that indicate a predetermined number (0 to 4) of the light emission modes (e.g., lighting, flashing, and extinguishing) of the two normal symbol memory display LEDs 76f. By lighting the display LED 76f, it is possible to notify the number of reserved memories of the normal symbol reserved memory.

(Electric chew support)
When the normal symbol variation display ends and the result is a hit stop light emission pattern, an opening game (electronic chew support) of the special figure 2 starting means 39 occurs. When this electric chew support occurs, the main control unit 520 drives the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 to open and close the movable piece 39b of the special symbol 2 starting port 39 according to a predetermined opening/closing pattern. As a result, the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is opened, allowing the game ball to enter the special symbol 2 starting port 39.

When a game ball enters the special symbol 2 starting port 39, winning is detected by the special symbol 2 starting port switch 39a inside the special symbol 2 starting port 39, and a detection signal is received from the special symbol 2 starting port switch 39a. If the main control unit 520 determines that the winning is normal, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player, and the jackpot lottery process related to the special symbol 2 variable display is performed, and the special symbol 2 variable display is is started.

At this time, if there is a special symbol 2 variable display being executed, one is added to the pending memory of the special symbol 2. The special symbol 2 starting port 39 is opened for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 0.068 seconds when the opening extension function is not activated, 5.7 seconds when the opening extension function is activated), or the special symbol 2 starting hole 39 is opened. The process ends when the number reaches a predetermined number (eg, 10), and the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is in a closed state. By performing the electric chew support using the special symbol 2 starting hole 39 once, the electric chew support that can give the player a certain number of prize balls and an opportunity to execute the special symbol 2 variable display is provided. Realized.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, since the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is arranged in the right downstream passage 89, the game ball that has flowed down the right downstream passage 89 is more likely to be played than the game ball that has flowed down the left downstream passage 88. The structure is such that it is easy to enter the special symbol 2 starting hole 39.

Furthermore, when there are a plurality of hit stop light emitting patterns, the opening/closing pattern in the electric chew support may be configured to differ depending on the type of hit stop light emitting pattern.

(Jackpot game)
When the special symbol 1 variable display or the special symbol 2 variable display ends and the result is a jackpot stop light emission pattern, a jackpot game occurs. In this jackpot game, the main control unit 520 drives the big winning opening opening/closing solenoids 70, 71 to open and close the opening/closing plates 44b, 45b of the big winning openings 44, 45 according to a predetermined opening/closing pattern. As a result, the grand prize openings 44 and 45 are opened, allowing game balls to enter the grand prize openings 44 and 45.

When a game ball enters the big winning holes 44, 45, winning is detected by the big winning holes switches 44a, 45a inside the big winning holes 44, 45, and a detection signal is received from the big winning holes switches 44a, 45a. When the main control unit 520 determines that the winning is normal, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player. The grand prize openings 44 and 45 are opened for a predetermined period of time (maximum continuous opening time is 29.8 seconds), or the number of prizes entered into the grand prize openings 44 and 45 reaches a predetermined number (e.g. 10). When the winning amount is reached, the game ends and the big prize openings 44 and 45 are closed. The opening game (round game) using the big prize openings 44 and 45 is defined as one round (one round), and by repeating this a predetermined number of times (e.g. 2 rounds to 10 rounds), it is possible for the player to A jackpot game in which a fixed number of prize balls can be awarded is realized.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, since the big prize openings 44 and 45 are arranged in the right downstream passage 89, the game balls that have flowed down the right downstream passage 89 are more likely to play than the game balls that have flowed down the left downstream passage 88. The structure is such that it is easy to win into the big prize openings 44 and 45.

In addition, the jackpot game has interval times such as a jackpot start interval, an inter-round interval, and a jackpot end interval.

After the special symbol 1 variation display or the special symbol 2 variation display becomes the jackpot stop light emission pattern, the time provided before the first round game starts is the jackpot start interval, and this time can be used to , provides game explanations, etc. regarding round games to players. For example, in order to make it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize openings 44 and 45, an instruction is given to shoot the game ball aiming at the right downstream passage 89.

Next, the time provided between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game is the inter-round interval, and this time is used to stay in the big prize openings 44 and 45. The system updates information such as the waiting time until the playing ball passes through the big prize opening switches 44a and 45a and is ejected, and the number of round games displayed using the image display means 31, etc. or Here, as for the discharge waiting time, an inter-round interval may be used, or a separate discharge waiting time may be provided and the inter-round interval may be started after the discharge waiting time has elapsed.

Next, after the final round game ends, the time provided until the special symbol 1 variation display or special symbol 2 variation display becomes executable again is the jackpot end interval, and this time is used. Then, the player is alerted to prevent forgetting to take out the prepaid card or getting addicted to it, informs the player of the game status after the end of the jackpot game, the number of balls won so far, displays the company logo, etc. By the way, the period from the end of the final round game until the start of the jackpot end interval is not strictly speaking between round games, but this time period is similar to the inter-round interval described above. may be set.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, three types of jackpot games can be executed as the number of rounds of the jackpot game: a 10-round jackpot, a 5-round jackpot, and a 2-round jackpot. The types of jackpot games that can be executed are different depending on whether the special symbol 2 variable display is triggered or not. Specifically, a 5-round jackpot and a 2-round jackpot can be executed as a jackpot game triggered by a special symbol 1 variable display, and a 10-round jackpot can be executed as a jackpot game triggered by a special symbol 2 variable display. It is configured to allow a 5-round jackpot to be executed. Further, the present invention is not particularly limited to this, and the type of executable jackpot game may be the same in the special symbol 1 variable display and the special symbol 2 variable display.

(Small winning game)
When the special symbol 1 variable display or the special symbol 2 variable display ends and the result is a small win stop light emission pattern, a small win game occurs. In this small winning game, the main control unit 520 drives the big winning opening opening and closing solenoids 70 and 71 to open and close the opening and closing plates 44b and 45b of the big winning openings 44 and 45 according to a predetermined opening and closing pattern. As a result, the grand prize openings 44 and 45 are opened, allowing game balls to enter the grand prize openings 44 and 45.

When a game ball enters the big winning holes 44, 45, winning is detected by the big winning holes switches 44a, 45a inside the big winning holes 44, 45, and a detection signal is received from the big winning holes switches 44a, 45a. When the main control unit 520 determines that the winning is normal, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

The grand prize openings 44 and 45 are opened for a predetermined period of time (maximum continuous opening time is 1.8 seconds), or the number of prizes entered into the grand prize openings 44 and 45 reaches a predetermined number (e.g. 10). When the winning amount is reached, the game ends and the big prize openings 44 and 45 are closed. By performing such an open game (small winning game) using the big prize openings 44 and 45 once, a small winning game in which a fixed number of prize balls can be awarded to the player is realized.

Here, when operating the opening/closing plates of the big winning holes 44, 45 in a short opening/closing pattern that repeats opening and closing in a short time, the total time that the big winning holes 44, 45 are in the open state is a predetermined time (1.8 For example, if the closing time is set to be relatively long and the opening/closing operation is repeated, the time for one small winning game may exceed 1.8 seconds. There is no problem with that.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to execute a small winning game using the special symbol 1 variation display or the special symbol 2 variation display as an opportunity, but this is not limited to the special symbol 1 variation display or the special symbol 2 variation display. It may be configured such that a small winning game can be executed only when one of the variable displays is used as an opportunity.

(Round display)
The round display using the symbol display device 76 starts at approximately the same timing as the start of the interval before the start of the jackpot in the jackpot game, and the number of round games in the current jackpot game is displayed by the four round display LEDs 76h. . For example, if three types of jackpot games can be executed as the number of rounds of a jackpot game: a 10-round jackpot, a 5-round jackpot, and a 2-round jackpot, which of these jackpot games will be executed this time will be determined by the round This is indicated by the display LED 76h. This allows the player to understand the type of jackpot game in which he or she has won.

The lighting control of the round display LED 76h is performed by the main control unit 520, and when a 10-round jackpot is executed, a 10-round jackpot lighting pattern is used, and when a 5-round jackpot is executed, a 5-round jackpot lighting pattern is used, and a 2-round jackpot lighting pattern is used. When executing a jackpot, the main control unit 520 selects each of the two round jackpot lighting patterns, and lights up the round display LED 76h based on the selected lighting pattern.

(gaming state)
This gaming machine is configured to be able to generate multiple types of gaming states in addition to the jackpot gaming state and the small winning gaming state. The details will be described later, but low probability low base state (normal gaming state), low probability high base state (time saving gaming state), high probability low base state (potential definite gaming state), high probability high base state (probable variable gaming state) The main control unit 520 generates one of the four types of gaming states.

The main control unit 520 has a probability variation function (special pattern probability variation function) that varies the jackpot lottery probability of the special symbols (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) variable display, and a probability variation function that varies the winning lottery probability of the normal symbol variable display. It has a function (Puzu Definite Function).

The special pattern probability change function changes the jackpot lottery probability from a normal low probability state (e.g. 205/65535≒1/319) to a high probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the low probability state (e.g. 658/65535≒1). /99). By activating the special pattern probability change function, a special pattern high probability state in which the special pattern becomes a high probability state is generated. During this special symbol high probability state, in the jackpot lottery process by the main control unit 520, the determination range for determining that a jackpot game will occur is set wider than in the normal state (special symbol low probability state), so that a jackpot game is not possible. is likely to occur. Incidentally, when there are multiple levels of jackpot probability (six levels from setting 1 to setting 6), not only the lottery probability in the low probability state but also the lottery probability in the high probability state differs for each setting stage.

The normal drawing probability change function changes the winning lottery probability from a normal low probability state (e.g. 125/251≒1/2.008) to a high probability state (e.g. 250/251) which is more advantageous to the player than the low probability state. ≒1/1.004). By activating the normal pattern probability change function, a normal pattern high probability state in which the normal pattern becomes a high probability state is generated. During this normal symbol high probability state, in the winning lottery process by the main control unit 520, the determination range for determining that a winning game will occur is set wider than in the low probability state (normal symbol low probability state), so that the jackpot This creates a state in which games are likely to occur.

Further, regarding the special pattern probability variation function and the general pattern probability variation function, it may be configured to have both functions, or may be configured to have only the special pattern probability variation function or only the general pattern probability variation function.

The main control unit 520 further includes a fluctuation shortening function (special symbol fluctuation shortening function) that shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) fluctuation display, and a fluctuation reduction function that shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation display. It has a function (general figure fluctuation shortening function).

The special symbol fluctuation shortening function is a function that shortens the time required for one special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) variable display (time from the start of variation to the stop of variation). By activating the special symbol variation shortening function, a special symbol variation shortening state is generated in which the variation time of the special symbol is shortened. During this special symbol fluctuation shortening state, the number of changes of the special symbol that can change per predetermined time is increased compared to the normal state (special symbol non-fluctuation shortening state), so the number of times you receive a jackpot lottery increases accordingly. .

The normal pattern fluctuation shortening function is a function that shortens the time required to display one normal pattern fluctuation (the time from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation). By activating the normal symbol fluctuation shortening function, a normal symbol fluctuation shortening state is generated in which the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is shortened. During this normal symbol fluctuation shortening state, the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol that can be changed per predetermined time is increased compared to the normal state (normal symbol non-fluctuation shortening state), so the number of times you receive a winning lottery increases accordingly. .

In addition, the main control unit 520 provides an opening extension function (expansion function) for extending the opening time of the special symbol 2 starting port 39 by the electric chew support for the opening game (electric chew support) of the special symbol 2 starting means 39. have.

The opening extension function is a function that extends the opening time of the movable piece 39b of the special symbol 2 starting port 39 when the electric chew support occurs (for example, from 0.068 seconds to 5.7 seconds). When the opening extension function operates, an opening extension state in which the opening time of the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is extended is generated. During this open extension state, it is easier for the ball to enter the special symbol 2 starting port 39 than in the normal state (open extension non-operating state), so the special symbol 2, which can change per predetermined time, is easier than in the normal state. The number of fluctuations will improve, and the number of times you will receive a jackpot lottery will increase.

From these, it can be said that the special symbol high probability state, the normal symbol high probability state, the special symbol fluctuation shortened state, the normal symbol fluctuation shortened state, and the open extended state are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, each function (special pattern definite change function, general pattern definite change function, special pattern fluctuation shortening function, general pattern fluctuation shortening function, open extension function) is as a result of the special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) fluctuation display. When a jackpot game that activates the function occurs, the operation starts after the jackpot game ends, and each state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state, special symbol fluctuation shortening state, normal symbol transition to a variable shortening state, open extension state). More specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the main control unit 520 performs a jackpot symbol lottery to determine which of a plurality of types of jackpot games to perform, and the result of the jackpot symbol lottery , each state will occur when a winning symbol (probability-variable jackpot symbol or time-saving jackpot symbol) of a jackpot game that activates each function is selected.

In addition, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, a loss pattern lottery is performed to determine the type of loss, and as a result of the loss pattern lottery, among the various functions, special symbol fluctuation shortened state, normal symbol fluctuation When a winning symbol (losing time saving symbol) that activates the shortening state and the open extension state is selected, all or more or one of the special symbol fluctuation shortening state, the normal symbol fluctuation shortening state, and the open extension state are selected. Two game states will occur. In the losing symbol lottery, there are no winning symbols for causing the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol high probability state, and these gaming states will not occur in the case of a loss.

As mentioned above, by operating one or more types of each function described above, four types of gaming states can be generated: low probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability low base state, and high probability high base state. It is possible. The details are shown below.
・Low probability low base state (normal gaming state) = state in which each function is not activated ・Low probability high base state (time-saving gaming state) = special pattern probability change function is not activated, general pattern probability change function, general pattern variation shortening function , a state in which all or any one or more of the open extension functions are activated ・High probability low base state (potential game state) = a state in which the open extension function is not activated and at least the special pattern probability change function is activated - High probability high base state (variable probability gaming state) = state in which each function is in operation By the way, in the jackpot game state or the small win game state, each function is performed in an inactive state.

In addition, regarding the low probability high base state, it may be configured to generate multiple types of low probability high base states, for example, apart from the low probability high base state (time saving gaming state) mentioned above, there is a special pattern probability variation function. It may have a specific low probability high base state (slightly time-saving gaming state) in which the normal pattern variation shortening function and/or the opening extension function are activated while the normal pattern variation function is not activated. Further, this specific low probability high base state (slightly time-saving gaming state) may be configured to occur when the result of the aforementioned jackpot lottery is a loss and a winning symbol (losing time-saving symbol) is selected. .

For these reasons, the low probability high base state, high probability low base state, high probability high base state, specific low probability high base state, jackpot gaming state, and small winning gaming state are better for players than the low probability low base state. It can be said that this is an advantageous gaming state.

(Right-handed display)
The right-handed display using the symbol display device 76 shows whether it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball right-handed so that it flows down the right-hand downstream passage 89. The two right-handed display LEDs 76g display information indicating whether it is more advantageous for the player to fire left-handed. For example, two LEDs 76g are turned on to indicate that right-handed batting is advantageous, and two LEDs 76g are turned off to indicate that left-handed batting is advantageous.

Here, states where right-handed hitting is advantageous include a low probability high base state, high probability high base state, jackpot gaming state, and small winning gaming state, and states where left-handed hitting is advantageous include a low probability low base state. , a high probability low base state is applicable.

In the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state, it is easy to enter the special symbol 2 starting port 39 arranged in the right downstream passage 89, and aim for the special symbol 1 variation by aiming at the left downstream passage 88. Since it is more advantageous to aim for the special symbol 2 variation by aiming at the right downstream passage 89, the right-hand hit display is performed. In the jackpot game state and the small win game state, it is easy to enter the big winning holes 44 and 45 arranged in the right downstream passage 89, and the ball enters the big winning openings 44 and 45 by aiming at the left downstream passage 88. Since it is more advantageous to aim for the right downstream passage 89 and aim for the ball to enter the big prize openings 44 and 45 than to aim for the ball, the right hit display is performed.

On the other hand, in the low probability low base state and the high probability low base state, it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the special symbol 2 starting port 39 arranged in the right downstream passage 89, and a special ball aiming at the right downstream passage 89 is Since it is more advantageous to aim for the special symbol 1 variation by aiming at the left downstream passage 88 than to aim for the symbol 2 variation, a left-hand hit display (lights out) is performed.

In addition, regarding the specific low probability high base state, when the release extension function is activated, the ball can easily enter the special symbol 2 starting port 39 arranged in the right downstream passage 89, and the left downstream passage 88 can be easily entered. Since it is more advantageous to aim for the special symbol 2 variation by aiming for the right downstream passage 89 than to aim for the special symbol 1 variation, the right hit display is performed, but if the opening extension function is not activated, It is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the special symbol 2 starting port 39 arranged in the right downstream passage 89, and instead of aiming at the right downstream passage 89 and aiming for the special symbol 2 variation, the special symbol 1 is aimed at the left downstream passage 88. Since it is more advantageous to aim for variation, a left-handed hit display (unlit state) is performed.

(Status display)
The status display using the symbol display device 76 includes a probability fluctuation function (special pattern probability variation function) that changes the jackpot lottery probability of the special symbols (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) variable display, and a winning lottery probability of the normal symbol variable display. One high probability notification LED 76i indicating whether at least one of the variable probability variation functions (normal pattern probability variation function) is operating, and the variation of the special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) variation display. Indicates whether at least one of the variation shortening function (special pattern variation shortening function) that shortens the time and the variation shortening function (normal pattern variation shortening function) that shortens the variation time of normal symbol variation display is operating. It is composed of a total of two status display LEDs 76i and 76j, including one variation shortening notification LED 76j.

For example, the high probability notification LED 76i is lit in the low probability high base state (when the regular pattern probability variation function is activated), the high probability low base state, and the high probability high base state, so that the current In the gaming state, it is reported that the special pattern probability variation function or the general pattern probability variation function is operating. On the other hand, in the low probability low base state, low probability high base state (when the normal pattern/probability change function is not activated), jackpot game state, and small win game state, by being in a non-lighting mode, the current game state , to notify that the special map fixed change function or the general map fixed change function is not operating.

The fluctuation shortening notification LED 76j is in a low probability high base state (when the regular pattern fluctuation shortening function is activated), a high probability low base state (when the special pattern fluctuation shortening function is activated), and a high probability high base state. In the lighting mode, it is notified that the special symbol fluctuation shortening function or the regular symbol fluctuation shortening function is operating in the current gaming state. On the other hand, low probability low base state, low probability high base state (when the normal pattern fluctuation shortening function is not activated), high probability low base state (when the special pattern fluctuation shortening function is not activated), jackpot game state, In the small winning gaming state, the non-lighting mode informs that the special symbol fluctuation shortening function or the regular symbol fluctuation shortening function is not operating in the current gaming state.

In addition, the high probability notification LED 76i is in a lighting mode when at least one of the special pattern probability change function and the general pattern probability change function is activated, but this is not limited to this, and the special pattern probability change function is activated. It may also be configured so that the lighting mode is set only when the user is present. Further, it may be configured such that the lighting mode is set only when the normal map and accurate change function is activated.

In addition, although the variation shortening notification LED 76j is in a lighting mode when at least one of the special figure variation shortening function and the regular figure variation shortening function is operating, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure variation shortening function is operating. It may also be configured such that the lighting mode is set only when the light is on. Further, it may be configured such that the lighting mode is set only when the normal pattern variation shortening function is operating.

Further, the high probability notification LED 76i may be configured to indicate whether or not the special pattern probability variation function or the general pattern probability variation function is operating in the current gaming state only when the power is turned on; in this case, , After that, even if the gaming state changes and whether or not the special pattern probability change function or the general pattern probability change function is activated, the non-operation will occur regardless of whether the special pattern probability change function or the general pattern probability change function is activated. It is desirable to leave it in the lit state or in the lit state. Further, the fluctuation reduction LED 76j may also have a similar configuration.

Further, the variation shortening notification LED 76j may be configured so that it does not turn on when the current gaming state is a slight time saving gaming state, regardless of whether or not the normal figure variation shortening function is operating. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state and the normal pattern variation shortening function is operating, it is desirable that the light is turned on.

In this way, the fluctuation reduction notification LED 76j may be configured so that it does not light up in the slight time-saving gaming state, but lights up only in the time-saving gaming state. As a result, it is not possible to know that the current gaming state is in a slight time-saving gaming state from the lighting mode of the fluctuation reduction notification LED 76j, so it is possible to conceal from the player whether the current gaming state is a slight time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state. becomes possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the light is turned on when the normal pattern variation shortening function is operating even in the slight time saving gaming state.

In addition, if the gaming state when the power is turned on is a slight time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation reduction notification LED 76j is turned on, and if the gaming state changes after that and becomes the slight time-saving gaming state again. Alternatively, the variation shortening notification LED 76j may be configured not to light up. Thereby, the slight time saving gaming state can be configured such that it is possible to know whether or not the slight time saving gaming state is in the slight time saving gaming state only when the power is turned on, by causing the fluctuation shortening notification LED 76j to light up only when the power is turned on.

(Decorative symbol variation game, pending display)
In the image display means 31, in parallel with the special symbol 1 variable display or the special symbol 2 variable display using the symbol display device 76, a decorative symbol variation game is performed in which a variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols 100, 101, and 102 is executed. be exposed. The decorative patterns 100, 101, and 102 are mainly composed of character parts 100a, 101a, and 102a and number parts 100b, 101b, and 102b. , nine different types of characters are displayed in character sections 100a, 101a, and 102a.

Then, a variable display is started by scrolling the left decorative pattern 100, the middle decorative pattern 101, and the right decorative pattern 102 in a predetermined direction (e.g., high-speed variable display), and the special pattern 1 variable display or special pattern The left decorative pattern 100, the middle decorative pattern 101, and the right decorative pattern 102 are also stopped and displayed at substantially the same timing as the fluctuation stop of the 2-variable display.

If the result of the special symbol 1 variation display or the special symbol 2 variation display is a jackpot stop light emission pattern, the jackpot display mode will be such that the left decorative symbol 100, the middle decorative symbol 101, and the right decorative symbol 102 are all the same symbol. , in the case of a loss stop light emitting pattern, at least one or all of the left decorative pattern 100, the middle decorative pattern 101, and the right decorative pattern 102 are stopped and displayed in a loss display mode in which a different pattern is displayed. Further, a decorative symbol variation game that ultimately becomes a jackpot display mode is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern, and a decorative symbol variation game that ultimately becomes a loss display mode is referred to as a loss variation pattern.

Incidentally, the decorative patterns 100, 101, and 102 may be configured to include types other than those described above. For example, the result of the special pattern 1 variation display or the special symbol 2 variation display may be a small hit stop. In the case of a light emitting pattern, at least one or all of the left decorative pattern 100, the middle decorative pattern 101, and the right decorative pattern 102 are character parts 100a, 101a, 102a or number parts 100b, 101b, 102b indicating a small win. It may be configured such that the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Similarly, the jackpot pattern is composed of character parts 100a, 101a, 102a indicating a jackpot, number parts 100b, 101b, 102b, and character parts 100a, 101a, 102a and number parts 100b, 101b, 102b indicating a loss. It may be configured so that losing symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, a decorative symbol variation game that finally becomes a small winning display mode in which the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed is referred to as a small winning variation pattern.

Here, in each decorative pattern variation game (big hit variation pattern, small hit variation pattern, loss variation pattern), in the stage before the left decorative pattern 100, middle decorative pattern 101, and right decorative pattern 102 are stopped and displayed, the final It is possible to execute a ready-to-reach state in which some of the decorative symbols 100, 101, and 102 that are stop-displayed and which constitute a common stop eye are placed in a temporary stop state (a state in which they are not fixedly displayed).

In addition, each decorative symbol variation game in which a reach state is executed is referred to as a reach variation pattern (a jackpot reach variation pattern, a small hit reach variation pattern, a loss reach variation pattern). Specifically, in the end, the left decorative pattern 100 has 7 designs (the number part 100b is 7), the middle decorative design 101 has 7 designs (the number part 101b has 7), and the right decorative pattern 102 has 7 designs (7) In the case of a jackpot display mode where the number part 100c is a 7 symbol, the left decorative symbol 100 and the right decorative symbol 102 are temporarily stopped at the 7 symbol (the number part 100b and 100c are 7 symbols), and the middle decorative symbol 101 is Scroll the display. Also, in the end, the left decorative pattern 100 is 7 patterns (the number part 100b is 7), the middle decoration pattern 101 is 6 designs (the number part 101b is 6), and the right decorative pattern 102 is 7 designs (the number part 100c is 6). In the case that the left decorative pattern 100 and the right decorative pattern 102 are temporarily stopped at the 7 pattern (number portions 100b and 100c are 7 symbols), the middle decorative pattern 101 is scrolled and displayed. . By executing such a reach effect, the middle decorative pattern 101 being scrolled will finally stop at the 7th pattern (the 7th symbol in the number part 101b) or the 6th symbol (the 6th symbol in the numbered part 101b). Since the outcome of the game differs depending on whether the line is stopped or not, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation regarding the end of the line.

Then, in this ready-to-reach state, it is possible to execute a ready-to-reach effect as a presentation to give more anticipation by exciting how the stop stitches of the medium decorative pattern 101 will turn out. The reach effect is synchronized with the image effect by the image display means 31, the audio effect by the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, and 19d, the light emission effect by the LEDs 63a, 64a, and the movable objects (middle push button movable object, side unit movable object, and board side This is performed using movable object effects (lower movable object 30a, upper movable object 30b), operation effects using the operating means 14a, and the like.

In addition, the image display means 31 also displays various effects for suggesting and predicting the result of the decorative symbol varying game in conjunction with the decorative symbol varying game. Such performances are also performed in synchronization with the decorative symbol variation game and the preview performance, such as audio performances, light emission performances, movable animal performances, and operation performances. In this embodiment, as performances performed using various performance means, the winning expectation of the decorative symbol variation game (the jackpot winning expectation, the small winning winning expectation, the losing time saving winning expectation, etc.) Something that suggests or announces something is called a preview performance.

In addition, in the image display means 31, in parallel with the special symbol 1 variable display or the special symbol 2 variable display using the symbol display device 76, in addition to the decorative symbol variable game, the mini symbol 103a performs a variable display using the mini symbol 103a. A variable game is played. This mini symbol variation game is displayed at the end of the display area of the image display means 31, and the variation display is performed in a variation area smaller than the variation area in which the decorative symbol variation game is executed. The mini symbol 103a is mainly composed of only the numbers 1 to 9, and starts a variable display by switching and displaying three of the left mini symbol, middle mini symbol, and right mini symbol in a predetermined order. , the left mini symbol, the middle mini symbol, and the right mini symbol are also stopped and displayed at approximately the same timing as the special symbol 1 variable display or special symbol 2 variable display stops changing.

The role of this mini pattern 103a is mainly as a risk countermeasure when visibility in the decorative pattern variation game becomes difficult or impossible. , upper movable object 30b) move to the front side of the display screen, there is a possibility that the decorative symbol variation game becomes invisible due to the movable objects (lower movable object 30a, upper movable object 30b). Even in such a case, at least by displaying the mini symbol 103a so that its visibility is not impaired, symbol variation games (decorative symbol variation games or decorative symbol variation games or It becomes possible to constantly display the contents of the mini symbol variation game on the image display means 31. Due to this nature, the mini symbol variation game is basically executed in synchronization with the decorative symbol variation game. In addition, since the mini symbol variation game is always displayed while maintaining visibility, it is possible to display the decorative symbols 100, 101, and 102 in a display mode such that they are temporarily invisible, for example. In this way, the presence of the mini-design 103a makes it possible to display the decorative designs 100, 101, and 102 in a variety of ways.

Moreover, although the mini-design 103a is made up of only a number part, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to have a character part (or have only a character part). Furthermore, the types of mini symbols 103a may be configured to include types other than those described above. For example, if the result of the special symbol 1 variable display or the special symbol 2 variable display is a small hit stop light emitting pattern. In this case, at least one or all of the left mini symbol, the middle mini symbol, and the right mini symbol may be configured to be stopped and displayed as a small win symbol consisting of a character part or a number part indicating a small win. good. Similarly, a jackpot pattern composed of a character part and a number part indicating a jackpot, and a losing pattern composed of a character part and a number part indicating a loss, may be stopped and displayed.

Further, in the image display means 31, a pending display 104a indicating the current pending storage number is performed in response to the special symbol 1 memory display and the special symbol 2 memory display. The hold display 104a is displayed in the form of a predetermined dynamic animation added to a hold image for indicating whether or not there is a hold. The same number of pending images as the current number of pending images (for example, 1 to 4) are displayed. (104b indicates an unreserved display area that has not yet been rescheduled)

The pending images are displayed in the pending display area 104 at predetermined intervals starting from the side closest to the pending display area 105 for displaying the image of the pending 105a. Here, the pending 105a is a display object corresponding to the special symbol 1 memory display or special symbol 2 memory display that is currently changing, and when the fluctuating special symbol 1 memory display or special symbol 2 memory display ends. , the corresponding pending image is deleted. During the special symbol 1 variable display or special symbol 2 variable display, the number of special symbol 1 memory displays and special symbol 2 memory displays increased based on the special symbol 1 starting means or special symbol 2 starting means detecting a game ball. In this case, one pending image is additionally displayed in the pending display area 104 (the pending display 104a is displayed in the non-pending display area 104b near the pending display area 105).

In addition, based on the end of the special symbol 1 variation display or special symbol 2 variation display that is being varied and the start of a new special symbol 1 variation display or special symbol 2 variation display, the special symbol 1 memory display or the special symbol 2 When the number of stored displays decreases, the held image is deleted, and the first held image in the held display area 104 is moved and displayed so as to be shifted toward the held display area. At this time, if there are a plurality of pending images (four at most), each pending image is also shifted and displayed one by one toward the head of the queue.

The image display means 31 also includes a special symbol 1 memory number display 106a that displays the current number of special symbols 1 stored and displayed, and a special symbol 2 memory number display 106b that displays the current number of special symbols 2 memory display. is displayed. Here, in FIG. 1-5, the special symbol 1 memory display shows 2 pieces and the special symbol 2 memory display shows 0 pieces, and the special symbol 1 memory number display 106a shows "2" indicating 2 pieces. , the special symbol 2 storage number display 106a is "0" indicating 0. In addition, in the hold display area 104, the status of two hold displays 104a is shown, and in the hold display area 104a, two hold indications 104a are displayed, and two undisplayed unheld display areas 104b remain. The display mode is as follows.

(Advance preview)
A look-ahead notice is a type of notice performance, and regarding a pending memory waiting for execution of a decorative symbol variation game, it changes the display mode of the pending image and the target before executing the decorative symbol variation game corresponding to the target pending memory. This is to execute a performance that suggests the winning expectation regarding the target pending display 104 by using the decorative symbol varying game that is executed before the decorative symbol varying game corresponding to the pending display 104. .

In addition to the image display using the image display means 31, the effects based on the advance notice include audio effects using the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, and 19d, light emitting effects using the LEDs 63a and 64a, movable objects (middle button movable objects, side unit movable objects, This is executed using a movable object effect using the board side movable objects (lower movable object 30a, upper movable object 30b).

In addition, in this example, by changing the display mode of the pending image (for example, changing from white to blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow color, etc.), the expectation level of winning can be determined in advance according to the change mode. The suggested advance notice is called a pending change effect. (Example: Blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color has the highest probability of winning, and rainbow color indicates a guaranteed win)

(pseudo notice)
Pseudo-continuous notice is a type of notice performance, and is a pseudo-variable display that is performed using a variable display of decorative patterns 100, 101, and 102. Specifically, in one decorative symbol variation game, a part or all of the decorative symbols 100, 101, and 102 are brought into a temporarily stopped state, and a pseudo variation is performed in which the decorative symbols are again varied and displayed from the temporarily stopped state. It is repeated multiple times. As a result, it is possible to give the player an illusory effect as if a decorative symbol varying game is being executed a plurality of times, even though it is actually a single decorative symbol varying game.

Such a pseudo series notice is configured to suggest the winning expectation of the decorative symbol variation game according to the number of times the pseudo variation is executed. That is, in one decorative symbol variation game, the greater the number of executions of the pseudo variation based on the pseudo consecutive notice, the higher the expectation of winning the decorative symbol variation game.

(Step up notice)
A step-up preview is a type of preview performance, and is a performance with multiple stage performance steps. Specifically, the first step-up 1 performance (SU1 performance) is developed into a multi-stage step-up N (N≦2) performance, and the development result is a higher stage (the larger the value of N is, the higher the value of N is). ), the higher the expectation of winning the decorative symbol variation game. Regarding the development of step-up effects, it may be developed in stages such as SU1 effect → SU2 effect → SU3 effect, or it may be developed so as to skip predetermined stages such as SU1 effect → SU3 effect. Good too.

(Background change notice)
The background change notice is a type of notice performance, and is a notice performance that shifts the current performance stage to another different performance stage during the decorative symbol variation game. By changing the production stage, for example, the design of the background image, the design of the character parts 100a, 101a, 102a and the number parts 100b, 101b, 102b of the decorative patterns 100, 101, 102, the pending image of the pending display 104, and the pending image. The design of the pending image on the display 105 is changed to match the destination production stage. The system is configured such that the winning expectation level of the decorative symbol variation game increases depending on the type of performance stage to be transitioned to and the content of the stage transition performance that occurs when the performance stage is transitioned.

(movable object)
On the game board 8, there is a lower movable part 30a arranged as a movable part for performance at a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball at the lower front side of the image display means 31, and a lower movable part 30a arranged at the front upper part of the image display means 31 for moving the game ball. An upper movable member 30b is mounted at a position that does not obstruct the flow of water. The lower movable part 30a and the upper movable part 30b are each configured to be movable within a movable space formed between the image display means 31 and the plywood board 80 (or transparent resin board). The lower movable object 30a is formed with a design having a picture of a predetermined character, and moves from the origin position at the lower front side of the image display means 31 toward the upper side of the movable space to cover the display area of the image display means 31. When it reaches the center front side of the production position, the moving operation is stopped, and at this production position, the light emission by LED (light emission by the LED of the movable object LED board installed inside the movable object, the light emission by the LED of the movable object LED board installed inside the movable object, etc.) It is configured to be able to emit light from the LED 64a or the LED 63a mounted on the game board 8 side) and carry out a predetermined presentation operation (such as a stopping operation at a presentation position or a vibration operation that vibrates a movable object in small increments), and then returning to the origin position. ing.

On the other hand, the upper movable part 30b is formed with a logo design having a predetermined character string, and moves from the origin position at the upper front side of the image display means 31 toward the lower side of the movable space, and moves toward the lower side of the movable space. When it reaches the center-front direction of the display area, the moving operation stops, and at this direction, the light emitting effect using LEDs (light emitting from the LED of the movable object LED board installed inside the movable object, or mounted on the side of the game frame) It is configured to be able to perform light emission by the LED 64a that has been moved or the LED 63a mounted on the game board side) and perform a predetermined presentation operation (such as a stopping operation at the presentation position or a vibration operation that vibrates the movable object in small increments), and then return to the origin position. has been done.

Such a movable presentation operation by the lower movable object 30a and a movable presentation operation by the upper movable object 30b are performed by control instructions from the presentation control section 540. The production control unit 540 has a movable pattern in which only the lower movable object 30a is moved, a movable pattern in which only the upper movable object 30b is moved, a movable pattern in which the lower movable object 30a and the upper movable object 30b are moved at the same time, etc. is configured to be executable. In this manner, various movable patterns are executed by the performance control unit 540, thereby realizing a series of movable performances using one or more movable objects.

(memory map)
FIG. 2-1 shows a memory map of the main control unit 520. A readable/writable built-in RWM is assigned to the address area of starting addresses 0000H to 01EBH (00C6H to 0112H, 0130H to 0150H, and 017CH to 01EBH are unused). Next, built-in registers (≒ built-in function registers) that are partially readable/writable are assigned to address areas from 1000H to 1073H. Next, a readable but non-writable built-in ROM is assigned to the address area from 8000H to A32FH (8A36H to 9000H, 9935H to 9C10H, A07DH to A2000H, and A32FH to the final address FFFFH are unused).

Here, among the address areas to which built-in RWM is allocated, the address areas from 0000H to 0130H (00C6H to 0112H are unused) are used for the work of the used area and the stack of the used area (collectively referred to as RWM in the used area). ) are placed. In addition, among the address areas to which built-in RWM is allocated, the address areas from 0150H to 0200H (017CH to 01EBH are unused) have work outside the used area and stacks outside the used area (collectively called RWM outside the used area). ) are located. In-use area RWM is an area that is specified to be within a predetermined upper limit capacity in the rules regarding gaming machine certification and type approval (RWM storage capacity is 1024 bytes), and outside-of-use area RWM is a separate area.

In addition, among the address areas to which the built-in ROM is allocated, the address areas from 8000H to 9935H (8A36H to 9000H are unused) contain programs in the used area and data in the used area (collectively referred to as programs in the used area). is located. Furthermore, among the address areas to which the built-in ROM is allocated, the address areas 9C10H to A32FH (A07DH to A200H are unused) contain programs outside the used area and data outside the used area (collectively called programs outside the used area). ) are located. Programs within the usage area are areas that are stipulated to be within the specified upper limit capacity in the regulations regarding gaming machine certification and type certification (the maximum storage capacity of ROM is 16 KB), and the programs outside the usage area. The program is a separate area.

In the program of the used area, it is possible to refer to the data area of the used area and refer to and update the RWM inside the used area, but the RWM outside the used area can only be referenced and cannot be updated. In addition, programs outside the used area can refer to data areas outside the used area and refer to and update RWM outside the used area, but RWM inside the used area can only be referenced and cannot be updated. I can't. Therefore, when updating RWM outside the used area while processing a program in the used area, it is necessary to call the program outside the used area and update the RWM outside the used area while processing the program outside the used area. . This also applies to the case where RWM in the used area is updated while a program outside the used area is being processed.

(Main control system processing)
FIG. 2-2 shows a flowchart of system processing executed by the main control unit 520 when the power is turned on. This system processing is executed by a program within the used area.

When system processing starts, first, as initial settings (S1000), execution of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, stack pointer is set, and RWM protection is set to invalidate the protected state of the RWM area and make it readable/writable. Disable setting and prohibition area disabling setting to disable the occurrence of illegal access reset when accessing the prohibited area of the RWM area, and turning off the firing control signal to prevent accidental firing before starting the game. .

Subsequently, sub CPU boot waiting processing (S1001) is executed. Here, a wait process is executed for a predetermined period of time until the initial setting of the effect control section 540 is completed and a command can be received. While this wait process is being executed, a WDT clear process is being executed and a power abnormality check process is being executed. If a power abnormality is confirmed by this power abnormality check process, a power off command 1 (BA33H) and a power off command 2 (BA55H) are transmitted to the production control unit 540. When the effect control unit 540 receives the power-off command 2 (BA55H), a black screen is displayed on the image display means 31. Further, the production control unit 540 enters a WDT reset waiting state due to infinite loop processing.

When the sub CPU boot waiting process is completed, a standby screen display command (BA08H) is transmitted to the effect control section 540 (S1002). When the production control section 540 receives the standby screen display command (BA08H), the image display means 31 displays "Please Wait" in white letters on a black screen.

Subsequently, a chip code is transmitted to the production control section 540 (S1003). This chip code has a different value set for each one-chip microcomputer, and is stored in a chip code register as unique identification information.

The production control unit 540 stores the chip code received when the power is first turned on, and each time the power is turned on, it determines whether the newly received chip code matches the already stored chip code. There is. If the chip codes match, it is determined that a normal chip code has been received and no special processing is performed, but if they do not match, it is possible to issue an error notification as an abnormal chip code has been received. It has become. This makes it possible to determine that the main control unit 520 may have been illegally replaced due to fraudulent activity or the like.

Next, until it is determined that the communication signal from the payout control unit 510 is ON, the payout control unit 510 waits for activation while repeatedly executing the WDT clearing process and the power supply abnormality check process (S1004).

After completing the processing up to S1004, it is then determined whether setting change conditions for performing a setting change process that allows setting values to be changed are satisfied (S1005). In S1005, the inner frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 2 (inner frame open switch 35b is in an ON state), the RWM clear switch 522 is in a pressed state (ON state), and the setting key switch 523 is rotated. If the condition is satisfied (ON state), it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied, and the setting change process (S1006) is executed.

(Setting change processing)
In the setting change process (S1006), a setting change start command (BA76H) is first transmitted to the production control unit 540. When the production control unit 540 receives the settings change start command (BA76H), the image display means 31 displays a black screen with white text "Settings changing", and the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, and 19d display "Settings changing". "Changing" sound is output.

Next, while clearing the backup flag, the setting value information is acquired from the RWM setting value storage area in the used area to the register, and the acquired setting value is an abnormal value (00H corresponding to 6 stages from setting 1 to setting 6). .about.value other than 05H). In the case of an abnormal value, the acquired setting value is corrected to a normal value (00H). However, at this time, the value in the setting value storage area is not changed.

Next, the input information of the RWM clear switch 522 is obtained. Note that the RWM clear switch 522 functions as a set value change operation means for changing the set value during the setting change. If the set value change operation means is operated, the acquired set value is updated (+01H). At this time, if the updated set value exceeds 05H corresponding to setting 6 (05H → 06H), by correcting it to 00H corresponding to setting 1, the set value will be within the range of setting 1 to setting 6. It is designed to switch cyclically.

Thereafter, setting value information (information on any one of settings 1 to 6) is displayed on the setting display means 521 based on the acquired setting value or the updated setting value.

Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 523 is in the ON state, and if it is in the ON state, the above-mentioned process is repeated from acquiring the input information of the RWM clear switch 522 again, and the setting key switch 523 is in the OFF state. In this case, the current setting value is stored in the setting value storage area, the setting value is confirmed, and the setting value command (BA70H to BA75H corresponding to six stages of setting 1 to setting 6) is sent to the production control unit 540. ) to end the setting change process.

Furthermore, even while the settings are being changed, the WDT clearing process is executed and the power supply abnormality check process is executed, so that it is possible to cope with power supply abnormalities or program abnormalities during the setting changes.

Furthermore, while the settings are being changed, security information is transmitted to the hall computer as external output information.

Incidentally, the setting change process may be configured to be executable even when the setting stage is one, and in that case, the setting value will not be changed even if the setting value changing operation means is operated. However, in terms of internal control processing, the acquired setting value (e.g. 00H) is updated (+01H), and by determining that the updated setting value exceeds 00H corresponding to setting 1, the setting is re-set. It may be corrected to 00H corresponding to 1. With this configuration, even if there is a setting stage for each model, the program can be modified only by changing numerical values, so most programs can be made common.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1005 that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the process moves to S1007 to determine whether the setting value is abnormal. In S1007, setting value information is acquired from the setting value storage area of RWM in the used area, and it is determined whether the acquired setting value is an abnormal value (a value other than 00H to 05H corresponding to the six stages of setting 1 to setting 6). Determine whether or not. As a result, if it is determined that the value is an abnormal value, RWM error processing (S1008) is executed.

Further, if it is determined in S1007 that the setting value acquired from the setting value storage area is not an abnormal value, the process moves to determination of the backup flag in S1009. In S1009, it is determined whether the backup flag, which is set when the power interruption process was normally executed during the previous power interruption, is in the ON state (AA55H). As a result, if it is determined that it is not in the ON state (≠AA55H), RWM error processing (S1008) is executed.

(RWM error processing)
In the RWM error processing (S1008), the main control unit 520 controls to a game stop state in which the progress of the game program is stopped. Specifically, information indicating that the game is in a stopped state ("E" display) is displayed on the performance display LED 521, and an RWM error command (BA7FH) is transmitted to the performance control section 540. When the production control unit 540 receives the RWM error command (BA7FH), the message "Please change the settings" is displayed on the image display means 31 in white text on a black screen, and the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, and 19d display a predetermined message. An error sound is output.

Thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed in which the WDT clear process and the power supply abnormality check process are repeated. Once the game is stopped due to the RWM error process (S1008), the game will not be canceled unless the power is turned on again using the power switch and the setting change process (S1006) is executed. , the infinite loop processing continues.

Furthermore, while the game is in a stopped state, security information is transmitted to the hall computer as external output information.

Incidentally, the RWM error processing (S1008) may be configured to be executable even when the setting stage is one stage. With this configuration, even if there is a setting stage for each model, the program can be modified only by changing numerical values, so most programs can be made common.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1009 that the backup flag is in the ON state (AA55H) (=AA55H), the process moves to S1010 to determine whether the RWM clear condition is satisfied. In S1010, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 522 is in the ON state (pressed state). As a result, if it is determined that it is in the ON state, RWM clear processing (S1011) is executed.

(RWM clear processing)
In the RWM clearing process (S1011), the used area RWM clearing process is executed to clear all of the RWM areas in the used area except for the setting value storage area (RWMs outside the used area are not subject to the clearing process). Furthermore, an initialize command (BA01H) and an RWM clear command (BA02H) are transmitted to the production control unit 540. When the production control unit 540 receives the initialize command (BA01H), it specifies movable parts (middle push button movable part, side unit movable part, board side movable part (lower movable part 30a, upper movable part 30b)) for operation confirmation. An initialization operation is performed using the operation pattern. In addition, when the production control unit 540 receives the RWM clear command (BA02H), the RWM controller notifies that the RWM clear has been performed using the image display means 31, speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d, LEDs 63a, 64a, etc. Clear notification is executed for a predetermined period of time (eg, 30 seconds). At this time, the default background screen indicating the initial state is displayed on the image display means 31, and the decorative patterns 100, 101, and 102 are displayed in a predetermined display mode (e.g., "2", "3", " 7”).

Next, RWM clear initial settings are performed in accordance with the used area RWM clear process. In the initial setting when clearing RWM, the fraud information timer is set to measure the notification time (30 seconds) of RWM clear notification, and the LED 76a for special symbol 1 variation display and the LED 76b for special symbol 2 variation display are set to a specific loss. Set a specific loss stop light emission pattern to display with a stop light emission pattern, and when the number of special symbol 1 variation display or special symbol 2 variation display reaches a preset specific number (900 times), relief mode (time saving) is activated. A counter for the number of times relief is activated is set for activating the game state). After these settings are completed, the RWM clearing process (S1011) ends.

Further, the RWM clear processing (S1011) is configured to be executed not only when it is determined in S1010 that the RWM clear switch 522 is in the ON state, but also after the setting change processing (S1006) is completed. There is. Therefore, when the setting change process (S1006) is performed, the RWM clear process (S1011) is also executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1010 that the RWM clear switch 522 is in the OFF state (not pressed), the process moves to S1012 to determine whether the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. In S1012, the conditions are satisfied that the inner frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 2 (inner frame open switch 35b is in an ON state), and the setting key switch 523 is in a rotationally operated state (ON state). If so, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and the setting confirmation process (S1013) is executed.

(Setting confirmation process)
In the setting confirmation process (S1013), first, the setting value information is acquired from the setting value storage area of the RWM in the used area into the register, and based on the acquired setting value, the setting value information (any of settings 1 to 6) is information) is displayed on the setting display means 521.

Next, a setting confirmation start command (BA60H to BA65H corresponding to six stages of settings 1 to 6) is transmitted to the production control unit 540. When the production control section 540 receives the setting confirmation start command, it displays a setting history list screen on the image display means 31 along with a black screen displaying "Settings changing" in green letters. Further, the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, and 19d output a sound saying "Settings are being changed". When the setting history list screen is displayed, by using the operating means 14a or the cross button 18, it is possible to check the history information of the setting values so far, the setting time, etc.

The history information can display up to 50 previous setting information, and each time new history information is updated, the oldest history information (50th time) is deleted. Furthermore, the set time can be displayed up to 999:59 (minutes). Additionally, while the settings history list screen is displayed, it is possible to clear the settings history by holding down the up and down keys on the cross button for 3 seconds.

After that, it is determined whether the setting key switch 523 is in the ON state, and if it is in the ON state, the above-mentioned process is repeated from acquiring the input information of the RWM clear switch 522 again, and the setting key switch 523 is in the OFF state. In this case, a setting value command (BA70H to BA75H corresponding to six stages of setting 1 to setting 6) is transmitted to the production control unit 540, and the setting confirmation process (S1013) is ended.

Further, even during setting confirmation, the WDT clearing process is executed and power supply abnormality check processing is executed, so that it is possible to cope with power supply abnormality or program abnormality during setting confirmation.

Also, while the settings are being confirmed, security information is sent to the hall computer as external output information, and the system is configured so that the security signal is output for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds) even after the settings confirmation is complete. There is.

Incidentally, the setting confirmation process (S1013) may be configured to be executable even when the setting stage is one stage. With this configuration, even if there is a setting stage for each model, the program can be modified only by changing numerical values, so most programs can be made common.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1012 that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied, the process moves to backup restoration processing in S1014.

(Backup restoration process)
In the backup restoration process (S1014), various gaming processes are restored based on the backup data backed up at the time of power outage.

Further, an initialize command (BA01H) and a backup restoration command (BA03H) are transmitted to the production control unit 540. When the performance control unit 540 receives the setting change start command (BA76H), the image display means 31 displays a black screen with white text "Recovered from power outage. Please resume the game." In parallel with this, the initialization operation of the movable parts (middle push button movable part, side unit movable part, board side movable part (lower movable part 30a, upper movable part 30b)) is also executed by the initialization command. When the command transmission to the production control unit 540 is finished, the backup restoration process (S1014) is finished.

Further, the backup restoration process (S1014) is configured to be executed not only when it is determined in S1012 that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied, but also after the setting confirmation process (S1013) is completed. . Therefore, when the setting confirmation process (S1013) is performed, the backup restoration process (S1014) is also executed.

To summarize the above-mentioned processing, in the main control system processing, one of the following processings (1) to (4) is performed.
(1) Setting change processing (S1006) + RWM clear processing (S1011)
(2) RWM clear processing (S1011)
(3) Setting confirmation processing (S1013) + backup restoration processing (S1014)
(4) Backup restoration processing (S1014)
After any one of the processes (1) to (4) is performed, the game start clear process (S1015) shown in FIG. 2-3 is performed. In this process, the error information storage area that stores error information of the used area RWM is cleared. Specifically, a backup flag, a power supply abnormality counter for storing the number of power supply abnormality determinations, a dispensing abnormality counter for storing the number of times the dispensing control unit 510 has determined an abnormality, and various errors (ball jam, out of supply, counting abnormality, Clears error flags for determining disconnection, door opening, prize opening error, radio wave error, magnetic error, etc.), error detection timer for detecting various error states, and error notification timer for managing various error notification times. do. As a result, when the power is turned on, the error information before the power is turned off is cleared, so when the power is turned on, it is possible to recover with the error state cleared.

Subsequently, game start settings (S1016) are performed. In this process, internal function register settings and various settings related to the game are performed.

First, set the internal function registers: interrupt priority register, CTC control register, CTC data register, interrupt enable register, WDT control register, transmission prescaler register, 8-bit variable length random number maximum value register, 16-bit variable length random number maximum value. Configure registers, external latch control registers, etc.

The interrupt priority register is a register that sets the priority when multiple interrupt requests occur. In this embodiment, since only one CTC-based interrupt request is used, prioritization is not particularly necessary, but the interrupt request based on the CTC used is set to have a higher priority.

The CTC control register is a register for setting a timer value setting method by CTC, and is set to a fixed value. The CTC data register is a register that sets a count value that determines the output timing of an interrupt request signal by the CTC, and in this embodiment, a count value equivalent to 4 ms is set in order to realize timer interrupt processing that occurs at a 4 ms cycle. are doing.

The interrupt permission register is a register for setting permission/inhibition of an interrupt request signal by the CTC, and is set to the permission state in order to generate timer interrupt processing (S1024 to S1045).

The WDT control register performs settings related to the WDT clear mode and timer. The transmission prescaler register sets the transmission baud rate for serial communication with the payout control unit 510.

In the 8-bit variable length random number maximum value register, special symbols are used to draw the types of stop symbols such as jackpot stop light emission pattern, small hit stop light emission pattern, loss stop light emission pattern, etc. in special symbol 1 variation display and special symbol 2 variation display. Normal symbols used in the normal symbol lottery process to set the total number of random numbers (e.g. 205) for special symbols used in the lottery process and to draw types of stop symbols such as hit stop light emission pattern and loss stop light emission pattern in the normal symbol fluctuation display. Set the total number of random numbers (e.g. 200). Each random number circuit is configured to be activated by setting the maximum value (total number) of each random number in the 8-bit variable length random number maximum value register.

The 16-bit variable length random number maximum value register contains the special symbol variation pattern random number used in the special symbol variation pattern lottery process to draw the variation mode (variation time and variation effect) of the special symbol 1 variation display and special symbol 2 variation display. (e.g. 10,000) and the total number of normal symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers (e.g. 30,000) used in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern lottery process to draw the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time and fluctuation effect) of the normal symbol fluctuation display. ) settings. Each random number circuit is configured to be activated by setting the maximum value (total number) of each random number in the 16-bit variable length random number maximum value register.

The external latch control register is used to obtain (latch) a random value in each random number circuit (8-bit fixed-length random number circuit, 16-bit fixed-length random number circuit, 8-bit variable-length random number circuit, 16-bit variable-length random number circuit). Configure settings to permit acquisition of each random value when a signal is input.

In addition, it may be configured such that a plurality of types of special symbol variation pattern random numbers are provided and the variation mode is determined using the plurality of special symbol variation pattern random numbers. In that case, the maximum value of the 8-bit variable length random number The register may be configured to set the total number of variable pattern random numbers for the second special symbol (eg, 240) and the total number of variable pattern random numbers for the third special symbol (eg, 252).

By the way, 16-bit fixed-length random number circuits are used for the random numbers used to determine the jackpot used in the lottery for the special symbol 1 variation display and the special symbol 2 variation display, and the random numbers used for the success or failure lottery for the normal symbol variation display. This 16-bit fixed-length random number circuit is configured to automatically start up after a system reset of the main control unit 520 or a reset of the WDT. Therefore, there is no need to set the maximum value of random numbers to start up the random number circuit.

In addition, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for hit determination, random numbers for special symbols, random numbers for normal symbols, variable pattern random numbers for special symbols, and variable pattern random numbers for normal symbols can be generated by a program without using each random number circuit. It may also be configured to generate (soft random numbers). In this case, for example, in the main loop processing (S1017 to S1023) and timer interrupt processing (S1024 to S1045) that are executed cyclically, random numbers are used to update each random value and to set the initial value of each random value. It is desirable to configure it to perform update processing.

Next, as various settings related to the game, clear processing of the LED common port, ON setting of the firing control signal, and setting of the operation confirmation display timer of the performance display LED 521 are performed.

In this embodiment, the performance display LED 521 and the pattern display device 76 are each controlled by a dynamic lighting method, and in the LED common port clearing process, the common data of the common port output to each is once cleared. .

Next, by setting the firing control signal, which was set to OFF at the start of the main control system processing, to ON, the firing operation of the game ball is permitted.

Finally, an operation confirmation display timer is set to perform an operation confirmation display in which the performance display LED 521 is completely blinked for a predetermined period of time (approximately 5 seconds). Thereby, the performance display LED 521 always performs an operation confirmation display for a predetermined time every time the power is turned on, and starts displaying the base value after the operation confirmation display for a predetermined time ends.

When these settings are completed, the process moves to the main loop processing (S1017 to S1023).

(main loop processing)
In the main loop processing (S1017 to S1023), first, interrupt prohibition processing (S1017) is performed to prohibit generation of an interrupt processing program. Next, all registers are saved to the stack area, and the table pointer register, which is a reference address for specifying the RWM area to be used, is saved to the stack area (S1018 to S1019). Thereafter, the main loop outside-area processing (S1020) placed in the out-of-area program is called and executed. After executing the processing outside the area within the main loop (S1020), the table pointer register is restored, all registers are restored (S1021 to S1022), and interrupt enable processing (S1023) is performed to allow the generation of an interrupt processing program. conduct.

While this series of main loop processing (S1017 to S1023) is being repeated, if the interrupt timing that occurs at a predetermined period (4 ms period) arrives, timer interrupt processing (S1024 to S1045) is executed. It is composed of Incidentally, while the main loop processing (S1017 to S1023) is being executed, the interrupt prohibition processing (S1017) is being performed, so the timer interrupt processing (S1024 to S1045) is not executed. The timer interrupt process (S1024 to S1045) is executed after the interrupt enable process is performed in S1023 until the next interrupt disable process (S1017) is performed.

(Processing outside the main loop area)
Here, the processing outside the main loop area (S1020) will be explained with reference to FIG. 2-5. FIG. 2-5 shows a flowchart of the processing outside the main loop area (S1020). The main loop internal and external area processing (S1020) is called and executed during the execution of the main loop processing (S1017 to S1023).

When the main loop internal and external area processing (S1020) is called, the stack pointer in the used area is first saved, and the stack pointer outside the used area is set (S1046).

Next, RWM initialization determination processing (S1047) is executed. Here, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the contents of the outside-of-use area RWM, and if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the outside-of-use area RWM is cleared and initial data is set. Here, to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred, a display for specifying the display contents (real-time base value, first cumulative base value, second cumulative base value, third cumulative base value) of the performance display LED 521 is used. In addition to monitoring abnormalities such as whether the value of the content pointer is an abnormal value or whether the value of the division task pointer that manages the stages of the division task in the performance display LED 521 total division processing (S1048), It is also monitored whether an initial flag for determining whether or not it is the first time the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on is ON (the first time the power is turned on). This is because when the power is turned on for the first time, necessary data has not yet been set, and initial data needs to be set.

Next, a performance display LED aggregation division process (S1048) is executed to calculate a base value to be displayed on the performance display LED 521. In the performance display LED aggregation division process (S1048), various winning holes (special symbol 1 starting hole 38, special symbol 2 starting hole 39, upper left winning hole 40, middle left winning hole 41, lower left winning hole 42, right winning hole 43, When there is a prize in the Upper University winning hole 44, Lower University winning hole 45), the number of prize balls associated with winning is counted, and when there is a ball entering the out switch count 47a, the number of outs is counted, and the counted prize A base value is calculated based on the number of pitches and number of outs. The calculated base value is stored in the ratio buffer of the RWM outside the usage area, and the base value stored in this ratio buffer is displayed on the performance display LED 521.

Finally, the stack pointer outside the used area is restored (S1049), and the main loop outside area processing (S1020) is ended.

(timer interrupt processing)
When an interrupt timing arrives during execution of the main loop processing (S1017 to S1023), the timer interrupt processing (S1024 to S1045) shown in FIG. 2-4 is executed. In the timer interrupt process (S1024 to S1045), each process related to the game (gaming process) is executed in the order of (1) to (18) below.
(1) Power supply abnormality check processing (S1024) that checks for power supply abnormalities and performs power outage processing in the event of an emergency.
(2) Timer management processing to update various timers used in game processing (S1025)
(3) Switches (special symbol 1 starting opening switch 38a, special symbol 2 starting opening switch 39a, winning opening switch 40a, 42a, 43a, big winning opening switch 44a, 45a, right gate switch 46a, out switch 47a, etc.) Input management processing to create and manage input data based on input information (S1026)
(4) Random number circuit processing to check for abnormalities in the random number circuit (S1027)
(5) Prize ball management processing (S1028) that refers to the information on the winning counter and, if there is a prize, transmits a payout control command (prize ball command) that specifies the number of prize balls to the payout control unit 510.
(6) Monitoring of the ball entering the right gate switch 46a (normal symbol starting port switch), updating of the normal symbol pending memory information, winning lottery processing, normal symbol lottery processing, normal symbol variation pattern lottery processing, and start of normal symbol variation display. Normal symbol management processing to perform processing and stop processing (S1029)
(7) Ordinary electric accessory management process (S1030) that performs the processing necessary to execute the electric chew support, such as opening and closing the movable piece 39b of the special symbol 2 starting port 39.
(8) Monitoring of ball entry into the special symbol 1 starting port switch 38a and the special symbol 2 starting port switch 39a, updating of special symbol pending memory information, execution determination of advance notice, jackpot lottery processing, special symbol lottery processing, special symbol variation Special symbol management processing (S1031) that performs pattern lottery processing, special symbol fluctuation display start processing and stop processing, and setting processing regarding transition of gaming state.
(9) Special electric accessory management process (S1032) that performs execution processing regarding winning games (big winning games, small winning games) and setting processing of the gaming state after the jackpot game.
(10) Various sensors (magnetic sensor 73, radio sensor 74, vibration sensor 75) and switches (ball counting switch 23c, out-of-supply detection switch 23d, firing stop switch 34, frame release switch 35, ball jam detection switch 36) Based on the detection information, a monitoring process is performed to monitor whether an error (abnormality) has occurred in the gaming operation, and an error management process is performed to send an error command that can specify the type of error to the performance control unit 540 (S1033)
(11) A game information notification management process (S1034) in which the LED 76g for indicating right-handed batting is turned on in a state where right-handed batting is advantageous, and the LED 76g for indicating right-handed batting is turned off in a state where left-handed batting is advantageous.
(12) External terminal management processing (S1035) for transmitting an outer end signal related to external output information from the external terminal board 60 to the hall computer
(13) Solenoid management processing (S1036) that outputs a drive signal (excitation signal) to the drive source (big winning opening opening/closing solenoids 70, 71, special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72)
(14) LED management processing (S1037) that updates the port output counter that manages the lighting cycle of dynamic lighting control and outputs control signals (common data, lighting data) to the symbol display device 76 and performance display LED 521.
(15) A timer that performs area transition processing that performs processing related to transition between a used area program and a non-used area program, display processing that displays the base value on the performance display LED 521, and processing related to creation and output of sighting test signals, etc. Processing outside the interrupt area (S1038 to S1042)
(16) When the out switch 47a detects a game ball, an out command transmission process (S1043) that transmits an out command indicating detection information to the production control unit 540
(17) SPI communication start processing to output serial data stored in the serial communication buffer (S1044)
(18) WDT clear processing (S1045) to clear the WDT

Each of the above processes (1) to (18) will be described in detail below.

((1) Power supply abnormality check process)
In the power abnormality check process (S1024), first, information on the input port into which the power abnormality signal is input is obtained, and if the power abnormality signal is ON, the power abnormality counter is incremented (+01H), and if it is OFF, the power abnormality counter is incremented (+01H). Clear the value of the power supply abnormality counter (clear to 00H). At this time, if the power abnormality signal is OFF, the process ends here. If the power abnormality signal is ON, the process is continued, and it is determined whether the added value of the power abnormality counter has reached a predetermined value (eg, 02H). If it is determined that the predetermined value has been reached (if it is determined that the power abnormality signal is ON twice in a row), it is determined that there is a power abnormality, and backup processing is executed. Thereafter, in preparation for power cutoff, an infinite loop process is executed to stop the progress of the game process.

In the backup process performed before the power is cut off, a power cut command 1 (BA33H) and a power cut command 2 (BA55H) are transmitted to the production control unit 540. When the effect control unit 540 receives the power-off command 2 (BA55H), a black screen is displayed on the image display means 31. By the way, power off command 1 (BA33H) and power off command 2 (BA55H) are executed when a power abnormality is confirmed in the power abnormality check process performed during the setting change process S1006, RWM error process S1008, and setting confirmation process S1013. In this case, it is similarly transmitted to the production control section 540.

Subsequently, the backup flag is set to the ON state (AA55H). By setting the backup flag to the ON state (AA55H), it is possible to determine when the power is turned on next time that the backup process was performed normally and then the power was shut off. Further, the protection state of the RWM area is validated, the RWM protection is set to be valid to make it readable/unwritable, and subsequent rewriting of data in the RWM area is prohibited.

After that, the main control unit 520 sends drive signals and firing control signals to various solenoids (big winning opening opening/closing solenoids 70 and 71, special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72), and commands to the performance control unit 540. Clear the solenoid port for outputting the strobe signal to be sent. Furthermore, external output information (OFF signal) for turning off all outer end signals, OFF data for turning off all common data output to the symbol display device 76 and performance display LED 521, and symbol display device 76 Then, turn-off data for turning off all lights as data to be output to the performance display LED 521 is stored in the serial communication output buffer, and output processing is started. As a result, various functions are stopped before the power is shut off.

Finally, in order to prohibit the generation of timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enable register is set to the disabled state, and interrupt disable processing is performed to prohibit the generation of the interrupt processing program (S1024 to S1045), and the process proceeds to infinite loop processing. and transition.

((2) Timer management processing)
In the timer management process (S1025), the values of various timers used in the gaming process are updated. The types of timers that can be used are: general and general electric timer, special electric figure and special electric timer, fraudulent information timer, magnetic error notification timer, radio error notification timer, winning slot error notification timer, general electric prize winning valid timer, and large winning opening prize. There are valid timers, operation confirmation display timers, etc.

Here, the general pattern general electric timer includes the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display, the light emitting time of the stop light emission pattern (normal pattern confirmation time, general pattern confirmation time), the opening time of the electric chew support, the interval time before and after opening, etc. This is a timer that is set each time it is needed and is used to manage this.

The special figure special electric timer controls the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display, the light emitting time of the stop light emitting pattern (special symbol confirmation time, special figure confirmation time), the opening time of the big winning openings 44 and 45, the interval time before the start of the jackpot, and the interval time between rounds. The timer is used to manage the interval time, jackpot end interval time, etc., which are set as needed.

The fraud information timer is the RWM clear notification time, the fraud notification time due to an illegal winning to the special symbol 2 starting hole (winning when the electric chew support is not activated), the fraudulent winning to the grand prize openings 44 and 45 (grand winning hole 44, This is a timer for managing fraud notification time, etc., which is set each time it is necessary.

The magnetic error notification timer is a timer for setting and managing a magnetic error notification time based on magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 73. The radio wave error notification timer is a timer for setting and managing a radio wave error notification time based on the radio wave detection by the radio wave sensor 74. The vibration error notification timer is a timer for setting and managing a vibration error notification time based on vibration detection by the vibration sensor 75. The winning hole notification timer detects fraud due to fraudulent winnings to multiple winning holes (upper left winning hole 40, middle left winning hole 41, lower left winning hole 42) (each winning hole switch 40a, 42a, 43a detects continuously for a predetermined period of time). A timer is used to set and manage the time.

The regular winning prize valid timer is a timer for managing a predetermined winning prize valid time that is set after the end of the open time of the electric chew support. The special electric winning prize valid timer is a timer for managing a predetermined prize valid time set after the end of the opening time of the big prize openings 44 and 45. The operation confirmation display timer is a timer for managing the execution time of the operation confirmation display that causes the performance display LED 521 to blink completely.

In addition, in timer management processing, the timer to be updated is basically a 2-byte timer consisting of 2 bytes, but it is not limited to this. may be configured. In this case, in the timer management process (S1025), timer update processing for the 2-byte timer and timer update processing for the 4-byte timer are respectively executed.

((3) Input management processing)
In the input management process (S1026), switches (special symbol 1 starting opening switch 38a, special symbol 2 starting opening switch 39a, winning opening switch 40a, 42a, 43a, big winning opening switch 44a, 45a, right gate switch 46a, out Switch input data (switch edge data and level data) is created based on the input information of the switch 47a, etc.).

Furthermore, based on the created switch input data, it is checked whether there is any unauthorized winning in the special symbol 2 starting hole 39 and the big winning openings 44, 45, and if it is determined that there is an unauthorized winning, it is determined that the winning is fraudulent. The switch input data regarding the special symbol 2 starting opening 39 or the big winning openings 44 and 45 that have been entered is cleared, and a fraud notification time is set in the fraud information timer.

Subsequently, information on the prize winning counter is updated based on the switch input data. Based on the winning counter information updated here, a prize ball command will be transmitted to the payout control unit 510 in the prize ball management process (S1028) described later.

Further, a plurality of winning counters are provided depending on the number of winning balls. Finally, based on the switch input data, a switch passage command is sent to the effect control section 540, and this process is completed.

((4) Random number circuit processing)
In the random number circuit processing (S1027), a process is performed to check whether there is any abnormality in the random number circuit by referring to a random number error status register (built-in register) that indicates an abnormality in the random number circuit. Here, the random number error status register indicates the status of each of the 8-bit fixed-length random number circuit, 16-bit fixed-length random number circuit, 8-bit variable-length random number circuit, and 16-bit variable-length random number circuit, and which random number It is configured to be able to determine whether an abnormality has occurred in the circuit.

As a result of referring to the random number error status register, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in at least one of the random number circuits, the random number circuit abnormality confirmation flag is set to the ON state (05AH), and the production control unit 540 is A main board error command (E00BH) is sent to the main board error command (E00BH). When the production control unit 540 receives the main board error command (E00BH), "main board error" is displayed on the image display means 31. Furthermore, if it is determined that no abnormality has occurred, the process ends without setting a flag or transmitting a command.

Here, if the random number circuit abnormality confirmation flag is set to the ON state (05AH), in the normal symbol management process (S1029) described later, the winning number obtained when the ball enters the right gate switch 46a is detected. It is configured to clear (set to 00H) the random numbers for determination, the random numbers for normal symbols, and the fluctuation pattern random numbers for normal symbols. By clearing the random number for hit determination and the random number for normal symbols (set to 00H), a loss will always be selected as the result of the win/fail lottery and the normal symbol lottery, and the result of the normal symbol fluctuation display will always be a loss stop pattern. becomes. In addition, by clearing the normal symbol variation pattern random number (set to 00H), the normal symbol variation pattern with short variation time and less variation performance is selected.

Similarly, in the special symbol management process (S1031), a random number for jackpot determination and a random number for special symbol are obtained when the ball enters the special symbol 1 starting port switch 38a and the special symbol 2 starting port switch 39a. , special symbol variation pattern random numbers are also cleared (set to 00H). By clearing the random numbers for jackpot determination and the random numbers for special symbols (set to 00H), a loss will always be selected as the result of the win/fail lottery and special symbol lottery, and the result of the special symbol fluctuation display will always be a loss stop pattern. becomes. In addition, by clearing the special symbol variation pattern random number (set to 00H), a special symbol variation pattern with a short variation time and less variation performance is selected.

In this way, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the random number circuit, each acquired random number (random number for hit determination, It is configured to forcibly rewrite the random numbers for normal symbols, random numbers for normal symbols variation patterns, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for special symbols, and variation pattern random numbers for special symbols. In addition, once the random number circuit abnormality confirmation flag is set to the ON state (05AH), unless the random number circuit abnormality confirmation flag is cleared by the RWM clearing process (S1011), normal symbol management processing (S1029) and special The symbol management process (S1031) is never executed.

((5) Prize ball management processing)
In the prize ball management process (S1028), the winning counter is referred to, and if it is determined that there is winning information in the winning counter, a prize ball command based on the winning information is transmitted to the payout control unit 510.

When sending a prize ball command, the winning information in the winning counter is cleared (01H is subtracted from the winning counter), so that one prize ball command is sent for one winning information. It is configured.

Further, since a plurality of winning counters are provided depending on the number of winnings, if any winning counter has winning information, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 510.

By the way, even if there is winning information for multiple winning counters, the winning ball command is configured to be sent only once in one winning ball management process (S1028), and the winning counters that were not processed are The winning information is configured to be processed in the prize ball management process (S1028) of the next timer interrupt process (S1024 to S1045). With this configuration, the processing time required for the prize ball management process (S1028) is not affected by the number of winning information, so it is possible to keep the processing time constant.

In addition, in the prize ball management process (S1028), it is determined whether the communication signal from the payout control unit 510 is in the ON state (normal state), and when it is determined that it is in the OFF state (abnormal state), adds the payout communication abnormality confirmation counter (+01H), and determines whether the added value of the payout communication abnormality confirmation counter has reached a predetermined value (eg, 02H).

If it is determined that the predetermined value has been reached (if it is determined that the communication signal is in the OFF state twice in a row), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the payout communication, and the serial circuit error flag is turned ON ( 5AH) and transmits a payout board error command (E009H) to the production control unit 540. When the production control unit 540 receives the payout board error command (E009H), a “payout board error” is displayed on the image display means 31.

In this way, when the serial circuit error flag is set to the ON state (5AH), winning information will be displayed in the winning counter in the current prize ball management process (S1028) and the next prize ball management process (S1028). Regardless of whether there is a prize ball command, it is configured not to transmit a prize ball command to the payout control unit 510. Therefore, once the serial circuit error flag is set to the ON state (5AH), the prize ball command will not be sent to the payout control unit 510 unless the serial circuit error flag is cleared by RWM clear processing. There isn't.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the communication signal from the payout control unit 510 is in the ON state (normal state), the payout communication abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (cleared to 00H), and the prize ball command is issued depending on the presence or absence of winning information. Send.

((6) Normal symbol management processing)
In the normal symbol management process (S1029), whether or not the right gate switch 46a detects a game ball is monitored whether or not the normal fluctuation display is being executed, and if it is determined that a game ball is detected. In addition to adding (+1) the normal symbol retention memory, multiple types of random number information (random numbers for hit determination, random numbers for normal symbols, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation patterns) necessary to execute the normal symbol fluctuation display are added. Execute the acquisition process.

As an area for storing these random number information, the random number storage area (random number storage area for hit determination, random number storage area for normal symbols, random number storage area for normal symbols fluctuating pattern) is used to store the upper limit of the storage number of normal symbols ( For example: 4), and the acquired random number information is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol pending memories (the number of normal symbol pending memories after addition).

Then, when the start condition for normal symbol fluctuation display is satisfied, the number of normal symbols pending memory is subtracted, and the information stored in the first storage area (information of the storage area corresponding to the pending memory number 1) is The information used in this normal symbol fluctuation display is stored in the buffer area (random number buffer for hit determination, random number buffer for normal symbols, fluctuation pattern random number buffer for normal symbols), and is stored in the subsequent storage area. The stored information (information in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories 2 to 4) is shifted in order toward the head of the queue (information in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories 4 → corresponding to the number of pending memories 3). information on the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories 2 → information on the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories 1).

In this way, the random number information stored in the storage area is configured to be processed on a first-in, first-out basis. Then, using the random number information stored in the buffer area, the winning lottery process, the normal symbol lottery process, and the normal symbol variation pattern lottery process regarding the current normal symbol variation display are executed, respectively.

In the winning lottery process, the winning lottery process is performed using a winning judgment table in which the winning lower limit judgment value and the winning upper limit judgment value are set, and the value of the random number information stored in the random number buffer for winning judgment is the winning lower limit. If it is determined that the random value is larger than the judgment value and smaller than the upper limit judgment value (lower limit judgment value < random number information < upper limit judgment value), it is judged that the random value belongs to the hit judgment range, and the winning is determined. Set the determination flag to ON state (hit determination).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the random number value does not belong to the hit determination range, the hit determination flag is set to the OFF state (loss determination). By setting the hit determination flag to the ON state (hit determination) here, in the normal electric accessories management process to be described later, the process necessary for executing the electric chew support will be executed.

In the normal symbol lottery process, the symbol lottery process is performed using either the common symbol loss symbol table or the common symbol winning symbol table depending on the result of the winning lottery processing (according to the content of the hit determination flag). The normal symbol loss symbol table and the common symbol symbol table include the random number judgment value, the stopping symbol type information for determining the type of stopping symbol corresponding to this random number judgment value, and the normal symbol in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern lottery process. The fluctuation pattern offset information used to determine the fluctuation pattern is set, and the value of the random number information stored in the random number buffer for normal symbols is searched for the corresponding random number judgment value, and as a result of the search, the corresponding random number is Stop symbol type information and fluctuation pattern offset information according to the determination value are acquired.

Based on the stop symbol type information acquired here, the stop symbol after the normal symbol variation display is determined, and when the normal symbol variation display ends, the contents of the determined stop symbol are displayed. Further, based on the acquired variation pattern offset information, a normal symbol variation pattern is selected in a normal symbol variation pattern lottery process to be described later.

In the normal symbol variation pattern lottery process, the variation pattern offset information acquired in the normal symbol lottery process, information on the current gaming state and gaming mode, and the number of reserved memory pieces as necessary (for example, only in the case of a loss) are stored. With reference to this, a variation pattern lottery process is performed using a variation pattern table determined from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables.

The random number judgment value is set in the fluctuation pattern table, and the random number judgment value corresponding to the random number information stored in the fluctuation pattern random number buffer for normal symbols is searched, and as a result of the search, the normal number judgment value is set according to the corresponding random number judgment value. Symbol variation pattern information is acquired. Based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern information acquired here, the fluctuation execution time of the normal symbol fluctuation display is determined, and the fluctuation execution time is set in the general symbol general electric timer.

Further, based on the acquired normal symbol variation pattern information, a normal symbol variation pattern command may be sent to the production control unit 540, and when the production control unit 540 receives the normal symbol variation pattern command, the image display The means 31 may be configured to execute a decorative symbol normal fluctuation game in which a plurality of decorative symbols 100, 101, and 102 perform variable display in parallel with the normal symbol fluctuation display using the symbol display device 76. good.

In this way, by executing the winning lottery process, the normal symbol lottery process, and the normal symbol variation pattern lottery process, the current normal symbol variation display starts, but while the normal symbol variation display is being executed, a new normal It is configured so that the start condition for the symbol fluctuation display is not satisfied, and until the current normal symbol fluctuation display ends (until the fluctuation execution time and symbol confirmation time end), there will be no chance of winning regarding the new normal symbol fluctuation display. The lottery process, normal symbol lottery process, and normal symbol variation pattern lottery process are never executed.

In the normal symbol management process (S1029), while the normal symbol fluctuation display is being executed, the fluctuation execution time set in the general symbol general pattern timer is monitored, and when the fluctuation execution time ends, a new regular symbol is displayed. The symbol confirmation time is set in the general electricity timer, and a process for displaying the contents of the determined stop symbol is executed. Then, when the symbol confirmation time has ended and it is determined that the hit determination flag is set to the ON state (hit determination), the electric chew support execution flag is set.

By setting this electric chew support execution flag, the electric chew support execution process is performed in the normal electric accessory management process (S1030) described later. With the above, the process related to the series of normal symbol variation display is completed.

Further, when the right gate switch 46a detects a game ball, information regarding the added normal symbol retention memory may be transmitted to the performance control unit 540 as a normal symbol retention addition command. Further, when the start condition for the normal symbol fluctuation display is established, information regarding the subtracted normal symbol pending storage may be transmitted to the performance control unit 540 as a normal symbol subtraction command. As a result, the production control unit 540 can grasp the current number of normal symbols pending memory, and can display a normal symbol pending display indicating the current number of normal symbols memory displays on the image display means 31. .

In addition, the winning lottery process, the normal symbol lottery process, and the normal symbol variation pattern lottery process are executed not only when the start condition for the normal symbol variation display is satisfied, but also when the right gate switch 46a detects a game ball. may be configured. Furthermore, when transmitting the normal symbol retention addition command to the production control unit 540, it may be configured to add and transmit the normal symbol variation pattern information acquired by the normal symbol variation pattern lottery process. As a result, the production control unit 540 can grasp the variation content of the normal symbol variation display based on the current normal symbol retention memory, and can also grasp the variation content of the normal symbol variation display based on the current normal symbol retention memory, and pre-read production according to the variation content (dedicated display that can only be executed with specific variation content). This makes it possible to perform pre-reading effects, etc.).

Further, the normal symbol reservation addition command may be configured to be sent with pre-read notice prohibition information added thereto. Thereby, it becomes possible to restrict execution of the pre-read notice by the effect control unit 540.

((7) Ordinary electric accessory management processing)
The normal electric accessory management process (S1030) is performed when the result of the normal fluctuation display is determined to be a hit in the above-mentioned normal symbol management process (S1029), and as a result, the electric chew support execution flag is set. It is configured to perform the processing necessary to run the chew support. Therefore, if the electric chew support execution flag is not set, the process necessary to execute the electric chew support is not performed in the normal electric accessory management process (S1030).

In the normal electric accessory management process (S1030), a setting process before the start of normal electric accessory operation (setting process before the start of electric chew support operation) and a setting process at the start of ordinary electric accessory operation (setting process at the start of electric chew support operation) ), a normal electric accessory operation setting process (electronic chew support operation setting process), and a normal electric accessory operation end setting process (electronic chew support operation end setting process) are executed. Incidentally, the normal electric accessory management process (S1030) is configured so that the start condition for a new normal symbol variation display does not hold while these processes are being executed.

First, in the normal electric accessories pre-operation setting process, the electric chew support pre-start interval time before the electric chew support is executed is set in the ordinary electric power accessory timer. The interval time before starting the electric chew support set here determines the time from the end of the normal symbol variation display to the start of the electric chew support.

When the interval time before starting electric chew support has elapsed, a normal electric accessory operation start setting process is executed, and here, a normal electric accessory winning number counter for counting the number of winnings to the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is set. It is cleared (set to 0) and an opening/closing pattern for opening/closing the movable piece 39b of the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is selected. Then, based on the selected opening/closing pattern, drive control data for the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is set. Further, the continuous opening time for opening the movable piece 39b of the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is set in the ordinary figure ordinary electric timer, and the process is shifted to the ordinary electric accessory operation setting process.

In the normal electric accessory activation setting process, the value of the ordinary electric accessory winning number counter is monitored to see if it has reached the maximum number of winnings, and if it is determined that the maximum number of winnings has been reached, the special symbol 2 is activated at that point. The drive control of the starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is set to be terminated, and the electric tube support end interval time after the electric tube support ends is set in the general power timer. Furthermore, even if the maximum number of winnings has not been reached, even if the continuous open time set in the general figure general electric timer has elapsed, the same setting is performed and the process moves to the normal electric accessory operation end setting process.

When the electric chew support end interval time elapses, a normal electric accessory operation end setting process is executed. Here, the information on the opening/closing pattern used in the current electric chew support, the electric chew support execution flag, and various counters are cleared, and a setting process is performed so that the start conditions for the next normal symbol variation display can be satisfied. That is, the electric chew support end interval time set here determines the time from the end of the electric chew support until the next normal symbol variation display can be started.

With the above process, a series of processes related to the execution of the electric chew support by the normal electric accessory management process (S1030) are completed.

((8) Special design management processing)
In the special symbol management process (S1031), the special symbol 1 starting port switch 38a or the special symbol 2 starting port switch 39a detects a game ball regardless of whether the special symbol 1 variable display or the special symbol 2 variable display is being executed. monitor whether it has been done or not. In addition, the only difference in the subsequent processing is whether the content is related to the special symbol 1 or the content related to the special symbol 2, and since the content is substantially the same, in order to avoid duplicate descriptions, the content related to the special symbol 1 will be mainly described. .

When it is determined that the special symbol 1 starting port switch 38a has detected a game ball, the special symbol 1 pending memory is added (+1) and multiple types of random number information necessary to execute the special symbol 1 variable display are added. (Random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol, fluctuation pattern random number for special symbol) is executed. The random number storage areas (random number storage area for jackpot determination, random number storage area for special symbols, random number storage area for special symbols fluctuation patterns) are used as areas for storing these random number information, and the upper limit storage number of special symbol retention memory ( For example: 4), and the acquired random number information is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special symbol retention memories (the number of special symbol retention memories after addition).

In addition, at this time, if the number of special symbols 1 held and stored has reached the storage upper limit number (4 pieces), it is determined that the winning exceeds the upper limit number, and an over winning command is sent to the production control section 540. Send.

Next, a process is performed to determine whether or not to prohibit the execution of the pre-read notice. Through this determination process, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied, pre-reading notice prohibition information is acquired. When the pre-read notice prohibition information is acquired, the pre-read notice prohibition information is added to the special symbol suspension addition command which is information regarding the added special symbol 1 pending storage, and the command is sent to the performance control section 540. This restricts the execution of advance notice.

Incidentally, the special symbol 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is established when the current gaming state is a low probability high base state (time saving gaming state) or a jackpot gaming state in which special symbol 2 pending storage is likely to occur.

Further, the special symbol 2 pre-reading prohibition condition is established when the current gaming state is a low probability low base state (or high probability low base state) in which special symbol 1 pending storage is likely to occur or a jackpot gaming state.

Further, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is not satisfied, special symbol variation pattern information is added to the special symbol suspension addition command and is transmitted to the performance control section 540. This special symbol variation pattern information is created based on the information in the random number storage area. This makes it possible to execute a pre-read notice according to the special symbol variation pattern.

When the special symbol variation display start condition is satisfied, the special symbol retention memory number is subtracted, and a special symbol retention subtraction command, which is information regarding the subtracted special symbol 1 retention memory, is transmitted to the production control unit 540. . Furthermore, the information stored in the first storage area (information in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories 1) is transferred to the buffer area (for jackpot determination) provided as an area to store information used in this special symbol fluctuation display. Random number buffer, random number buffer for special symbols, variable pattern random number buffer for special symbols) and the information stored in the subsequent storage area (information in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories 2 to 4) is placed at the head of the queue. (Information of the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories 4 → Information of the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories 3 → Information of the storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories 2 → Corresponding to the number of pending memories 1 storage area information).

In this way, the random number information stored in the storage area is configured to be processed on a first-in, first-out basis. Then, using the random number information stored in the buffer area, the jackpot lottery process, special symbol lottery process, and special symbol variation pattern lottery process regarding the current special symbol variation display are executed, respectively.

In the jackpot lottery process, the jackpot lottery process is performed using a jackpot determination table in which a jackpot lower limit determination value, a jackpot upper limit determination value, a small hit lower limit determination value, and a small hit upper limit determination value are set, and a random number for jackpot determination is used. When it is determined that the value of the random number information stored in the buffer is a random number larger than the jackpot lower limit judgment value and smaller than the jackpot upper limit judgment value (jackpot lower limit judgment value < random number information < jackpot upper limit judgment value), If it is determined that the random number belongs to the jackpot determination range, the jackpot determination flag is set to the ON state (jackpot determination), and if it is similarly determined that the random number belongs to the small hit determination range, the small hit determination flag is set to ON. Set the status (small hit judgment).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the random number value does not belong to the jackpot determination range or the small hit determination range, the jackpot determination flag or the small hit determination flag is set to the OFF state (miss determination).

Furthermore, the jackpot determination range is set to be different between a low probability state and a high probability state.

In the special symbol lottery process, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery process (according to the contents of the jackpot determination flag and the small hit determination flag), either the special symbol loss symbol table, the special symbol jackpot symbol table, or the special symbol small prize symbol table is selected. The symbol lottery process is performed using the .

Each symbol table contains a random number judgment value, stopping symbol type information for determining the type of stopping symbol corresponding to this random number deciding value, and special symbol fluctuation pattern used to determine the special symbol fluctuation pattern in the lottery process. The fluctuation pattern offset information is set, and the value of the random number information stored in the random number buffer for special symbols is searched for the corresponding random number judgment value, and as a result of the search, the stop symbol type is determined according to the corresponding random number judgment value. information and variation pattern offset information is obtained.

Based on the acquired stop symbol type information, the stop symbol after the special symbol variation display is determined, and when the special symbol variation display ends, the contents of the determined stop symbol are displayed. Furthermore, symbol types such as jackpot type (10R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 4R normal jackpot) and loss type (loss A, loss B) are determined by this stop symbol type information.

Also, based on the acquired variation pattern offset information, a special symbol variation pattern is selected in a special symbol variation pattern lottery process to be described later.

In the special symbol variation pattern lottery process, the variation pattern offset information acquired in the special symbol lottery process, the information on the current gaming state and gaming mode, and the number of reserved memory pieces as necessary (for example, only in the case of a loss) are stored. With reference to this, a variation pattern lottery process is performed using a variation pattern table determined from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables.

A random number judgment value is set in the fluctuation pattern table, and the random number judgment value corresponding to the random number information stored in the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number buffer is searched, and as a result of the search, a special Symbol variation pattern information is acquired. Based on the special symbol variation pattern information acquired here, the variation execution time of the special symbol variation display is determined, and the variation execution time is set in the special symbol special electric timer.

Further, based on the acquired special symbol variation pattern information, a special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the production control section 540, and a symbol designation command is transmitted based on the stop symbol type information. When the production control unit 540 receives the special symbol variation pattern command and the symbol designation command, a plurality of decorative symbols 100, 101, 102 are displayed on the image display means 31 in parallel with the special symbol 1 variation display using the symbol display device 76. A decorative symbol variation game in which a variation display is executed is executed. In addition, the performance control unit 540 determines the performance content of the decorative symbol variation game (variation pattern without reach, variation pattern with reach, etc.) according to the content of the received special symbol variation pattern command.

In this way, the current special symbol variation display starts by executing the jackpot lottery process, the special symbol lottery process, and the special symbol variation pattern lottery process, but while the special symbol variation display is being executed, a new special It is configured so that the start condition for the symbol variation display is not satisfied, and until the current special symbol variation display ends (until the variation execution time and symbol confirmation time end), there will be no new jackpot related to the new special symbol variation display. The lottery process, special symbol lottery process, and special symbol variation pattern lottery process are never executed.

In the special symbol management process (S1031), while the special symbol variation display is being executed, the variation execution time set in the special symbol special electricity timer is monitored, and when the variation execution time has ended, a new special symbol special electricity is displayed. The symbol determination time is set in the timer, and processing for displaying the contents of the determined stopped symbol is executed. Moreover, at this time, by transmitting a symbol stop command to the performance control unit 540, the variable display of the decorative symbols 100, 101, and 102 in the decorative symbol varying game is stopped.

Then, when the symbol confirmation time ends and it is determined that the jackpot determination flag is set to the ON state (jackpot determination), a jackpot game execution flag is set. By setting this jackpot game execution flag, a jackpot game execution process is performed in a special electric accessory management process (S1032) to be described later.

Further, when it is determined that the small hit determination flag is set to the ON state (small hit determination), a small hit game execution flag is set. When the small winning game execution flag is set, a small winning game execution process is performed in the special electric accessory management process (S1032). With the above, the process related to the series of normal symbol variation display is completed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when both the special symbol 1 pending memory and the special symbol 2 pending memory exist, the special symbol 2 pending memory is digested (subtracted) preferentially and the special symbol 2 variable display is performed. It is configured to start (special figure 2 priority variation). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol 1 pending storage may be preferentially digested (subtracted) and the special symbol 1 variable display may be started (special symbol 1 priority variation).

Alternatively, it may be configured such that the special symbols 1 or 2 are displayed in a varying order by digesting (subtracting) them in the order in which they are reserved (variation in winning order).

Further, it may be configured such that the reserved memory is simultaneously consumed (subtracted) and the special symbol 1 variation display and the special symbol 2 variation display are performed simultaneously (simultaneous variation).

((9) Special electric accessories management process)
The special electric accessory management process (S1032) executes a jackpot game or a small win when the result of the special symbol fluctuation display is determined to be a jackpot or a small win, and as a result, a jackpot game execution flag or a small win game execution flag is set. It is configured to execute the processing necessary for executing the small winning game. If these execution flags are not set, the process necessary for executing the jackpot game or the small win game is not performed in the special electric accessory management process (S1032).

In the special electric accessory management process (S1032), special electric accessory operation start setting process (big hit or small hit operation start setting process), special electric accessory operation start setting process (round game operation start setting process), , special electric accessory operation setting process (round game operation setting process), special electric accessory operation continuation process (round game continuation process), special electric accessory operation end setting process (big hit or small hit operation end Setting processing) is executed. Incidentally, the special electric accessory management process (S1032) is configured so that the start condition for a new special symbol variation display does not hold while these processes are being executed.

First, in the special electric accessories pre-operation setting process, the pre-jackpot start interval time before executing the jackpot game is set in the special figure special electric timer. The interval time before jackpot start set here determines the time from the end of the special symbol variation display to the start of the first round game. In addition, referring to the jackpot type of the stop symbol type information, the number of rounds of the current jackpot game is stored in the maximum round number buffer, and a round number counter for counting the number of rounds executed is prepared for the execution of the first round. and add (+01H).

Next, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the production control section 540. The jackpot start command includes information on the jackpot type and game status, and when the production control unit 540 receives this command, it determines the contents of the jackpot game production to be executed during the jackpot game, and determines the contents of the jackpot game production to be executed during the jackpot game, and determines the jackpot start interval production. Start.

When the interval time before the start of the jackpot has elapsed, a special electric accessory operation start setting process is executed. In addition, for the first round game (1st round), this process is executed after the interval time before the start of the jackpot has elapsed, but for the next round games (2nd round and after), the special electric accessory operation continuation process described below will be executed. This process will be executed after the inter-round interval time set in .

In the special electric accessory activation start setting process, the special electric accessory prize winning number counter for counting the number of prizes in the grand prize openings 44 and 45 is cleared (set to 0), and the special electric accessory prize winning number counter for counting the number of prizes in the grand prize openings 44 and 45 is cleared (set to 0). An opening/closing pattern for opening/closing the opening/closing plates 44b, 45b is selected. The opening/closing pattern is determined based on the jackpot type and the current number of rounds. Then, based on the selected opening/closing pattern, drive control data for the big prize opening opening/closing solenoids 70, 71 is set. Furthermore, the maximum continuous opening time for opening the opening/closing plates 44b, 45b of the big prize openings 44, 45 is set in the special figure special electric timer.

Next, a large prize opening opening command is transmitted to the performance control section 540. The grand prize opening opening command includes information such as the current number of round games, and when the production control unit 540 receives this command, it executes a round production according to the current round game, and the number of round games. and update the round number display. With the above, the process moves to the special electric accessory in operation setting process.

In the special electric accessory in operation setting process, it is monitored whether the value of the special electric accessory winning number counter has reached the maximum number of winnings. Here, when it is determined that there is a prize in the big winning holes 44 and 45, a big winning hole winning command is transmitted to the performance control section 540. The big winning opening winning command includes information on the occurrence of a winning and the number of winnings, and when the presentation control section 540 receives this command, it executes a winning presentation in accordance with the occurrence of a winning. In addition, if there are more wins than the maximum number of wins, an over-win effect is performed in response to the occurrence of over-wins.

If it is determined that the value of the separate electric accessory winning number counter has reached the maximum number of winnings, at that point, settings are made to terminate the drive control of the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoids 70 and 71, A discharge waiting time until the game balls remaining in the big prize openings 44, 45 are discharged after passing through the big prize opening switches 44a, 45a is set in a special figure special electric timer. Furthermore, even if the maximum number of winnings has not been reached, even if the maximum continuous open time set in the special figure special electric timer has elapsed, the same setting is made and the process is shifted to the special electric accessory operation continuation process.

When the discharge waiting time has elapsed, the special electric accessory operation continuation process is executed, and the value of the round number counter and the maximum round number buffer are compared, and if it is determined that the maximum number of rounds has not been reached (continuation judgment) , the number of rounds counter is incremented (01H) in preparation for the execution of the next round game, and the interval time between addition rounds is set in the special figure special electric timer in preparation for the execution of the first round.

Furthermore, an inter-round interval command is transmitted to the performance control unit 540 to cause the process to proceed to the special electric accessory operation start setting process again. The inter-round interval command includes round end information and information on the number of rounds, and when the performance control unit 540 receives this command, the round end performance accompanying the end of the round game or the inter-round performance performed between rounds etc.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the maximum number of rounds has been reached (end determination), the jackpot end interval time for ending the jackpot game is set in the special figure special electric timer. Furthermore, a jackpot end command is transmitted to the performance control section 540, and the process moves to the special power supply accessory operation end setting process. The jackpot end command includes information on the jackpot type, game status, etc., and when the performance control section 540 receives this command, it executes the ending performance to be performed at the end of the jackpot.

When the jackpot end interval time elapses, a special energized accessory operation end setting process is executed, and a setting process is performed to generate a game state to which the jackpot game is to be transferred after the end of the jackpot game based on information such as the jackpot type. This determines the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, the information on the opening/closing pattern used in the current jackpot game, the jackpot game execution flag, and various counters are cleared, and setting processing is performed so that the start conditions for the next special symbol variation display can be established.

With the above processing, a series of processing related to the execution of the jackpot game by the special electric accessory management processing (S1032) is completed. In addition, although we have mainly described the content related to the execution of jackpot games here, when executing small win games, due to the nature of the game, round games are not played consecutively, so the special electric accessory continues to operate. Although there is no continuation determination in the process, other than that, the process related to the small win game is performed using the same procedure as when executing the jackpot game. (Regarding the jackpot start command and jackpot end command, the small hit start command and jackpot end command are sent when a small hit occurs.)

((10) Error management processing)
In the error management process (S1033), the ball counting switch 23c, out-of-supply detection switch 23d, frame release switches 35a, 35b, ball jam detection switch 36, magnetic sensor 73, radio sensor 74, vibration sensor 75, signal line disconnection, unauthorized Detection of winnings is monitored, and if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred as a result of the monitoring, an error notification command that can specify the details of the abnormality is transmitted to the performance control section 540. Further, when it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved, an error cancellation command is transmitted to the production control section 540.

Here, for the detection of the magnetic sensor 73, the detection of the radio wave sensor 74, the detection of the vibration sensor 75, and the detection of fraudulent winnings, a predetermined error judgment time is provided, and if the abnormality is detected for a predetermined period of time, an abnormality is detected. The system is configured to determine that this is occurring. Therefore, even if signals from each sensor are temporarily detected due to noise or the like, it will not be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, the error judgment time is measured by each detection timer (radio wave error detection timer, magnetic error detection timer, vibration error detection timer, winning opening error detection timer), and these are measured in the timer management process (S1025). Configured to be updated.

In addition, when an abnormality occurs, an error notification command is sent to the production control unit 540, and each notification timer (radio wave error notification timer, magnetic error notification timer, magnetic error notification timer, (timer, vibration error notification timer, winning slot notification timer, fraud information timer).

In the error management process (S1033), even if the event in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred (for example, abnormality detection of the magnetic sensor 73) itself is resolved, an error cancellation command is not sent to the production control unit 540 at that point, After the event itself is resolved, when the value of the set notification timer becomes 0, it is configured to send an error cancellation command to the production control section 540. As a result, when the production control unit 540 receives the error notification command and starts error notification, the production control unit 540 continuously performs the error notification until the predetermined error notification time elapses and the error cancellation command is received. It is configured.

Furthermore, if an event that is determined to be an abnormality continues to occur, an error notification time is set in each notification timer each time. Therefore, even though the event itself has not been resolved, the value of the error notification timer will never become 0, and while the event is occurring, the predetermined error notification time will always be set, and the error release command is never sent.

((11) Game information notification management process)
In the gaming information notification management process (S1034), the current gaming state is determined, and if it is a gaming state in which right-handed hitting is advantageous (low probability high base state, high probability high base state, jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state). If it is determined, lighting LED data for lighting the right-hand hitting display LED 76g of the symbol display device 76 is created.

In addition, when it is determined that the game state is advantageous for left-handed hitting (low probability low base state, high probability low base state), turn-off LED data is used to turn off the right-handed hitting display LED 76g of the symbol display device 76. Create.

((12) External terminal management processing)
In the external terminal management process (S1035), external output information is created to be output to the hall computer as an external terminal signal. Here, the created external output information includes the following (external output information 1) to (external output information 10).
(External output information 1) Special symbol confirmation number information (output for 100ms from the stop of variation of special symbol variation display 1 and special symbol variation display 2)
(External output information 2) Starting port information (output for 100ms from the time when the special symbol 1 starting port switch 38a or the special symbol 2 starting port switch 39a detects a game ball)
(External output information 3) Jackpot and fluctuation shortening information (output while the fluctuation shortening function is active and during a jackpot)
(External output information 4) Jackpot information (output during jackpot game)
(External output information 5) Special symbol 1 starting port information (output for 100ms from the time when the special symbol 1 starting port switch 38a detects passage of the game ball)
(External output information 6) Special symbol 2 starting port information (output for 100ms from the time when the special symbol 2 starting port switch 39a detects passage of the game ball)
(External output information 7) Special symbol 1 confirmation count information (output for 100ms from the stop of variation of special symbol 1 variation display)
(External output information 8) Normal figure winning opening information (output for 100ms from the time when the right gate switch 46a detects passage of the game ball)
(External output information 9) Main prize ball information (outputs prize ball schedule signal)
(External output information 10) Security information (output when a specified error occurs)
In the external terminal management process (S1035), such external output information is created when necessary and stored in the serial communication output buffer as an external terminal signal.

((13) Solenoid management processing)
In the solenoid management process (S1036), the drive control data of the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 set in the normal electric accessory management process (S1030) and the big prize set in the special electric accessory management process (S1032) are used. Based on the drive control data for the mouth opening/closing solenoids 70, 71, a drive signal output process is performed for each solenoid 70, 71, 72. As a result, the opening/closing operations of the movable piece 39b of the special symbol 2 starting opening 39 and the opening/closing plates 44b, 45b of the big winning openings 44, 45 are realized.

((14) LED management processing)
In the LED management process (S1037), the LEDs 76a, 76b, 76c, 76d, 76e, 76f, 76g, 76h, 76i that make up the symbol display device 76 and the LEDs that make up the performance display LED 521 are managed to emit light using a dynamic lighting method. There is. The details are shown below.

When the LED management process (S1037) is started, the value of the port output counter is first incremented (+01H). Then, referring to the LED common output selection table, common data corresponding to the value of the port output counter is selected and stored in the serial communication output buffer.

Common information to be output is set in the LED output selection table, specifically, first common information that specifies the special symbol 1 variable display LED 76a (total of 8 pieces) of the symbol display device 76, and symbol display Second common information specifying the special symbol 2 variable display LED 76b (total of 8 pieces) of the device 76, special symbol 1 memory display LED 76c of the symbol display device 76, special symbol 2 memory display LED 76d, normal symbol memory display Third common information that specifies the LED 76f, status display LEDs 76i, 76j (total of 8 pieces), and the symbol display device 76's normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e, right-hand hit display LED 76g, and round display LED 76h (total of 8 pieces). 4th common information to specify, 5th common information to specify the LED of 7-segment display 1 (total 8 pieces) among the plurality of 7-segment indicators of the performance display LED 521, and a plurality of 7-segment displays of the performance display LED 521. 6th common information that specifies the LEDs of 7-segment display 2 (total of 8) among the performance display LEDs 521, and the LEDs of 7-segment display 3 of the multiple 7-segment displays of performance display LED 521 (total of 8) and eighth common information that specifies the LEDs (eight in total) of the 7-segment display 4 among the plurality of 7-segment displays of the performance display LED 521.

Furthermore, the LED output selection table is configured such that the first common information to the eighth common information can be divided into four common data and selected, and specifically, the first common information and the fifth common information can be selected. First common data to specify, second common data to specify second common information and sixth common information, third common data to specify third common information and seventh common information, and fourth common information. It is possible to select either of the fourth common data specifying the common information and the eighth common information. For example, if the common data selected this time is the first common data, the special symbol 1 variation display LED 76a of the symbol display device 76 (total of 8 pieces) and the plurality of 7-segment displays of the performance display LED 521. Of these, the LEDs (8 in total) of the 7-segment display 1 are to be controlled.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that the first common data to the fourth common data are selected cyclically according to the value of the port output counter that is updated every time the LED management process (S1037) is executed. (1st common data → 2nd common data → 3rd common data → 4th common data → 1st common data → 2nd common data →...), and as a result, a predetermined cycle (timer interrupt processing (S1024 to The common data to be output is switched every 4 ms period when S045) is executed, thereby realizing dynamic lighting at a predetermined period (4 ms period).

When the common data is completely stored in the serial communication output buffer, next, lighting data is selected and stored in the serial communication output buffer. When selecting lighting data, the LED output selection lighting table is referred to again, and lighting data corresponding to the previously selected common data is selected.

In addition to common data, lighting data to be output is set in the LED output selection table. Two types of lighting data are set for each type of common data, and specifically, 1-1 lighting data and 1-2 lighting data corresponding to the 1st common data, and 2nd common data. 2-1 lighting data and 2-2 lighting data corresponding to the data, 3-1 lighting data and 3-2 lighting data corresponding to the 3rd common data, and 4th lighting data corresponding to the 4th common data. -1 lighting data and 4-2nd lighting data are set. For example, if the currently selected common data is the first common data, one of the 1-1st lighting data and the 1-2nd lighting data will be selected.

In this embodiment, each time the LED management process (S1037) is executed, the first lighting data table (1-1 lighting data, 2-1 lighting data, , 3-1st lighting data, 4-1st lighting data) to select the lighting data corresponding to the currently selected common data, and the second lighting data table (1-2nd lighting data, 2nd lighting data). -2 lighting data, 3-2 lighting data, 4-2 lighting data) to select the lighting data corresponding to the currently selected common data, and switch at a predetermined cycle (128ms cycle). It is configured. As a result, for example, by arranging lighting data in the first lighting data table and arranging turning off data in the second lighting data table, it is possible to realize a blinking display at a predetermined period (128 ms). There is.

In this way, when the storage of the common data and lighting data into the serial communication output buffer is completed, the LED management process (S1037) is ended.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, all the lighting data set in the LED output selection table are data related to LEDs 76a, 76b, 76c, 76d, 76e, 76f, 76g, 76h, and 76i that constitute the symbol display device 76. , and no data regarding the LEDs constituting the performance display LED 521 is set. Therefore, the lighting data stored in the serial communication output buffer in the LED management process (S1037) is all data related to the LEDs 76a, 76b, 76c, 76d, 76e, 76f, 76g, 76h, and 76i that configure the symbol display device 76. Therefore, data regarding the LEDs forming the performance display LED 521 is not selected here. The data regarding the LEDs constituting the performance display LED 521 is selected in the out-of-area program after the LED management process (S1037) is completed, and is configured to be stored in the serial communication output buffer. In the LED management process (S1037), by selecting common data (any of the 1st common data to 4th common data), multiple 7-segment indicators (7-segment indicators 1 to 7 segments) of the performance display LED 521 are selected. Among the display devices 4), only the 7-segment display device to be controlled this time is selected.

((15) Area migration processing & timer interrupt outside area processing)
In the area migration process (S1038 to S1042), first, all registers are saved to the stack area, and a table pointer register, which is a reference address for specifying the used area RWM area, is saved to the stack area (S1038 to S1039). Thereafter, the timer interrupt outside-area processing (S1040) placed in the out-of-area program is called and executed.

In the timer interrupt internal and external processing (S1040), display processing for displaying the base value on the performance display LED 521, processing for creating and outputting a sight test signal, and the like are performed. After the timer interrupt internal and external processing (S1040) is executed, the table pointer register is restored and all registers are restored (S1040 to S1041), and the process moves to the next process.

(Timer interrupt outside area processing)
Here, the timer interrupt internal and external processing (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. 2-5. FIG. 2-5 shows a flowchart of timer interrupt internal and external processing (S1040). The timer interrupt internal and external processing (S1040) is called and executed during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (S1024 to S1045).

When the timer interrupt internal and external processing (S1040) is called, first the stack pointer in the used area is saved and the stack pointer outside the used area is set (S1050).

Next, performance display LED display content update processing (S1051) is executed. Through this performance display LED display content update process (S1051), the performance display LED 521 displays an operation confirmation display (all flashes) that repeats all lights on and all flashes for a predetermined time (approximately 5 seconds), multiple types of base values (real-time base value , the first cumulative base value, the second cumulative base value, and the third cumulative base value) are cyclically switched and displayed in a predetermined order.

Here, when executing the operation check display, the operation check display timer is referred to. The operation confirmation display timer stores the execution time of the operation confirmation display. In the performance display LED display content update process (S1051), display control is performed by switching between an all-on display pattern and an all-off display pattern at predetermined time intervals until the value of the operation check display timer reaches a predetermined value (0). There is. Thereby, an operation confirmation display by the performance display LED 521 is realized.

Furthermore, when displaying the base value, the ratio buffer of RWM outside the used area is referred to. The calculated base value is stored in the ratio buffer. In the performance display LED display content update process (S1051), a lighting display pattern corresponding to the value of the ratio buffer is selected from the lighting display pattern table to control the display of the base value. This allows the performance display LED 521 to display the base value.

Furthermore, when the value of the ratio buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (100), a specific display pattern ("99.") is selected as the lighting display pattern. This is because the number of digits of the base value that can be displayed by the performance display LED 521 is composed of two digits (two ratio segments).

In the performance display LED display content update process (S1051), the lighting pattern according to the operation confirmation display, the lighting pattern according to the value of the identification ratio buffer (base value), and the display content of the identification segment indicating the type of the base value ("bL .," "b1.," "b2.," and "b3."), and store the selected lighting patterns in the performance display output buffer. The lighting pattern stored in the performance display output buffer is stored in the serial communication output buffer in the out-of-use area LED update process (S1052), and is output in the timer interrupt process to display the selected lighting pattern on the performance display LED 521. A pattern will be displayed.

Next, an out-of-use area LED update process (S1052) is executed. In the out-of-use area LED update process (S1052), the lighting pattern stored in the performance display output buffer is stored in the serial communication output buffer. Performance display output buffers are provided as many as the number of 7-segment indicators that make up the performance display LED 521 (4), and are ports updated in the LED management process (S1037) in the timer interrupt process (S1024 to S1045). The performance display output buffer to be outputted this time is selected according to the value of the output counter. The performance display whose lighting pattern of the performance display output buffer selected here is targeted by the common data (any of the 1st common data to 4th common data) selected in the LED management process (S1037) The signal is configured to be output to a 7-segment display (any of 7-segment display 1 to 7-segment display 4) of the LED 521.

Next, normal state determination processing (S1053) is executed. In the normal state determination process (S1053), it is determined whether the current gaming state is a low probability low base state. Here, only when it is determined that it is a low probability low base state, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls (out switch 47a By configuring it to count the number of detections), the base value in the low probability low base state ((number of payouts in the low probability low base state ÷ number of outs in the low probability low base state) x 100) can be displayed. is possible.

Next, a test firing test signal update process (S1054) is executed. In the test firing test signal update process (S1054), a process is performed to output necessary information used in the type test of the gaming machine.

Finally, the stack pointer outside the used area is restored (S1055), and the timer interrupt outside area processing (S1040) is ended.

((16) Out command sending process)
In the out command transmission process (S1043), when the out switch 47a detects a game ball, an out command (CD71H) indicating the detection information of the out switch 47a is transmitted to the production control section 540. When the production control unit 540 receives the out command (CD71H), it adds up a counter for counting the number of outs. This measures the total number of outs. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to perform effects related to the number of outs or the detection of the out switch 47a.

((17) SPI communication start)
After the processes (1) to (16) in the timer interrupt process are performed, SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication is started (S1044). Here, processing is performed to output data stored in a serial communication output buffer for storing data for serial communication to an output port. The serial communication output buffer receives external output information in the external terminal management process (S1035), common data for the symbol display device 76 and performance display LED 521, and the LED 76a that constitutes the symbol display device 76 in the LED management process (S1037). Lighting data regarding the LEDs 76b, 76c, 76d, 76e, 76f, 76g, 76h, and 76i and lighting data regarding the LEDs forming the performance display LED 521 in the out-of-use area LED update process (S1052) are stored, respectively. In this way, this process is configured to output different types of serial data at the same timing.

In this way, by standardizing the output timing of serial data whose output targets are different, such as the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521, for example, the display timing of the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521 (the lighting of each LED Since the timings) are synchronized, it is possible to perform display control without causing any discomfort.

In addition, by standardizing the output timing of serial data not only for the symbol display device 76 and performance display LED 521 but also for external output information, the program capacity can be reduced rather than specifying programs related to output processing individually. It is possible.

((18) WDT clear processing)
At the end of the timer interrupt process, WDT clearing process is performed (S1045). With this, the timer interrupt processing (S1024 to S1045) is ended, and the main loop processing (S1017 to S1023) is executed until the next timer interrupt processing (S1024 to S1045) is started.

(Production control system settings)
FIG. 3-1 shows a flowchart of the system setting process executed by the production control unit 540 when the power is turned on. When the system setting process is started, the bus state controller is first set (S2000). The bus state controller functions based on the settings of the control register, and includes a production control CPU 540, various functional units (VDP circuit 541, motor circuit, RTC circuit), various ICs (moving object IC 530, audio IC 531), and various memory devices. (Control ROM 542, performance ROM 560, DRAM) communication operation is optimized. By initializing the bus state controller, access from the performance control CPU 540 becomes possible.

Subsequently, processing for waiting for activation of the VDP circuit 541 (S2001) is performed. The performance control CPU 540 obtains the value of a specific VDP register in which the device code of the VDP circuit 541 is stored, and determines whether the value is a normal value (device code). If it is a normal value, it is determined that the VDP circuit 541 can accept instructions from the production control CPU 540, and if it is not a normal value (the device code cannot be acquired normally), the VDP circuit 541 itself It is determined that the wear reset operation has not yet been completed, and this process is repeated until a normal value can be obtained.

If it is determined that the activation of the VDP circuit 541 has been completed, various bus settings are performed (S2002). Specifically, the setting of the data bus width when accessing the VDP circuit 541 from the performance control CPU 540 (set to 32 bits), various functional parts (VDP circuit 541, motor circuit, RTC circuit), various ICs (for movable parts), etc. Bus addresses are set to control the IC 530, audio IC 531) and various memory devices (control ROM 542, performance ROM 560, DRAM).

Next, the memory section is initialized (S2003). Among the programs and data stored in the control ROM 542 in advance, the interrupt processing program (S2029 to S2033), the main processing program (S2004), variables with initial values, constant data, etc. are stored in the external DRAM or the production control unit 540. Transfer to the built-in RWM. Thereby, it is possible to avoid accessing the ROM (control ROM 542), which is inferior in access speed, and to speed up the processing of the production control CPU.

In addition, when initializing this memory section (S2003), a DMAC circuit (Direct Memory Access Controller) is used that can realize data transfer without going through the performance control CPU. Thereby, the load on the performance control CPU can be reduced and the data transfer time can be shortened. Further, this DMAC circuit is configured to be usable not only for initializing the memory section (S2003) but also for transferring lamp data, sound data, motor data, and display lists. In this embodiment, the DMAC circuit is used when transferring the display list from the production control CPU to the preloader circuit (finally the VDP circuit), but the DMAC circuit is not limited to this, and the data is not limited to lamp data, sound data, etc. , it may also be configured to be used when transferring motor data.

The processes up to this point are realized by executing the initial setting program (S2000 to S2003) stored in the control ROM 542, and the main process (S2004) is called at the end of this initial setting program. This main processing (S2004) is a main processing program (S2004) transferred to the built-in RWM of the production control unit 540, and the subsequent processing is a main processing program (S2004) transferred from the built-in RWM of the production control unit 540. It is realized by being read and executed.

(Production control main processing)
FIG. 3-2 shows a flowchart of the production control main process. When the production control main processing (S2004) is started, hardware setup is first performed (S2005). As a result, the built-in circuits of the production control unit 540, such as various ICs (IC 530 for movable objects, IC 531 for audio), VDP circuit 541, WDT circuit, and interrupt controller that generates production control timer interrupt processing (S2029 to S2033), can be implemented using software. Initialize by processing. In addition, various schedulers (image scheduler, production scenario scheduler, sound scheduler, lamp scheduler, device scheduler) are initialized, and movable objects (middle button movable objects, side unit movable objects, board side movable objects (lower movable objects) 30a, a return operation of the upper movable member 30b) to the initial position (origin position) is performed.

Next, in order to permit the generation of production control timer interrupt processing (S2029 to S2033), a permission setting value is written in the interrupt permission register, and the interrupt permission state is set (S2006).

When the processing up to this point is completed, the production control loop processing (S2007 to S2028) will be repeatedly executed, and during this period, the production control timer interrupt processing (S2029 to S2033) will occur at every predetermined period (1 ms period). .

In this embodiment, the production control loop processing (S2007 to S2028) is configured to complete one cycle at a cycle of 33.3 ms. In the effect control loop processing (S2007 to S2028), the V blank signal of the image display means 31 that is generated every 16.6 ms is monitored, and in response to the V blank signal being generated twice, the V blank signal of the image display means 31 is It is designed so that the update cycle of one frame is 33.3 ms by updating the frame of image data to be displayed. In addition, in the production control loop processing (S2007 to S2028), various schedulers (image scheduler, production scenario scheduler, sound scheduler, lamp scheduler, device scheduler) are updated during this one frame update cycle period (33.3ms). By executing this, it is possible to update various schedulers in synchronization with the frame update cycle of image data.

The contents of this production control loop process (S2007 to S2028) will be described in detail below.

In the production control loop process (S2007 to S2028), first, a frame update flag determination process is performed (S2007). The frame update flag is a flag for determining whether processing necessary for frame update of image data of the image display means 31 has been executed. If it has been executed, it is determined to be ON and the process moves to S2016, but since it has not been executed at the start of the production control loop process (S2007 to S2028), in that case, it is determined to be OFF and the process moves to S2008.

If the frame update flag determination process (S2007) results in an OFF determination, a display list buffer initialization process (S2008) is performed. The display list buffer is a storage area provided in the RWM for storing created display lists. Here, the display list buffer is initialized in advance in preparation for storing the newly created display list. This is because the previously stored display list information may remain.

When the initialization of the display list buffer is completed, the frame buffer is set (S2009). The frame buffer is an area for temporarily storing image data to be displayed on the image display means 31 provided in the built-in VRAM. Image data will be drawn here. In this embodiment, a double buffer structure is adopted which is divided into a drawing area and a reading area, and a pair of frame buffers are used by alternately switching the purpose.

The setting performed here uses environment setting commands such as the SETDAVR command and the SETDAVF command to specify a drawing area for drawing the image data to be actually displayed on the image display means 31. Specifically, by setting the base point address to predetermined coordinates (0, 0), the data is used as valid drawing data starting from the beginning position of the frame buffer. This links the drawing area of the frame buffer and the effective display area of the display circuit.

When the frame buffer settings are completed, image scheduler execution processing (S2010) is performed next.

In the image scheduler execution process (S2010), the scenario timer of the image scheduler (not shown) is updated. The image scheduler manages the execution of moving image playback scenarios for a plurality of moving image data for each playback channel, and the scenario timer is a timer for managing the progress of each moving image playback scenario.

Here, after the end of this process, the frame update flag is set to the ON state in S2015, so that in the subsequent S2007, it is determined to be ON, and the process moves to S2016. Therefore, the subsequent production control loop processing (S2007 to S2028) is configured to avoid the processing of S2008 to S2015 including this processing (S2010). The processes of S2008 to S2015 are executed again when the frame update flag is set to the OFF state in S2028. That is, in the production control loop process (S2007 to S2028) configured to complete one cycle in 33.3 ms, S2008 to S2015 including this process (S2010) are each executed only once.

Since the scenario timer is updated once (once every 33.3 ms) each time this process (S2010) is executed, each video playback scenario is configured to proceed at a cycle of 33.3 ms. In this way, the scenario timer is configured to update according to the update cycle of one frame (33.3 ms).

The video playback scenario registered in the image scheduler includes information about video data in frame units, and according to the update of the scenario timer, the video playback scenario for one frame to be drawn this time is Information regarding moving image data is acquired. In this way, in accordance with the update of the scenario timer, information regarding the moving image data based on the moving image playback scenario is sequentially acquired for each frame, so that the image display means 31 finally displays a series of images based on the moving image playback scenario. The moving image will be displayed.

Then, a display list creation process is performed based on the information of one frame of moving image data acquired here (S2011).

The display list specifies the image data that the display circuit should output to the image display means 31. More specifically, the display list specifies the image data that the display circuit should output to the image display means 31. configured. The series of instruction commands include commands to read and decode image data from the performance ROM 560 (CGROM), commands to specify the area of VRAM to be decoded, and instructions to place the decoded image data in the frame buffer. This includes commands for instructing the VDP circuit 541 to perform drawing operations, such as commands for instructing the VDP circuit 541 to perform drawing operations.

When creating a display list in S2011, the above-mentioned instruction commands are listed in an appropriate order, and in order to specify the image data to be read from the production ROM 560 (CGROM), in the image scheduler execution process (S2010) Information regarding one frame of video data of each acquired video playback scenario is referenced. The display list is then completed by listing a series of instruction commands in the display list buffer.

Further, the display list is created by adjusting the data size so that it is always 256 bytes. This is to accommodate the data transfer size when transferring the display list to the VDP circuit 541, thereby increasing transfer efficiency. The NOP (no operation) command is used to adjust the data size, and by filling the missing area (unused area) in the display list buffer with the NOP command, the data size of the display list is kept constant (256 bytes) each time. I am adjusting it so that it is.

When the display list is completed, lamp data creation processing (S2012) is performed next. The lamp data created here is lighting data to be sent to the LED driver that actually drives each of the LEDs 63a and 64a, based on lamp scenario information registered in a lamp scheduler to be described later. By the way, the lamp data created here includes lighting information (including lighting color and brightness information) and lights-off information, and not only lighting information of the LEDs to be turned on, but also lighting information of the LEDs to be turned off. Create. In other words, here lamp data for all LEDs is created and stored in the lamp data buffer. The lamp data stored in the lamp data buffer is output to each LED driver in lamp data transmission processing (S2027), which will be described later.

When the lamp data creation process (S2012) is completed, preloading of the display list is started (S2013). Here, by transferring the completed display list to the display list buffer to the preloader circuit, the preload operation is executed by the preloader circuit. When the preload operation is executed, the image data listed in the display list is transferred from the production control ROM 560 (CGROM) to the DRAM prior to the actual drawing operation (drawing to the frame buffer by the VDP circuit 541). Read out. As a result, the image data (compressed CG data) necessary for drawing is read in advance to the DRAM, which has a faster access speed than the performance control ROM 560 (CGROM), which is a NAND flash memory, and the VDP circuit 541 It is now possible to improve the processing speed when drawing image data to the frame buffer. Therefore, the drawing speed is improved compared to the case where the VDP circuit 541 directly acquires image data from the effect control ROM 560 (CGROM) without performing a preload operation.

In addition, when the image data written in the display list is read from the performance control ROM 560 (CGROM) to the DRAM, the preloader circuit rewrites the display list in which the reference destination of the image data is rewritten to the address on the DRAM that is the transfer destination. is issued to the VDP circuit 560. As a result, when the VDP circuit 560 executes drawing to the frame buffer, the contents of the rewritten display list are referred to, and the image data necessary for drawing is acquired from the DRAM.

After starting the display list preload process, the scheduler update flag is set to the OFF state (S2014). The scheduler update flag is a flag for determining whether or not the production scenario scheduler execution process (S2021), the sound scheduler execution process (S2022), and the ramp scheduler execution process (S2023), which will be described later, have been executed. Since it has not yet been executed, it is set to the OFF state.

Incidentally, when the scheduler update flag is set to the ON state in S2020, the subsequent production control loop processing (S2007 to S2028) is configured to avoid the processing in S2020 to S2023. In this way, by switching the scheduler update flag, the processes of S2020 to S2023 are each executed only once in one performance control loop process (S2007 to S2028). As a result, each scenario of each scheduler updated in S2021 to S2023 is configured to proceed in synchronization with the update cycle of one frame (33.3 ms).

Next, the frame update flag is set to the ON state (S2015), and the process returns to the frame update flag determination process (S2007). Since the frame update flag is set to the ON state in S2015, the next frame update flag determination process (S2007) results in an ON determination, and the process moves to S2016. Therefore, in the subsequent effect control loop processing (S2007 to S2028), the processing of S2008 to S2015 will be avoided until the frame update flag is set to the OFF state in S2028.

In S2016, it is determined whether the frame processing elapsed time has elapsed for 26 ms or more. The frame processing elapsed time is the elapsed time since the image of the current frame (first frame) was displayed on the image display means 31, and the second V A blank signal is generated and the image is updated to the next frame (second frame).

Here, if the frame processing elapsed time is less than 26 ms, it is determined in S2017 whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 520, and if there is a received command, the command analysis process ( S2018) is performed. In this embodiment, if it is determined in S2024 that the second V blank signal has not been generated, the process returns to S2016. Therefore, the configuration is such that the repeated command analysis process (S2018) can be executed until the frame processing elapsed time exceeds 26 ms. This means that if the elapsed frame processing time is less than 26 ms, there is still grace time until the second V blank signal is generated (until 33.3 ms elapse), which is sufficient to perform command analysis processing (S2018). This is because there is still considerable processing time left.

On the other hand, if the elapsed frame processing time is 26 ms or more, the process moves to S2024, where it is determined whether or not a second V blank signal has been generated. Regardless, the command analysis process (S2018) is not performed. Considering the processing time required for command analysis processing (S2018), if you perform command analysis processing (S2018) in a situation where the elapsed frame processing time has already passed 26ms or more, the elapsed frame processing time will be 33.3ms. This is because there is a risk that the frame delay may be exceeded and a frame delay may occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such a frame delay from occurring, a certain time limit is set, and if the elapsed frame processing time is 26 ms or more, the second V blank signal is not generated. It is configured to only monitor (S2024).

Next, the contents of S2017 and S2018 will be explained. In S2017, it is determined whether or not an unread performance control command is stored in the command reception buffer for storing the performance control command transmitted from the main control unit 520. If there is an unread production control command, the process moves to command analysis processing (S2018).

In the command analysis process (S2018), the production control command transmitted from the main control unit 520 is analyzed, and processing according to the type of command is executed. Production control commands include power-on command 1, power-on command 2, chip code, setting change start command, RWM error command, initialize command, RWM clear command, setting confirmation start command, backup return command, power off command 1. , power off command 2, main board error command switch pass command, over winning command, special symbol pending addition command, special symbol pending subtraction command, special symbol variation pattern command, symbol designation command, symbol stop command, jackpot start command, big prize There are mouth opening commands, big winning opening winning commands, interval between rounds commands, jackpot end commands, small winning start commands, small winning ending commands, error notification commands, error release commands, out commands, etc., and processes corresponding to the received commands. Execute.

For example, when a special symbol variation pattern command or a symbol designation command is received, a process for performing a decorative symbol variation game in which a plurality of ornamental symbols 100, 101, and 102 are displayed in a variable manner is executed. Specifically, a preview lottery process is performed to select a preview performance (pseudo continuous preview, step-up notice, background change notice, etc.) to be executed in the decorative symbol variation game, and a production scenario is selected according to the result of the preview lottery process. is set in the production scenario scheduler. By registering the performance scenario in the performance scenario scheduler, the performance scenario progresses in the performance scenario scheduler execution process (S2021) described later, and as a result, various performances (images, sounds, lamps, motors) will be executed.

After completing the command analysis process (S2018), a scheduler update flag determination process is performed (S2019). As mentioned above, the scheduler update flag is a flag for determining whether or not the production scenario scheduler execution process (S2021), the sound scheduler execution process (S2022), and the ramp scheduler execution process (S2023) have been executed. In this case, since the process has not yet been executed, it is determined that the process is in the OFF state, and the process moves to S2020.

In S2020, in the subsequent processing, the production scenario scheduler execution process (S2021), the sound scheduler execution process (S2022), and the ramp scheduler execution process (S2023) are executed, so the scheduler update flag is set to the ON state in advance. Set. Here, by setting the scheduler update flag to the ON state, when the scheduler update flag determination process (S2019) is performed next, the production scenario scheduler execution process (S2021), the sound scheduler execution process (S2022), it is determined that the ramp scheduler execution process (S2023) has been executed, and execution of these processes is avoided. The scheduler update flag is maintained in the ON state until the frame processing elapsed time (33.3 ms) has elapsed and is set to the OFF state in S2014 of the next production control loop process, so the production scenario scheduler execution process ( S2021), sound scheduler execution processing (S2022), and ramp scheduler execution processing (S2023) are performed only once in one performance control loop processing (S2007 to S2028), in other words, every 1 frame (33.3ms). It is configured to be executed only once. This allows various scenarios to proceed according to frame updates.

In the performance scenario scheduler execution process (S2021), the scenario timer of the performance scenario scheduler (not shown) is updated. The performance scenario scheduler manages the execution of a plurality of performance scenarios for each channel, and the scenario timer is a timer for managing the progress of each performance scenario.

Since the scenario timer is updated once every time this process is executed (once every 33.3 ms), each performance scenario is configured to proceed at a cycle of 33.3 ms. In this way, the scenario timer is configured to update according to the update cycle of one frame (33.3 ms).

A plurality of scenario functions or a single scenario function defined in chronological order are set in the production scenario. In the performance scenario scheduler execution process (S2021), the performance scenario is advanced in accordance with the update of the scenario timer, thereby executing processing according to the contents of the scenario functions defined in chronological order.

The scenario functions include a moving image function related to moving image playback, a sound function related to audio playback, a lamp function related to lamp driving, and a device function related to motor driving. The video function contains scenario information about the video data to be played, the sound function contains scenario information about the sound data to be played, the lamp function contains scenario information about the lamp pattern to be executed, and the device function contains scenario information about the lamp pattern to be executed. Scenario information of each drive pattern to be performed is included.

When the moving image function is executed, scenario information of the specified moving image data is registered in an empty playback channel of the image scheduler. Similarly, when a sound function is executed, the scenario information of the specified sound data is registered to an empty channel of the sound scheduler, and when a ramp function is executed, the scenario information of the specified ramp pattern is registered. is registered in the free channel of the lamp scheduler, and when the device function is executed, scenario information of the specified drive pattern is registered in the free channel of the device scheduler. In this way, scenario information (execution details) is registered in each scheduler according to the type of function to be executed, so that the execution details are processed according to the progress of each scheduler's scenario. There is.

When the production scenario scheduler execution process (S2021) is completed, the sound scheduler execution process (S2022) is then performed.
In the sound scheduler execution process, the scenario timer of the sound scheduler (not shown) is updated. The sound scheduler manages the execution of a plurality of audio scenarios for each channel, and the scenario timer is a timer for managing the progress of each audio scenario.

Since the scenario timer is updated once every time this process is executed (once every 33.3 ms), each audio scenario is configured to proceed at a cycle of 33.3 ms. In this way, the scenario timer is configured to update according to the update cycle of one frame (33.3 ms).

In the audio scenario, a plurality of audio reproduction functions or a single audio reproduction function defined in chronological order are set. In the sound scheduler execution process (S2022), the audio scenario is advanced in accordance with the update of the scenario timer, thereby executing processing according to the content of the audio reproduction function defined in chronological order.

The audio playback function includes playback information for playing specified sound data, fade information for executing fade processing, and the like. The playback information also includes various information such as whether loop playback is to be performed for the specified sound data, the amount of output transition, and stereo playback/monaural playback. When the audio playback function is executed, specified playback information, fade information, etc. are registered in the audio playback channel. The information registered in the audio playback channel is processed in the sound update process (S2032) described later, and based on the information on the registered audio playback channel, instruction information for realizing audio playback is sent to the audio IC 531. Sending processing is executed.

When the sound scheduler execution process (S2022) is completed, the lamp scheduler execution process (S2023) is performed next. In the ramp scheduler execution process, a scenario timer of a ramp scheduler (not shown) is updated. The ramp scheduler manages the execution of a plurality of ramp scenarios for each channel, and the scenario timer is a timer for managing the progress of each ramp scenario.

Since the scenario timer is updated once every time this process is executed (once every 33.3 ms), each lamp scenario is configured to proceed at a cycle of 33.3 ms. In this way, the scenario timer is configured to update according to the update cycle of one frame (33.3 ms).

A plurality of lamp driving functions or a single lamp driving function defined in chronological order are set in the lamp scenario. In the lamp scheduler execution process (S2023), the lamp scenario is advanced in accordance with the update of the scenario timer, thereby executing the process according to the contents of the lamp drive functions defined in chronological order.

The lamp drive function includes lighting pattern information for determining the lighting mode of each LED 63a, 64a mounted on the panel side or the frame side. The lighting pattern information includes, for example, an all-off pattern in which all LEDs are turned off, a flashing pattern in which a specific LED blinks in white, and a specific LED in a rainbow color that transitions from side to side (or up and down). It includes various patterns such as gradation lighting patterns. When the lamp drive function is executed, the specified lighting pattern information is registered in the lamp reproduction channel. The information registered in the lamp reproduction channel is used in the lamp data creation process (S2012), and is sent to the LED driver that actually drives each LED 63a, 64a based on the registered lamp reproduction channel information. lighting data is created.

When the ramp scheduler execution process (S2023) is completed, a V blank signal determination process (S2024) is performed next. Here, if it is determined that the second V blank signal has not yet been generated, the process returns to S2016. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second V blank signal is generated, the process moves to S2025. In this embodiment, the frame update of the image display means 31 is executed when the generation of the V blank signal is determined twice (the V blank signal is generated every 16.6 ms). , the frame update unit of the image display means 31 is designed to be 33.3 ms. Therefore, until the generation of the V blank signal is determined twice, the frame update timing (when 33.3 ms has elapsed) has not yet been reached, so the process returns to S2016, and until the elapsed frame processing time has passed 26 ms or more, S2017 It is configured to repeatedly execute the processes from S2019 to S2019.

If it is determined in the V blank signal determination process (S2024) that a second V blank signal is generated, frame buffer switching process is executed (S2025).

Here, by switching between the drawing area frame buffer and the reading area frame buffer, the frame buffer to be read by the display circuit (=reading area frame buffer) is changed. As a result, the contents of the moving image data displayed on the image display means 31 are updated. In this way, the frame buffer switching process is performed every time one performance control loop process (S2007 to S2028) is executed, so the cycle of one performance control loop process (S2007 to S2028) is 33.3ms. ), the frame of the image display means 31 will be updated.

In addition, the image data completed by the VDP circuit 541 in the previous production control loop processing (S2007 to S2028) is stored in the drawing area frame buffer, and the image data completed by the VDP circuit 541 in the current production control loop processing (S2007 to S2028) is stored in the drawing area frame buffer. By switching from the drawing area frame buffer to the reading area frame buffer, the contents of the image data are outputted to the image display means 31 by the display circuit.

On the other hand, the reading area frame buffer is switched to the drawing area frame buffer, and in the next step S2026, the VDP circuit 541 performs drawing processing based on the contents of the preloaded display list. . Here, the image data drawn in the drawing area frame buffer by the VDP circuit 541 is switched to the reading area frame buffer in the next production control loop process (S2007 to S2028), so that the content of the image data is changed. The display circuit outputs the image to the image display means 31.

As described above, by toggling between the drawing area frame buffer and the reading area frame buffer, display control using the double buffer structure is realized.

When the frame buffer switching process (S2025) is completed, drawing based on the preloaded display list is started (S2026).
In this example, since the preload function is used, the display list created in S2011 is transferred to the DRAM by the preload circuit in S2013, and the reference destination of the image data written in the display list is used for production control. A rewritten display list is constructed by rewriting addresses from the ROM 542 (CGROM) to the DRAM.

Therefore, in this process, the rewritten display list, which is a preloaded display list, is referred to, and the VDP circuit 541 executes drawing in the drawing area frame buffer. Note that during this drawing operation, the VDP circuit 541 accesses the image data storage area on the DRAM without accessing the performance control ROM 542 (CGROM), so it is possible to quickly complete a series of drawing operations. It becomes.

In S2026, a drawing instruction is given to the VDP circuit 541 to start drawing processing, and then lamp data transmission processing is performed (S2027). Here, a process is executed to transmit the lamp data stored in the lamp data buffer in the lamp data creation process of S2012 to each LED driver that is an output destination. Thereby, each LED 63a, 64a is driven in a manner based on the contents of the lamp data. Furthermore, by being designed so that this process is executed without delay after the frame buffer switching process (S2025) is executed, the frame update timing of the image display means 31 and the driving mode of each LED 63a, 64a can be adjusted. It is possible to synchronize the change timing of the change as much as possible. This makes it possible to perform image effects and lamp effects with a more unified feeling.

When the lamp data transmission process (S2027) is completed, the frame update flag is finally set to the OFF state (S2028), and the process returns to the frame update flag determination process (S2007). With this, the current production control loop process (S2007 to S2028) is completed, and the next production control loop process (S2007 to S2028) is started.

(Production control timer interrupt processing)
When the interrupt permission state is set in S2006 of the production control main process, thereafter, production control timer interrupt processing (S2029 to S2033) occurs every predetermined period (1 ms period). Therefore, when the interrupt timing comes during execution of the production control loop process (S2007 to S2028), the production control timer interrupt process (S2029 to S2033) shown in FIG. 3-3 is executed.

When the production control timer interrupt process (S2029 to S2033) occurs, first, the device scheduler update process (S2029) is performed. In the device scheduler execution process, the scenario timer of the device scheduler (not shown) is updated. The device scheduler manages the execution of a plurality of device scenarios for each channel, and the scenario timer is a timer for managing the progress of each audio scenario.

Since the scenario timer is updated once every time this process is executed (once every 1 ms), each device scenario is configured to progress at a 1 ms cycle. In this way, the scenario timer is configured to be updated according to the execution cycle (1 ms) of the production control timer interrupt processing (S2029 to S2033).

A device scenario has a plurality of device driving functions defined in chronological order or a single device driving function. In the device scheduler execution process (S2029), the device scenario is advanced according to the update of the scenario timer, thereby executing the process according to the contents of the device driving functions defined in chronological order.

The device drive function includes drive pattern information for determining the drive mode of various motors (blower device 11a, middle push button movable part motor 14d, side unit movable part motor 22c, panel side movable part motor 30, etc.). There is. The drive pattern information includes information on the number of output pulses of the output clock that defines the rotation angle of the motor, acceleration rate information for acceleration control, deceleration rate information for deceleration control, start/end speed information, and target speed information. Contains operating parameters such as

When the device drive function is executed, the specified drive pattern information is stored in the movable pattern transmission buffer. The drive pattern information stored in the movable pattern transmission buffer is used to actually drive various motors (blower device 11a, middle push button movable part motor 14d, side unit movable part motor 22c, panel side movable part motor 22c, etc.) in the motor data transmission process (S2031) described later. The information is transmitted to the movable object IC 530 that controls the drive of the animal motor 30, etc.).

When the device scheduler update process (S2029) ends, sensor data update process (S2030) is performed next. Here, the sensor signal of the middle push button position detection switch 14c, the sensor signal of the side unit position detection switch 22d, and the sensor signal of the panel side movable object position detection switch 77 are acquired. The performance control unit 540 stores the sensor signal acquired here and utilizes it for subsequent device scenario management and motor performance. However, the movable object IC 530 is configured to be able to grasp the information of each of these sensor signals, and since the movable object IC 530 can realize a motor effect according to the information of the sensor signal, the effect control section 31 There is no particular need to understand the sensor signal, and this process can be omitted.

When the sensor data update process (S2030) is completed, a motor data transmission process (S2031) is performed next. Here, the drive pattern information stored in the movable pattern transmission buffer is transmitted to the movable object IC 530.

When the movable part IC 530 receives drive pattern information, drive control of various motors (blower device 11a, middle push button movable part motor 14d, side unit movable part motor 22c, panel side movable part motor 30, etc.) is performed according to the received content. Realized. In this way, regarding drive control of various motors (blower device 11a, middle push button movable part motor 14d, side unit movable part motor 22c, board side movable part motor 30, etc.), the production control unit 540 uses designated drive pattern information. It is sufficient to transmit the information to the movable object IC 530, and direct drive control by the effect control section 540 is not required. In this embodiment, by utilizing the movable object IC 530, various motors (blower device 11a, middle push button movable object motor 14d, side unit movable object motor 22c, panel side This realizes drive control of movable object motors 30, etc.).

When the motor data transmission process (S2031) is completed, a sound update process (S2032) is performed next. Here, in the sound scheduler execution process (S2022), audio output data to be transmitted to the audio IC 531 is created based on information (playback information, fade information, etc.) registered in the audio playback channel. When the audio IC 531 receives the audio output data, it acquires audio data to be output from the audio ROM 532 based on the audio output data, and performs output processing at a predetermined volume and output mode. In this way, by utilizing the audio IC 531, the audio performance by the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, and 19d is realized without increasing the control burden on the performance control section 540.

By the way, fade processing based on fade information is realized by the production control unit 31 instead of the audio IC 531, and in the sound update process (S2032), the output volume is adjusted based on the fade information registered in the audio playback channel. A fade process is executed to change the output volume in stages (every 1 frame (33.3 ms)), and the determined output volume is sent to the audio IC 531 as audio output data in stages (every 1 frame (33.3 ms)). Fading processing is achieved by transmitting as .

When the sound update process (S2032) is completed, the key input process (S2033) is finally performed. Here, the input signal of the middle press button detection switch 14b, the input signal of the volume/light level button detection switches 16c, 16d, 17c, 17d, the input signal of the touch device 22b, the input signal of the cross button detection switch 49a, 49b, 49c, 49d is being obtained. The performance control unit 540 stores the input signal acquired here, and utilizes it for progress management of the subsequent performance scenario and operation performance. Specifically, when an input signal of the volume/light intensity button detection switch 16c, 16d, 17c, or 17d is detected during a period in which the volume/light intensity adjustment is possible, an effect is displayed to display the setting information of the volume/light intensity. A scenario is set. Furthermore, when an input signal from the middle press button detection switch 14b is detected during the valid period of the middle press button operation, an effect scenario is set for executing the post-operation effect associated with the operation of the middle press button.

Next, the control flow (Embodiment 1-1) of the main control unit 520 equipped with a safety device, which is a characteristic part of the present invention, will be described in detail using FIGS. 4-1-1 to 4-1-7. . Furthermore, the configuration may be a combination of the descriptions regarding the embodiments described above and the descriptions regarding the embodiments described later. In this way, the contents of each embodiment are not limited to individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments. Furthermore, in order to avoid redundant descriptions of the same contents as those described above, explanations will basically be omitted.

(Safety device)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, when the difference between the number of prize balls (≒number of paid out game balls) and the number of outs (≒number of game balls fired) becomes a predetermined number (≒number of game balls acquired by the player), Provided that the conditions are met (not in a jackpot game or small win game, not in a round game, etc.), subsequent games (special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol 2 variation display, normal symbol variation display, It is equipped with a safety device to stop/cancel jackpot games, small win games, etc.).

This safety device is realized by a program of the main control unit 520, and the main control unit 520 measures the difference between the number of prize balls and the number of outs, and when the number of prize balls exceeds the number of outs by a predetermined number (excessive number of prize balls). If it is determined that this is the case, the system is configured so as not to execute part of the game processing in the timer interrupt processing (S1024 to S1045), thereby preventing the game from being controlled to a game stop state in which no further games are played. It is a feature. In the game stop state, no further games are played, so once the game stops, no prize balls or outs will occur thereafter. In this way, the gaming machine 1 equipped with a safety device has a function that limits the gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 by setting a certain reference value for the number of pieces to be paid out. It is provided.

Here, the number of prize balls to be counted by the safety device is the various winning holes (special symbol 1 starting hole 38, special symbol 2 starting hole 39, upper left winning hole 40, middle left winning hole 41, lower left winning hole 42, It is the total number of game balls that are paid out as prize balls when winning a prize (right prize opening 43, upper university prize opening 44, lower university prize opening 45), and the number of outs is the total number of game balls fired into the gaming area 8a. The number of balls detected by the out switch 47a when the game balls pass through the out port 47 and the winning ports 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, and 45 and are finally ejected (≒ the number of balls in the game area 8a) (number of game balls fired).

Further, the measurement result of the difference between the number of prize balls and the number of outs is stored in a difference ball counter provided in the RWM area of the main control unit 520, and when it is determined that this difference ball counter has reached a predetermined value, The safety device is activated (functions) and the game is controlled to be stopped. This difference ball counter is configured to be initialized without fail when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. This is to make it easier to measure and manage the difference in the number of balls per day in the hall business (in the hall business, the power is turned on only once when the hall opens).

(Main control system processing_safety device 1)
FIG. 4-1-1 shows a flowchart of system processing (after execution of S1000 to S1014) executed by the main control unit 520 equipped with a safety device. Note that the processing in S1015 to S1016 and S1017 to S1023 is the same as the description based on FIG. 2-3 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

When the processing from S1015 to S1016 in FIG. 4-1-1 is completed, all registers are saved to the stack area, and the table pointer register, which is the reference address for specifying the RWM area to be used, is saved to the stack area. (S1501-S1502). Thereafter, the out-of-area game start setting process (S1503) arranged in the out-of-area program is called and executed. After executing the out-of-area game start setting process (S1503), the table pointer register is restored and all registers are restored (S1504 to S1505).

When the processing up to this point is completed, the process moves to the main loop processing (S1017 to S1023).

(Outside area game start setting process_safety device 1)
Here, the out-of-area game start setting process (S1503) will be explained with reference to FIG. 4-1-2. FIG. 4-1-2 shows a flowchart of the out-of-area game start setting process (S1503). When the out-of-area game start setting process (S1503) is called, first the stack pointer in the used area is saved, and the stack pointer outside the used area is set (S1506).

Next, an initial value is set in the difference ball counter (S1507). The difference ball counter is provided in the outside RWM area of the main control unit 520, and the initialization and updating of the difference ball counter is performed in the outside use area program. Here, the initial value (95000) is set to the difference ball counter. The difference ball counter has game balls placed in various winning holes (special symbol 1 starting hole 38, special symbol 2 starting hole 39, upper left winning hole 40, middle left winning hole 41, lower left winning hole 42, right winning hole 43, upper large winning hole) When a prize ball is generated by entering the winning hole 44 or lower large winning hole 45), a value corresponding to the number of prize balls generated is subtracted. In addition, when the game ball passes through the out port 47 and the winning ports 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, and 45 and is finally ejected, it is detected by the out switch 47a, It is configured such that a value corresponding to the number of outs (1 out = 1) is added. Therefore, each time a prize ball or an out occurs, subtraction processing or addition processing is performed on the initial value (95000) set in the difference ball counter here.

Here, in this embodiment, the safety device is configured to be activated when it is determined that the difference ball counter has reached a predetermined value (0). In other words, when it is determined that the number of prize balls occurring (subtraction number) exceeds the number of out occurrences (addition number), and as a result of repeating the subtraction process multiple times, the value of the difference ball counter has reached the predetermined value (0). Then, various processes related to the occurrence of the safety device will be executed.

Incidentally, the initial value of the difference ball counter is set to "95000", but this is not the maximum value of the difference ball counter. Therefore, if outs occur frequently and the addition process is repeated multiple times, the value of the difference ball counter may exceed the initial value (95000). In other words, the number of prize balls that a player can acquire before the safety device is activated is not limited to 95,000 shots according to the initial value (95,000), but if the value of the difference ball counter exceeds the initial value (95,000). The configuration is such that if the player wins, he or she can win 95,000 or more prize balls.

In this way, in this embodiment, the initial value set to the difference ball counter is set to a value that is not the maximum value of the difference ball counter, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the maximum value may be set. Good too. As a result, the player cannot obtain a prize ball number greater than the value set as the initial value, so it becomes possible to easily manage the number of balls to be paid out to the player. For example, if the maximum predetermined value (95000) is set as the initial value (95000 is treated as the maximum value), while the value of the difference ball counter is the maximum predetermined value (95000), Even if an out occurs, addition processing of the difference ball counter is not executed. As a result, it is possible to configure the system so that the number of prize balls exceeding the predetermined value (95,000) set as the initial value will not be paid out.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the maximum predetermined value (95000) is set as the initial value, if the value of the difference ball counter reaches the predetermined maximum value (95000), it is assumed that an out has occurred. It may also be configured such that the addition process of the difference ball counter is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to configure such that the number of prize balls that exceeds the predetermined value (95,000) set as the maximum value is not paid out.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the difference ball counter is always initialized (set to an initial value) when the gaming machine 1 is powered on; however, this is not limited to this, and only when a predetermined condition is met The difference ball counter may be initialized (set to an initial value). For example, the configuration is such that the difference ball counter is initialized (set to an initial value) when the power is turned on only when the value of the difference ball counter is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 95000, which is set as the initial value). It's okay. Further, it may be configured such that the difference ball counter is initialized (set to an initial value) when the power is turned on only when the difference ball counter has reached a predetermined value (0). In addition, the configuration is such that the difference ball counter is initialized (set to an initial value) when the power is turned on only when the difference ball counter has a value greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 95000 set as an initial value). It's okay. In this way, by setting the conditions for initializing the difference ball counter (setting the initial value), the safety device can be activated (until it reaches a predetermined value (0)) according to the current value of the difference ball counter. It is now possible to set a reference value for the number of balls, and the conditions for activating the safety device can be varied depending on the number of balls.

When the process of S1507 is completed, the stack pointer outside the used area is finally returned (S1508), and the out-of-area game start setting process (S1503) is ended.

(Timer interrupt processing_safety device 1)
In the main control unit 520 equipped with a safety device, when an interrupt timing arrives during execution of main loop processing (S1017 to S1023), timer interrupt processing (S1024 to S1045, S1509 to S1512) shown in FIG. 4-1-3 is performed. is executed. Note that the processing in S1024 to S1039 and S1041 to S1045 is the same as the description based on FIG. 2-4 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In S1509, it is determined whether the game stop flag is in the ON state (5AH). As a result, if it is determined that it is not in the ON state (≠5AH), the process moves to safety device operation management processing (S1512). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the ON state (=5AH), the process moves to S1510.

Here, the game stop flag is turned ON when it is determined in the safety device operation management process (S1512), which will be described later, that the safety device operation condition (difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value) is satisfied and the game is to be controlled to a stop state. status (5AH). Therefore, in S1509, if it is determined that the game stop flag is in the ON state (=5AH), the necessary processes (S1510 to S1511) for making the game stop state are executed, and the timer interrupt processing is executed. Execution of the game processing (S1025 to S1037, S1512) of the section is avoided, and the game is thereby controlled to be in a stopped state.

Once the game stop flag is set to the ON state, it is configured so that it will not be switched to the OFF state unless a power-on process accompanied by an RWM clear process (S1011) is performed thereafter. The game stop flag is provided in the internal RWM area of the main control unit 520, and by executing the RWM clearing process (S1011), all of the RWM area in the used area except for the setting value storage area is cleared. When the flag is cleared, the game stop flag is also set to the OFF state. In this way, in order to cancel the game stop state, it is necessary to perform power-on processing accompanied by RWM clear processing (S1011), and the system is configured such that the game stop state cannot be canceled by any other method. There is. By the way, it may be configured to control the game to be stopped not only when the operating conditions of the safety device are met, but also when it is determined that a specific error (magnetic error, radio wave error, etc.) has occurred. In this case, the game stop flag that is set when the operating conditions of the safety device are met and the game stop flag that is set when it is determined that a specific error has occurred are managed using different game stop flags. It is desirable to configure it so that As a result, it is possible to configure the game to be controlled to different game stop states (the contents of the game stop screen and/or the notification mode during game stop are different) depending on the type of the game stop flag that is set. In addition, the game stop flag that is set when the operating conditions of the safety device are satisfied is configured so that it will not be switched to the OFF state unless a power-on process accompanied by RWM clear process (S1011) is performed. The game stop flag that is set when it is determined that a specific error has occurred may be configured to be switched to an OFF state by performing a power-on process accompanied by a backup recovery process (S1014), or It may be configured such that neither of the game stop flags is switched to the OFF state unless a power-on process accompanied by an RWM clear process (S1011) is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be managed using a common gaming stop flag. In this case, the common flag reduces the data capacity, and the necessary The program processing when the game is stopped, such as avoiding execution of the processing (S1510 to S1511) and some of the game processing (S1025 to S1037, S1512), is made common, and the program capacity can be reduced.

Next, the process of S1510 will be explained. In addition, in the original processing order, the game stop flag is set to the ON state after moving to the safety device operation management process (S1512), so the process in S1510 precedes the safety device operation management process (S1512). Although it is never performed, for the sake of explanation, the process of S1510 will be explained first.

In S1510, the main control unit 520 sends drive signals and firing control signals for various solenoids (big winning opening opening/closing solenoids 70, 71, special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoids 72) and commands to the performance control unit 540. Clear the solenoid port for outputting the strobe signal to be sent when As a result, when controlling the game to a stopped state, the driving of various solenoids (big prize opening opening/closing solenoids 70, 71, special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72) is stopped regardless of whether they are being driven or not. At the same time, it also performs firing stop control. Regarding the firing stop control, in the game stopping process (S1520) in the safety device operation management process (S1512), the firing stopping process (S1527) is performed when the game stop flag is set to the ON state. At first glance, the firing stop control here is unnecessary, but if the power is turned on with the backup recovery process (S1014) after the game has been stopped, it is necessary to put the game into the stopped state again. This is a necessary process to perform firing stop control.

Next, in S1511, the security signal output from the external terminal board 60, the common data (OFF data) of the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521, and the LED data (light-off data) of the symbol display device 76 are stored in the serial communication output buffer. do. Here, the configuration is such that various output information necessary for controlling the game to be stopped is simply stored in the serial communication output buffer, and the actual output processing is performed in S1044.

In S1511, the security signal output from the external terminal board 60 stored in the serial communication output buffer is the security information of the external output information 10, and this is output not only when the game is stopped but also when a predetermined error occurs. It is configured as follows. Note that in S1511, the output information of the security signal is stored as external output information, and other external output information (external output information 1 to 9) is cleared (set to non-output state). As a result, even if there is external output information (external output information 1 to 9) that is currently being output, its output is stopped at the start of the game stop state, and during the game stop state, the security signal (external output information 10 ) is configured so that external output information other than that is not output.

Further, in S1511, the common data of the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521 stored in the serial communication output buffer is OFF data (00H) that does not specify any display target. In S1511, light-off data (00H) for turning off the symbol display device 76 is further stored in the serial communication output buffer as LED data of the symbol display device 76. As a result, in the game stop state, the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521 are controlled to be turned off. Incidentally, the LED data stored in the serial communication output buffer here is only the light-off data (00H) of the symbol display device 76, and the LED data of the performance display LED 521 is stored in S1533 of the timer interrupt internal area processing (S1040) described later. Similarly, light-off data (00H) is stored in the serial communication output buffer.

By the way, if OFF data is output as common data for the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521, even if lighting data is output as the LED data for the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521, the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521 do not light up. Similarly, if turn-off data is output as the LED data of the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521, it is assumed that the common data specifying the display target is output as the common data of the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521. Also, the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521 do not light up. Therefore, it may be configured to store either OFF data as common data in the serial communication output buffer or OFF data as LED data. In that case, symbols are displayed in the game stop state. The program capacity required to turn off the device 76 and the performance display LED 521 can be reduced.

Further, in the game stop state, the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521 are controlled to be turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be controlled to have a predetermined display mode. For example, similar to the RWM error process (S1008), information indicating that the game is in a stopped state ("E" display) may be displayed on the performance display LED 521. In addition, in order to be able to determine whether the current game stop state is caused by RWM error processing (S1008) or triggered by the activation of a safety device, RWM error processing (S1008) is The performance display LED 521 may be configured to display information indicating different game stop states (for example, "A" display, "AE" display, etc.). In addition, not only the performance display LED 521 but also the symbol display device 76 may be configured to display information indicating that the game is stopped. In this case, both the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521 display the game stop state. Information indicating that the game is in a stopped state may be displayed, or information indicating that the game is in a stopped state may be displayed only on the symbol display device 76. In addition, when displaying information indicating that the game is in a stopped state on both the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521, the displays on both may be in different display formats, or may be displayed in a common display format. You may make it so that

In any case, when the symbol display device 76 and/or the performance display LED 521 are set to a predetermined display mode in the game stop state, in S1511, common data specifying the display target of the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521 is set. The lighting data of the symbol display device 76 is stored in the serial communication output buffer, and the lighting data of the performance display LED 521 is stored in the output buffer in S1533 of the timer interrupt outside area processing (S1040) described later. That will happen.

When the process of S1511 is finished, the process moves to the process of S1038. In this way, when it is determined that the game stop flag is in the ON state and it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the game stop state, execution of a part of the game processing (S1025 to S1037, S1512) is avoided. As a result, in the game stop state, the control will be as follows.

By avoiding the timer management process (S1025), various timers used in the gaming process (general and public electric timer, special figure and special electric timer, fraudulent information timer, magnetic error notification timer, radio error notification timer, winning slot error notification timer) , ordinary power winning prize valid timer, large winning prize opening prize valid timer, operation confirmation display timer, etc.) updates will be canceled. Incidentally, updating of all of the various timers described above may be stopped, or updating of some timers may be stopped. For example, the update of the regular electricity timer, the special electricity special electricity timer, the general electricity prize valid timer, the big prize opening prize valid timer, the operation confirmation display timer, the unauthorized information timer, the magnetic error notification timer, the radio error notification timer, The update of a timer related to error notification, such as a winning hole error notification timer, may be configured to continue (not be stopped).

Furthermore, by avoiding the input management process (S1026), switches (special symbol 1 starting opening switch 38a, special symbol 2 starting opening switch 39a, winning opening switch 40a, 42a, 43a, big winning opening switch 44a, 45a , right gate switch 46a, out switch 47a, etc.), no input data is created at all.

Furthermore, since the random number circuit processing (S1027) is avoided, abnormality confirmation of the random number circuit is not performed. In addition, even when the game is stopped, each random number circuit (8-bit fixed-length random number circuit, 16-bit fixed-length random number circuit, 8-bit variable-length random number circuit, 16-bit variable-length random number circuit) is not stopped, and jackpot judgment is made. The random numbers for use, the random numbers for hit determination, the random numbers for special symbols, the random numbers for normal symbols, the variable pattern random numbers for special symbols, and the variable pattern random numbers for normal symbols are updated. This is done by stopping each random number circuit (8-bit fixed-length random number circuit, 16-bit fixed-length random number circuit, 8-bit variable-length random number circuit, 16-bit variable-length random number circuit), This is to prevent people from trying to trigger a jackpot. However, even when the game is stopped, each random number circuit (8-bit fixed-length random number circuit, 16-bit fixed-length random number circuit, 8-bit variable-length random number circuit, 16-bit variable-length random number circuit) is configured to stop. It's okay.

Furthermore, by avoiding the prize ball management process (S1028), the payout control command (number of prize balls designation command) that specifies the number of prize balls to the payout control unit 510 is not transmitted regardless of whether there is a prize or not. (The payout control unit 510 executes the payout of game balls based on the payout control command (prize ball number designation command) that has already been sent to the payout control unit 510 even during the game stop state). However, even if the game is controlled to be stopped, the information on the winning counter is referred to, and until the winning counter reaches 0, a payout control command (number of prize balls designation command) may also be sent. With this configuration, it is possible to complete the prize ball processing related to the winning that occurred before the control to the game stop state. In addition, in this case, only in the first timer interrupt processing to control the gaming stop state, the information of the winning counter is referred to, and the payout control command ( Alternatively, in the timer interrupt process that is repeatedly circulated while the game is stopped, the information on the winning counter is referred to for each interrupt, and the winning counter reaches 0. A payout control command (a prize ball number designation command) that specifies the number of prize balls may be sent to the payout control unit 510 until the number of prize balls is reached, or the prize ball management process (S1028) may be performed even during the game stop state. It may be configured to run. However, in any case, if the winning counter reaches 0, the system is configured so that the information on the winning counter is not referred to and the payout control command (prize ball number designation command) is not sent. It is desirable to do so. On the other hand, even if the winning counter reaches 0, a payout control command (a prize ball number designation command) that specifies the number of prize balls is sent to the payout control unit 510 by referring to the information on the winning counter. However, in any case, while the game is in a stopped state, winning will not be determined, so the information on the winning counter will be updated (the value of the winning counter will be 1 or more). There isn't.

Furthermore, by avoiding the normal symbol management process (S1029), the ball entry into the right gate switch 46a (normal symbol starting port switch) is monitored, the normal symbol retention memory information is updated, the winning lottery process, the normal symbol lottery process, Normal symbol variation pattern lottery processing, normal symbol variation display start processing and stop processing are not performed at all. As a result, during the game stop state, new normal symbol suspension storage and new normal symbol variation display will not be executed. Further, normal symbol variation display based on the already stored normal symbol pending storage is not executed. In addition, the normal symbol fluctuation display and normal symbol memory display using the symbol display device 76 are not forcibly stopped/interrupted because the symbol display device 76 is controlled to be turned off based on the process of S1511. Become.

Furthermore, by avoiding the normal electric accessories management process (S1030), the processes necessary for executing the electric chew support such as the opening and closing operation of the movable piece 39b of the special symbol 2 starting port 39 are not performed at all. As a result, a new electric chew support will not be executed while the game is in a stopped state.

Furthermore, by avoiding the special symbol management process (S1031), the ball entry into the special symbol 1 starting port switch 38a and the special symbol 2 starting port switch 39a is monitored, the special symbol pending memory information is updated, and the execution judgment of the pre-read notice is executed. , jackpot lottery processing, special symbol lottery processing, special symbol variation pattern lottery processing, special symbol variation display start processing and stop processing, and setting processing regarding transition of gaming state are not performed at all. As a result, during the game stop state, new special symbol suspension storage and new special symbol variation display will not be executed. Further, special symbol variation display based on the already stored special symbol pending storage is not executed. In addition, regarding the special symbol 1 variable display, special symbol 2 variable display, special symbol 1 memory display, and special symbol 2 memory display using the symbol display device 76, the symbol display device 76 is controlled to be turned off based on the process of S1511. Therefore, it will be forcibly canceled/suspended.

Further, by avoiding the special electric accessory management process (S1032), no execution processing regarding winning games (big winning games, small winning games) and setting processing of the game state after the jackpot game are performed. As a result, a new winning game (big winning game, small winning game) will not be started during the game stop state. In addition, in this embodiment, during execution of a winning game (big winning game, small winning game), if the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined number (reference value) and the safety device is activated (functions), the execution is executed. After the middle winning game (big winning game, small winning game) ends, the game is controlled to be stopped. Therefore, the winning games (big winning games, small winning games) that are being executed will not be stopped/interrupted by being controlled to the game stop state.

Furthermore, by avoiding the error management process (S1033), various sensors (magnetic sensor 73, radio wave sensor 74, vibration sensor 75) and switches (ball counting switch 23c, out-of-supply detection switch 23d, firing stop switch 34, Based on the detection information of the frame release switch 35 and the ball jam detection switch 36), the monitoring process for monitoring whether an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation is not performed, and an error command is sent to the production control unit 540 that can identify the type of error. transmission is never performed. As a result, while the game is stopped, various sensors (magnetic sensor 73, radio sensor 74, vibration sensor 75), switches (ball counting switch 23c, out-of-supply detection switch 23d, firing stop switch 34, frame release switch 35, ball No error notification is performed based on the detection information of the clog detection switch 36). In addition, if it is determined that the game is to be stopped while the error notification is being executed. The error notification being executed will be forcibly stopped/interrupted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the error notification during execution may continue to be executed for a predetermined period of time. Alternatively, the error notification may be executed until the cause of the error is resolved. Further, depending on the content of the error notification, error notification may be canceled/interrupted, and error notification may be executed for a predetermined period of time or until the cause of the error is resolved.

By avoiding the game information notification management process (S1034), the lighting/extinguishing process of the right-handed display LED 76g is not performed at all. Further, based on the process of S1511, the symbol display device 76 is controlled to be in an extinguished state, so the right-hand hitting display LED 76g is always controlled to be in an extinguished state during the game stop state. Further, if the game is controlled to be stopped while the right-handed game display LED 76g is lit, the lighting of the right-handed game display LED 76g is forcibly stopped/interrupted.

By avoiding the external terminal management process (S1035), the process of transmitting an external terminal signal related to external output information to the hall computer is not performed. As a result, in the game stop state, no new outer end signal regarding external output information is transmitted to the hall computer. Also, based on the process in S1511, the external output information (external output information 1 to 9) other than the security signal is cleared (becomes a non-output state), so the external output information (external output information 1 to 9) that is currently being output is ), its output is stopped at the start of the game stop state. However, if a predetermined error has already occurred and a security signal is being output at the start of the game stop state, this security signal will continue to be output even if the game stops state. However, the configuration may be such that the output of the security signal is once stopped at the start of the game stop state, and then the output of the security signal is started again.

Furthermore, by avoiding the solenoid management process (S1036), no output processing of the drive signal (excitation signal) is performed for the drive source (big winning opening opening/closing solenoids 70, 71, special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72). Not done. As a result, during the game stop state, the movable piece 39b of the special symbol 2 starting opening 39 and the opening/closing plates 44b, 45b of the big prize openings 44, 45 are configured not to be opened/closed. In addition, if control of the game stop state is started while the movable piece 39b of the special symbol 2 starting opening 39 and the opening/closing plates 44b, 45b of the big prize openings 44, 45 are being opened and closed, in S1510, the solenoid By clearing the port, at that point, the opening/closing operation of the movable piece 39b of the special symbol 2 starting port 39 and the opening/closing plates 44b, 45b of the big prize openings 44, 45 will be forcibly stopped/interrupted. .

Furthermore, by avoiding the LED management process (S1037), the update process of the port output counter that manages the lighting cycle of dynamic lighting control, and the control signal (common data, lighting data) to the symbol display device 76 and performance display LED 521. ) is not outputted at all. As a result, during the game stop state, the symbol display device 76 and the performance display LED 521 are controlled to be turned off based on the process of S1511, and are configured to maintain the turned off state (not updated to the lit state). However, when controlling the symbol display device 76 and/or performance display LED 521 to have a predetermined display mode while the game is stopped, update processing of the port output counter that manages the lighting cycle of dynamic lighting control is necessary. It is desirable to configure it to run.

In this way, when the game is stopped, execution of some game processing (S1025 to S1037, S1512) is avoided, and the basic processing that is the basis of playing the game is forcibly stopped/interrupted. Ru. In the subsequent game stop state, the system is configured such that no new event related to the game executed through some game processing (S1025 to S1037, S1512) will occur.

Next, the timer interrupt internal and external processing (S1040) will be explained. Note that, as described above, the processing in S1038 to S1039 and S1041 to S1045 is the same as the content described based on FIG. 2-4, so a description thereof will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt outside area processing_safety device 1)
In the main control unit equipped with a safety device, the timer interrupt internal and external processing (S1040) shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4-1-4 is executed. The timer interrupt internal and external processing (S1040) in FIG. 4-1-4 is called and executed during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (S1024 to S1045, S1509 to S1512) shown in FIG. 4-1-3. Note that the processing in S1050 to S1055 is the same as the description based on FIG. 2-5 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In S1532, it is determined whether the game stop flag is in the ON state (5AH). As a result, if it is determined that the LED is not in the ON state (≠5AH), the process moves to an out-of-use area LED update process (S1052). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the ON state (=5AH), the process moves to S1533. In this way, in S1532, the display content displayed on the performance display LED 521 is switched depending on whether or not the game is controlled to be stopped by referring to the game stop flag.

In S1532, if it is determined that the game stop flag is not in the ON state (≠5AH), the process moves to the out-of-use area LED update process (S1052), but the content of the out-of-use area LED update process (S1052) is , the description is omitted as it is the same as the content described based on FIG. The processing in S1533 will be explained.

In S1533, turn-off data (00H) for turning off the performance display LED 521 is stored in the serial communication output buffer. The light-off data (00H) stored here is output at S1044 in the timer interrupt process. As a result, the performance display LED 521 is controlled to be turned off when the game is stopped. Furthermore, even if the performance display LED 521 is controlled to be lit when the game stop state is started, the lights-off data (00H) is stored in the serial communication output buffer, and the performance display LED 521 is turned off. By being controlled, the displayed content that is being lit is forcibly stopped/interrupted. However, if the performance display LED 521 is controlled to have a predetermined display mode during the game stop state, lighting data corresponding to the predetermined display mode will be stored in the serial communication output buffer.

Next, S1534 will be explained. In S1534, it is determined whether the game stop flag is in the ON state (5AH). As a result, if it is determined that it is not in the ON state (≠5AH), the process moves to out-of-area switch update processing (S1535). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the ON state (=5AH), the out-of-area switch update process (S1535) is configured to be avoided. In this way, in S1534, the system is configured to refer to the game stop flag and determine whether or not to execute the out-of-area switch update process (S1535) depending on whether or not the game is controlled to be in the game stop state. There is.

In the out-of-area switch update process (S1535) that is executed when it is determined in S1534 that the game stop flag is not in the ON state, various winning openings (which are information for calculating the base value displayed on the performance display LED 521) are executed. Special symbol 1 starting hole 38, special symbol 2 starting hole 39, upper left winning hole 40, middle left winning hole 41, lower left winning hole 42, right winning hole 43, upper large winning hole 44, lower large winning hole 45). The input information of the switches 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, and 45a and the input information of the out switch 47a are updated.

In the out-of-area switch update process (S1535), each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a created in the input management process (S1026) in the timer interrupt process, which is an in-area program, and stored in the in-area RWM is , 43a, 44a, 45a, and based on this, each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a for use in an out-of-area program is determined. Creating switch input data (switch edge data). As a result, the switch input data (switch edge data) similar to the switch input data (switch edge data) of each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a stored in the RWM in the used area is It will also be stored in the RWM outside the used area. In addition to this, switch input data (switch edge data) is also created based on the input information of the out switch 47a, and is also stored in the out-of-use area RWM. Regarding the out switch 47a, for convenience, the input information of the out switch 47a is referred to, but in the same way as the switch input data (switch edge data) of each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a. , the switch input data (switch edge data) of the out switch 47a stored in the in-use area RWM may be referred to.

Then, the switch input data (switch edge In the performance display LED aggregation/division process (S1048), it is determined whether or not there is a prize for each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a based on the performance indicator data). It is determined whether there is a ball or not.

Here, it has been explained that if it is determined in S1534 that the game stop flag is in the ON state (5AH) (=5AH), the out-of-area switch update process (S1535) will be avoided. , means that the base value displayed on the performance display LED 521 is not updated while the game is in a stopped state. That is, by avoiding the out-of-area switch update process (S1535), switch input data (switch edge data) for each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a and out switch 47a is not created. Therefore, in the performance display LED aggregation division process (S1048) that actually performs the base value counting process, the winning switches 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a and the out switch 47a It is no longer determined that a ball has entered the ball. Therefore, when the game is in a stopped state, the base value is not updated, and the base value at the start of the game stopped state remains unchanged.

In this way, while the game is stopped, the base value is not updated, but even during the game stop state, the main loop processing and timer interrupt processing are executed cyclically. The main loop internal and external processing (S1020) and the timer interrupt internal and external processing (S1040) are executed. Therefore, processing related to the display content of the base value, such as performance display LED aggregation division processing (S1048) and performance display LED display content update processing (S1051), is internally executed. However, in the game stop state, as described above, the base value is not updated in the performance display LED aggregation/division process (S1048).

Furthermore, in the performance display LED display content update process (S1051), the lighting pattern according to the operation confirmation display, the lighting pattern according to the value (base value) of the identification ratio buffer, and the display content of the identification segment indicating the type of the base value. ("bL." "b1." "b2." "b3.") are selected, and the selected lighting patterns are stored in the performance display output buffer, but the game is stopped. After that, the out-of-use area LED update process (S1052) is avoided, so the information stored in the performance display output buffer here will not be stored in the serial communication output buffer. Therefore, the information stored in the performance display output buffer is not output to the performance display LED 521. In this way, in the game stop state, even if the performance display LED display content update process (S1051) is executed, the performance display LED 521 is kept in the off state.

By adopting this kind of control content, it is possible to make the control program as common as possible between the game stop state and other states, and prevent unnecessary branch programs from overwhelming the program capacity. It has a unique design. Furthermore, by maintaining the base value at the start of the game stop state, it is possible to continue counting the base value in a normal state after the game stop state is canceled.

In addition, by executing the performance display LED display content update process (S1051) while the game is stopped, multiple types of base values (real-time base value, first cumulative base value, second cumulative base value, third cumulative base value, Since the process of cyclically switching the base value in a predetermined order is performed continuously, after the game stop state is released, the display can be restarted from the base value that should originally be displayed.

In addition, if the performance display LED 521 is performing an operation confirmation display (all blinking) that repeats all lighting and all blinking for a predetermined period of time (approximately 5 seconds), and the game is stopped, ) has passed, the operation confirmation display is not determined to have ended, and multiple types of base values (real-time base value, first cumulative base value, second cumulative base value, third cumulative base value) are predetermined. The configuration is such that the processing does not proceed to the process of cyclically switching the order. Thereby, after the game stop state is released, the display can be restarted from the base value that should originally be displayed. By the way, the operation confirmation display is executed by switching between an all-on display pattern and an all-off display pattern at predetermined time intervals until the value of the operation confirmation display timer reaches a predetermined value (0). , is updated in the timer management process (S1025) in the timer interrupt process, and the timer management process (S1025) is avoided in the game stop state, so the value of the operation check display timer may not become the predetermined value (0). do not have. This restricts the transition to the process of cyclically switching multiple types of base values (real-time base value, first cumulative base value, second cumulative base value, third cumulative base value) in a predetermined order. has been done. By the way, if the performance display LED 521 is displaying an operation confirmation when the game is stopped, the operation confirmation display that is currently being executed can be interrupted/cancelled (the performance display LED 521 is hidden). ), or the operation confirmation display may be continued.

In addition, if the power is turned on with the backup recovery process (S1014) after the game is stopped, the game will be controlled to be stopped again, but at this time, the game start setting in the main control system process In (S1016), the configuration is such that an operation confirmation display timer is set (5 seconds). Therefore, in the performance display LED display content update process (S1051) when the game is stopped again, it is not determined that the operation confirmation display has ended even after the predetermined time (about 5 seconds) has elapsed. It is configured not to shift to a process of cyclically switching multiple types of base values (real-time base value, first cumulative base value, second cumulative base value, third cumulative base value) in a predetermined order. Thereby, after the game stop state is released, the display can be restarted from the base value that should originally be displayed. Incidentally, when the game is controlled to be stopped again when the power is turned on, an operation confirmation display by the performance display LED 521 may be performed, or may be configured so as not to be performed.

In addition, in the operation confirmation display, the all-on display pattern and all-off display pattern can be switched at predetermined time intervals, and base values (real-time base value, first cumulative base value, second cumulative base value, third cumulative base value, The blinking timer (measuring the blinking switching time) used to blink the cumulative base value) is updated in the performance display LED display content update process (S1051), so even when the game is stopped, This flashing timer is updated. Thereby, after the game stop state is released, the display can be resumed in the display mode that should originally be displayed.

When the timer interrupt internal and external processing (S1040) is finished, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4-1-3, and then the processing of S1041 to S1045 is performed. When the processing of S1041 to S1045 is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the main loop processing (S1017 to S1023) is executed. In this way, in the game stop state, the main loop processing (S1017 to S1023) and the timer interrupt processing (S1024 to S1045, S1509 to S1512) shown in Figure 4-1-3 are executed cyclically, and the The timer interrupt process is configured so that some of the game processes (S1025 to S1037, S1512) are avoided.

(Processing outside the main loop area_safety device 1)
The main control unit 520 equipped with a safety device executes the main loop inside-outside area processing (S1020) shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4-1-4. The main loop in-area processing (S1020) in FIG. 4-1-4 is called and executed during the main loop processing (S1017 to S1023) shown in FIG. 4-1-1. Note that the processing in S1046 to S1049 is the same as the description based on FIG. 2-5 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In the main loop inside-outside area processing (S1020) shown in FIG. 4-1-4, a safety device counting process (S1528) is performed to count a difference ball counter that is a trigger for activation of the safety device.

(Safety device counting process_Safety device 1)
FIG. 4-1-5 shows a flowchart of the safety device counting process (S1528). When the safety device counting process (S1528) is executed, first in S1529, it is determined whether the game stop flag is in the ON state (5AH). As a result, if it is determined that it is in the ON state (=5AH), the safety device counting process (S1528) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game stop flag is not in the ON state (≠5AH), the process moves to S1530.

In the safety device counting process (S1528), counting process of the difference ball counter is performed in S1531 described later, but if it is determined that the game stop flag is in the ON state (5AH), the process of S1531 is not executed. That is, in the game stop state where the game stop flag is in the ON state (5AH), the counting process of the difference ball counter is not executed. This is because in the game stop state, the value of the difference ball counter has already reached the predetermined value (0), so no further counting process is necessary. In addition, if the counting process of the difference ball counter is executed, even though the value of the difference ball counter has reached the predetermined value (0), there is a risk that it will be updated to a value greater than the predetermined value (0). Therefore, in consideration of these points, the process of S1531 is not executed.

However, even if the game is stopped (the game stop flag is ON (5AH)), the counting process of the difference ball counter may be executed. In this case, the counting process of the difference ball counter is performed while the game is stopped, but even if the value of the difference ball counter is updated to a predetermined value (0) or more as a result of the counting process, the game stop state is It is desirable to configure the game to continue (the game stop flag continues to be in the ON state). With this configuration, even if the process of S1531 is executed in the game stopped state, the game stopped state will not be canceled.

In S1529, if it is determined that the game stop flag is not in the ON state (≠5AH), the process moves to S1530. In S1530, it is determined whether the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH). As a result, if it is determined that it is in the ON state (=5AH), the safety device counting process (S1528) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the safety device activation flag is not in the ON state (≠5AH), the process moves to S1531.

Here, the safety device activation flag that is the subject of determination in S1530 is determined in the safety device activation management process (S1512) described later. ) is set to the ON state (5AH). Incidentally, the game stop flag is configured such that it is determined whether or not to set it to the ON state on the condition that the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state. That is, the safety device activation flag is a flag that is set prior to the game stop flag.

As mentioned above, in the safety device counting process (S1528), the counting process of the difference ball counter is performed in S1531, which will be described later. However, if it is determined that the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH), the counting process of the difference ball counter is performed in S1531. Processing is not executed. That is, when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH), the counting process of the difference ball counter is not executed. This is because when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state, the value of the difference ball counter has already reached the predetermined value (0), so no further counting process is necessary. In addition, if the counting process of the difference ball counter is executed, even though the value of the difference ball counter has reached the predetermined value (0), there is a risk that it will be updated to a value greater than the predetermined value (0). Therefore, in consideration of these points, the process of S1531 is not executed.

Next, the differential ball counter counting process (S1531) that is executed when it is determined in S1530 that the safety device activation flag is not in the ON state (≠5AH) will be described.

In the difference ball counter counting process (S1531), when it is determined that a prize ball has occurred, a subtraction process is performed to subtract a value according to the number of prize balls from the difference ball counter, and it is determined that an out has occurred. In this case, an addition process is performed to add a value corresponding to the number of outs from the difference ball counter.

Specifically, whether or not a winning ball has occurred is determined based on the switch input data (switch edge data) of each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a stored in the RWM in the usage area. , and if switch input data (switch edge data) exists, the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning switch is subtracted from the difference ball counter. In addition, as for whether an out has occurred, the out switch 47a stored in the RWM in the used area is referred to, and if switch input data (switch edge data) exists, the number of out balls is counted by the difference ball counter. Add to. By the way, the switch input data (switch edge data) of each of the winning switches 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a and the out switch 47a stored in the RWM in the used area are the timer interrupts which are the programs in the used area. It is created in the input management process (S1026) within the process.

In this way, in the difference ball counter counting process (S1531), the value of the difference ball counter is updated according to the number of prize balls and the number of outs that have occurred. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and with reference to the switch input data (switch edge data) of each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a and out switch 47a stored in the RWM outside the use area, It may be configured to perform subtraction processing and addition processing. By the way, the switch input data (switch edge data) of each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a and out switch 47a stored in the out-of-use area RWM is an out-of-area program that is an out-of-use area program. It is created in the switch update process (S1535).

In any case, regarding the addition and subtraction processing of the difference ball counter in the difference ball counter counting process (S1531), each switch input data (switch By referring to the information on the edge data of the switch, there is no need to create new switch input data (edge data of the switch), so it is possible to reduce the program capacity. In addition, by using common switch input data (switch edge data), the number of prize balls actually paid out to the player, the number of prize balls counted as the base value of the performance display LED 521, and the number of outs can be compared. It is possible to create a design in which errors are unlikely to occur between the two.

However, even if the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH), the counting process of the difference ball counter may be executed. In this case, the counting process of the difference ball counter is performed with the safety device activation flag in the ON state, but even if the value of the difference ball counter is updated to a value greater than the predetermined value (0) as a result of the counting process, It is desirable to configure the safety device activation flag to continue in the ON state (5AH). With this configuration, even if the process of S1531 is executed with the safety device activation flag in the ON state, there is no possibility that the safety device activation flag will change from the ON state to the OFF state.

Incidentally, in the safety device operation management process (S1512) described later, the safety device operation condition (the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value "0" (=second reference value)) is satisfied, and the safety device operation flag is turned ON. Even if it is set, if a jackpot game is in progress (or a small win game is in progress), it is configured not to control the game to a stop state (the game stop flag is not set to the ON state). Therefore, if the operating condition of the safety device (difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value "0" (=second reference value)) during a jackpot game (or a small win game), the jackpot game (or After the small winning game is finished, the game is controlled to be stopped (the game stop flag is set to the ON state). This is because the game is controlled to be stopped during a jackpot game (or a small win game), and the jackpot game (small win game) is canceled/interrupted, resulting in the profit that the player could have originally earned. This is to prevent them from suffering a disadvantage such as not being able to obtain.

As a result of taking these points into consideration, it is possible that during a jackpot game (or a small win game), the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, but the game stop flag is set to the OFF state. , S1530 is configured to determine whether the safety device activation flag is in the ON state even if it is determined in the previous S1529 that the game stop flag is not in the ON state.

However, even during a jackpot game (or a small win game), it may be configured to control the game to be stopped (the game stop flag is set to the ON state). For example, if the operating condition of the safety device (difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value "0" (=second reference value)) is met during the execution of a round game, when the round game in progress ends. Therefore, it is desirable to configure the system so that the game is controlled to be stopped (the game stop flag is set to the ON state). With this configuration, the player can at least earn the profits that can be earned in the round game being executed, and the game can be stopped immediately without waiting for the end of the jackpot (or the end of the small win). It becomes possible to migrate.

When the difference ball counter counting process (S1531) is finished, the safety device counting process (S1528) is finished, and the process returns to the main loop outside area process (S1020) shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4-1-4. After that, the processing of S1048 to S1049 is executed, and the processing outside the area within the main loop (S1020) is ended. However, the processing of S1048 to S1049 is the same as the description based on FIG. 2-5 described above, so the explanation will be omitted. Omit.

(Safety device operation management process_Safety device 1)
Next, the safety device operation management process (S1512) executed in the timer interrupt process (S1024 to S1045, S1509 to S1512) shown in FIG. 4-1-3 will be explained. The safety device operation management process (S1512) is executed when it is determined in S1509 that the game stop flag is not in the ON state (≠5AH). That is, the safety device operation management process (S1512) is a process that is executed when the game is not in the stopped state (the game stop flag is in the OFF state). Processing for determining whether or not to perform control is performed.

FIG. 4-1-6 shows a flowchart of the safety device operation management process (S1512). When the safety device operation management process (S1512) is executed, first, it is determined whether the safety device operation flag is in the ON state (5AH) (S1513). As a result, if it is determined that the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (=5AH), the process moves to S1519. On the other hand, if it is determined that the safety device activation flag is not in the ON state (≠5AH), the process moves to S1514.

The safety device activation flag is set to the ON state when it is determined in the process of S1514 that the difference ball counter has reached the second reference value (predetermined value "0") (S1521). When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, a safety device activation warning command for warning that the safety device is activated is transmitted to the production control unit 540 (S1522).

When receiving the safety device activation warning command, the production control unit 540 displays a notification image (notification message) on the image display means to notify that the safety device is activated. This makes it possible to notify the player that the safety device is activated. Further, not only the image display means 31 but also lamps 63a, 64a, speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d, etc. may be used to perform a notification effect to notify that the safety device is activated. In addition, the image display means 31, the lamps 63a, 64a, the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d, all or a combination of a plurality of types, or any one of them may be used to perform a notification effect that the safety device is activated. You may also do so. Further, it is desirable that the notification image and notification effect that the safety device is activated continue to be executed until the game is stopped. Further, the game may be continued to be executed even after the game is stopped.

When the process of S1522 ends, the safety device operation management process (S1512) ends. Incidentally, if it is determined that the difference ball counter has reached the second reference value (predetermined value "0"), the process of S1518, which will be described later, is not executed. When the counter reaches the second reference value (predetermined value "0") and the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the difference ball storage buffer is used in the subsequent safety device activation management process (S1512) (see ) This is because there is nothing to do. Therefore, by avoiding the process in S1518, unnecessary process execution is reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1514 that the difference ball counter has not reached the second reference value (predetermined value "0"), the difference ball counter is equal to or less than the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"). A determination is made as to whether or not (S1515). Here, if it is determined that the difference ball counter is not less than the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"), the value of the difference ball counter is stored in the difference ball storage buffer provided in the RWM in the used area. (S1518). When the process of S1518 ends, the safety device operation management process (S1512) ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1515, if it is determined that the difference ball counter is less than or equal to the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"), whether the difference ball storage buffer is greater than or equal to the first reference value (predetermined value "10000") A determination is made whether or not (S1516). Here, if it is determined that the difference ball storage buffer is not equal to or higher than the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"), the value of the difference ball counter is stored in the difference ball storage buffer provided in the RWM in the usage area. (S1518), and the safety device operation management process (S1512) ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the difference ball storage buffer is equal to or higher than the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"), the safety device is activated to warn that the possibility of the safety device activation is approaching. After transmitting the advance notice command to the performance control section (S1517), the value of the difference ball counter is stored in the difference ball storage buffer (S1518), and the safety device operation management process (S1512) is ended.

When the production control unit 540 receives a safety device activation notice command, a preview image (a notice message, the current value of the difference ball counter, The difference ball counter displays a second reference value (such as the number remaining until reaching a predetermined value "0").This alerts the player that the possibility of the safety device being activated is approaching. In addition, not only the image display means 31 but also the lamps 63a, 64a, speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d, etc. are used to warn of the impending possibility that the safety device will be activated. In addition, all or a combination of a plurality of types or any one of the image display means 31, the lamps 63a, 64a, and the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, and 19d may be used to provide a safety warning effect. It may be possible to execute a warning effect that foretells that the possibility of the device being activated is approaching.Furthermore, a warning image or a warning effect that foretells that the possibility of the safety device being activated is approaching may be executed. , it is desirable to configure the system to end when a predetermined execution time has elapsed.This allows display related to the game (background image, pending image, decorative pattern, error image, etc.) to be displayed on the image display means 31. It can be configured so as not to interfere as long as possible.In addition, this is not limited to this, until the safety device is activated (until the safety device activation flag is set to ON state or the production control unit receives a safety device activation warning command). may be configured to continuously display a preview image or preview effect that foretells that the possibility of a safety device activating is approaching.In addition, a warning image or a warning effect that warns that the possibility of a safety device activating is approaching may be continuously executed. If the production control unit 540 receives a safety device activation warning command while executing a preview image or a preview performance that foretells that the safety device will be activated, a notice that warns that the possibility that the safety device will be activated is approaching. It is desirable to configure the system so that the image or warning effect is terminated and a notification image or notification effect indicating that the safety device is activated is executed.

Here, in S1516, the safety device activation notice command is sent to the production control unit 540 only when it is determined that the difference ball storage buffer is equal to or higher than the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"). As a result of the difference ball counter being updated by the safety device counting process (S1528), the system issues a safety device activation notice command only when the value of the difference ball counter falls below the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"). This is to transmit the information to the control unit 540. The update process of the difference ball storage buffer is performed in S1518, and the current value of the difference ball counter is stored in the difference ball storage buffer in S1518, but since the process of S1518 is after the execution timing of S1516, At the determination timing of S1516 that is executed first, the value of the difference ball counter from the previous time (before updating) is still stored in the difference ball storage buffer. Therefore, first in S1515, it is determined that the difference ball counter is less than or equal to the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"), and in S1516, the value of the difference ball storage buffer is determined to be the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"). By determining that the difference is above, it is possible to specify the timing when the difference ball counter falls below the first reference value (predetermined value "10000").

By the way, as a result of updating the difference ball counter, not only the timing when the value of the difference ball counter becomes less than the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"), but also the timing when the value of the difference ball counter becomes less than the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"). 10,000'') or less, the safety device activation advance notice command may be transmitted to the production control unit 540. In this case, if the value of the difference ball counter is equal to or less than the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"), each time the safety device operation management process (S1512) is executed, the production control unit 540 Device operation advance notice commands will be sent at any time. In this way, if the production control unit 540 is configured to send the safety device activation notice command at any time, the production control unit 540 will be able to predict the possibility that the safety device will operate every time it receives the safety device activation notice command. Since it is possible to update the contents of the preview image and preview effect that warn that the ball is approaching, it is possible to display, for example, the current value of the difference ball counter in real time. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a safety device activation notice command is transmitted to the production control unit 540 in every predetermined unit (for example, every 1000 shots). Also, as a result of updating the difference ball counter, a safety device activation notice cancellation command is sent to the production control unit 540 at the timing when the value of the difference ball counter exceeds the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"). may be configured. As a result, if the value of the difference ball counter exceeds the first reference value (predetermined value "10000"), a safety device activation warning cancellation command is issued to notify that the possibility of the safety device activation is approaching at that point. It is possible to configure the system to end the preview image or preview effect that foretells the event.

Furthermore, regarding the notification effect based on the safety device activation warning command and the notification effect based on the safety device activation warning command, it is desirable to make the display format (display content) of the notification image and the notification image displayed on the image display means 31 different. . Further, it is desirable that the notification modes by the lamps 63a, 64a and the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d are also made different. This makes it easy to distinguish between the content of the notification effect based on the safety device activation warning command and the content of the notification effect based on the safety device activation warning command. In addition, in that case, the display mode (display content) displayed on the image display means 31 is more flashy (the display area is It is desirable that the lamps 63a and 64a have a flashy display mode (such as a fast blinking speed), or have a display position close to the center of the display area, a high display layer, etc.). Furthermore, when accompanied by notification sounds from the speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, and 19d, the notification effect based on the safety device activation warning command is better in terms of playback volume and playback time than the notification effect based on the safety device activation warning command. It is desirable that it be configured to be long. Further, the notification effect based on the safety device activation warning command and/or the preview effect based on the safety device activation warning command may be configured to be displayed in a lower layer than the effect image related to the game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the performance image related to the game from being impaired due to the notification performance based on the safety device activation warning command and/or the preview performance based on the safety device activation warning command. Additionally, for notification effects based on safety device activation warning commands, the display layer will be higher than the effect images related to games, and for preview effects based on safety device activation warning commands, the display layer will be lower than the effect images related to games. It may be configured as follows.

In this way, in the safety device activation management process (S1512), if it is determined in S1513 that the safety device activation flag is not in the ON state (≠5AH), the processes of S1514 to S1518 and S121 to S1522 described above are executed. be done. These processes are executed when the safety device is not yet activated (the difference ball counter has not reached the second reference value (predetermined value "0")).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1513 that the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (=5AH), the processes of S1519 to S1520 are executed. These processes are executed when the safety device is operable (the difference ball counter has reached the second reference value (predetermined value "0")). The processing of S1519 to S1520 will be explained below.

In S1519, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a jackpot game (or a small win game). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (or the small win game is in progress), the safety device operation management process (S1512) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (or the small win game is in progress), the process moves to a game stop process (S1520) in which a process is performed to control the game to a stop state.

When the game stop processing (S1520) is executed, the processing of S1523 to S1527 shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4-1-7 is performed. When the game stop process (S1520) is executed, a game stop flag is first set (S1523). By setting the game stop flag here, in the subsequent timer interrupt processing, the necessary processing (S1510 to S1511) for placing the game in a stopped state is executed, and a part of the game processing (S1025) of the timer interrupt processing is executed. - S1037, S1512) are avoided, and as a result, the game is controlled to be stopped.

Subsequently, the safety device activation flag is cleared (S1524). At this point, the game stop flag has already been set (S1523), and once the game stop flag is set, it is cleared because the safety device activation flag will not be referred to in subsequent processing. Incidentally, the safety device activation flag will not be cleared unless the power-on process accompanied by the RWM clear process (S1011) is executed or this process (S1524) is executed. Therefore, even if the power is cut off with the safety device activation flag set to the ON state (5AH) and the power is turned on with the backup recovery process (S1014), the safety device activation flag will not be activated. The ON state (5AH) is maintained even after recovery from disconnection. In this way, once the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), the safety device activation flag can be cleared in the power-on process accompanied by the backup recovery process (S1014) under any circumstances. Furthermore, in the power-on process accompanied by the backup restoration process (S1014), it is possible to avoid executing the game stop process (S1520) that is executed based on the safety device activation flag being in the ON state (5AH). It is configured so that it is not possible.

Subsequently, a game stop command is transmitted to the production control section 540 (S1526). When receiving the game stop command, the production control unit 540 displays a notification image (notification message) on the image display means 31 indicating that the game is in a stopped state. This makes it possible to notify the player that the game is in a stopped state. Further, in addition to the image display means 31, lamps 63a, 64a, speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d, etc. may be used to notify that the game is in a stopped state. Furthermore, it is also possible to notify that the game is in a stopped state by using all or a combination of a plurality of types of image display means 31, lamps 63a, 64a, speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d, or any one of them. good. Further, it is desirable that notification images and various notifications indicating that the game is in a stopped state are continuously provided during the game stopped state. Furthermore, it is desirable to continue the notification until the game stop state is canceled. For example, if the power is cut off during the game stop state and the power is turned on accompanied by the backup recovery process (S1014), It is desirable that the game be controlled to be in the game stop state again, and that a notification image and various notifications indicating that the game is in the game stop state be executed. Further, while the game is in a stopped state, a result performance image related to the game (display of ball output information, number of consecutive jackpot games, etc.) may be displayed on the image display means 31. At this time, the result performance image displayed includes information on the number of balls that were obtained when the game was controlled to be stopped, and the number of consecutive jackpot games that were continued when the game was controlled to be stopped. It is desirable that Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the gaming results up to the gaming stop state. In addition, when the game is controlled to be stopped, if consecutive jackpot games are not continued, or if there is no information on the number of balls that have been won (≒ the safety device is activated in a gaming state other than during a jackpot game) (When the difference ball counter has reached the second reference value (a predetermined value "0")), the result performance image may not be displayed, or the result performance image may be used as a result performance image for a series of jackpot games. It may be possible to display a message that there is no information regarding the continuation or the number of balls that have been acquired (for example, "number of continuations: 0", "number of balls acquired: 0", etc.).

By the way, if the power is cut off while the game is stopped and the power is turned on along with the backup recovery process (S1014), the process of S1526 is not performed and the game stop command is sent to the performance control unit 540. Although it is not transmitted, the game stop command may be configured to be transmitted even in such a situation. This makes it possible to execute notification images and various notifications based on the game stop command even if the power is cut off while the game is stopped and the power is turned on with the backup recovery process (S1014). becomes.

Further, if the power is cut off while the game is stopped and the power is turned on with the backup recovery process (S1014), the game stop command may not be sent to the production control unit 540. good. In this case, the notification image and various notifications based on the game stop command are not executed, so the notification mode in the game stop state can be made different before and after the power-on process accompanied by the backup restoration process (S1014). With this configuration, it becomes possible for a hall employee or the like to easily check whether there is any trace of unauthorized power-on processing being performed while the game is in a stopped state. In addition, in this case, in the game stop state after the power-on process accompanied by the backup restoration process (S1014), although the notification image and various notifications based on the game stop command are not executed, the game stop state is controlled. Therefore, for example, the decorative symbols 100, 101, 102 and the mini symbol 103a are displayed in a stopped state on the image display means 31, but new decorative symbol variation games and mini symbol variation games are not executed. . In addition, in the game stop state before the power-on process accompanied by the backup recovery process (S1014), the decorative symbols 100, 101, 102, the mini symbols 103a, etc. are not displayed on the image display means 31, and instead, for example, a black background image is displayed. It may also be configured to display a notification image (notification message) indicating that the game is in a stopped state. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the difference in the notification mode between the game stop states before and after the power-on process accompanied by the backup recovery process (S1014) more clear. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 100, 101, 102, the mini symbols 103a, etc. may be displayed in a stopped state on the image display means 31 even in the game halt state before the power-on process that involves the backup recovery process (S1014). Alternatively, a notification image (notification message) indicating that the game is in a stopped state may be displayed so as to overlap them.

In addition, when the power is cut off while the game is stopped and the power is turned on with the backup restoration process (S1014), the result effect image is displayed before the power on with the backup restoration process (S1014). , after the power-on process that involves the backup restoration process (S1014), the result effect image is not displayed (or there is no information about the continuation of the jackpot game or the number of balls that have been won (e.g., "Number of continuations 0 times"). ”, “Number of balls acquired and put out”, etc.) may be displayed. With this configuration, the notification mode in the gaming stopped state can be made different before and after the power-on process that involves the backup restoration process (S1014), so that hall employees etc. can detect unauthorized power supply while the gaming is stopped. It becomes possible to easily check whether there are any traces that the loading process has been performed.

In addition, in the case where the power is cut off during the game stop state and the power is turned on with the backup restoration process (S1014), the notification mode in the game stop state before and after the power-on process with the backup restoration process (S1014) is performed. may be configured so that they are the same. With this configuration, even if, for example, a power outage occurs while the hall is in operation and the power is cut off while the game is stopped, even after the power is restored, the same system as before the power was cut off can be used. Since the game is controlled to be stopped in the notification mode, it is possible to reduce the risk of giving players a sense of distrust or causing them to be inadvertently confused. Further, while the notification image in the game stop state and the notification mode of various notifications are the same before and after the power-on process, the display content of the result performance image may be different (for example, the backup restoration process After the power-on process accompanied by step S1014), the result effect image is not displayed, or there is no information about the continuation of jackpot games or the number of balls that have been acquired (e.g., "Number of continuations: 0", "Acquired balls") (such as displaying "number 0").

When the process of S1526 is finished, the firing stop process (S1527) is finally executed, and the game stop process (S1520) is ended. By the way, when the game is controlled to a stop state (a state in which the game stop flag is set to an ON state), the solenoid port is cleared in S1510 of the timer interrupt processing, so that the firing control signal is set to a non-output state (an OFF state). ), and the firing stop control is performed, so in order to avoid duplication of similar processing, the firing stopping process (S1527) may be omitted in the game stopping process (S1520).

In this way, when the game stop processing (S1520) is finished, the process returns to the safety device operation management process (S1512), and the same process (S1512) is ended.

By the way, in S1519, if it is determined that the jackpot game (or the small win game) is in progress, the safety device operation management process (S1512) is terminated. In this case, the game stop processing (S1520) is avoided and the game is configured not to be controlled to be stopped (the game stop flag is not set to the ON state). As a result, the game will not be controlled to a stop state during a jackpot game (or a small win game), and the jackpot game (small win game) will not be canceled/interrupted, so the profits that the player could have originally earned. It is possible to prevent disadvantages such as not being able to obtain.

However, even if a jackpot game is in progress (or a small win game is in progress), by executing the game stop process (S1520), the system is configured to control the game to stop (set the game stop flag to ON state). You can. In this case, in S1519, it is determined whether or not a round game is being executed, and on the condition that a round game is not being executed, a game stop process (S1520) is executed to control the game to be stopped (game It is desirable to configure the system so that the stop flag is set to the ON state. With this configuration, the player can at least earn the profits that can be earned in the round game being executed, and the game can be stopped immediately without waiting for the end of the jackpot (or the end of the small win). It becomes possible to migrate. In addition, regardless of whether a round game is being executed or not (by omitting the process of S1519), if the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (the difference ball counter is set to the second reference value (predetermined value "0") ), the game stop processing (S1520) may be immediately executed.

Next, a modification (Embodiment 1-2) regarding the control flow of the main control unit 520 equipped with a safety device will be described in detail below using FIGS. 4-2-1 to 4-2-3. Furthermore, the configuration may be a combination of the descriptions regarding the embodiments described above and the descriptions regarding the embodiments described later. In this way, the contents of each embodiment are not limited to individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments. Furthermore, in order to avoid redundant descriptions of the same contents as those described above, explanations will basically be omitted.

(Outside area game start setting process_safety device 2)
With reference to FIG. 4-2-1, a modification regarding the out-of-area game start setting process (S1503) will be described. FIG. 4-2-1 shows a flowchart regarding a modified form of the out-of-area game start setting process (S1503). Note that the processing in S1536 to S1537 and S1539 is the same as the description based on FIG. 4-1-2 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1538, the operating state flag is cleared (set to "0"). The operation status flag is set to various values depending on the value of the difference ball counter, and is used in a modified form of the safety device operation management process (S1512) and a modified form of the safety device counting process (S1528), which will be described later. By referring to the operating state flag, various processes related to the safety device are executed depending on the set value of the operating state flag.

In this way, by setting the operating state flag to "0" (S1538) in the out-of-area game start setting process (S1503) executed when the power is turned on, the operating state flag is cleared every time the power is turned on. The configuration is such that each process related to the game starts in the state where the game is performed.

(Safety device counting process_safety device 2)
A modification regarding the safety device counting process (S1528) will be described with reference to FIG. 4-2-2. FIG. 4-2-2 shows a flowchart regarding a modified form of the safety device counting process (S1528).

In S1540, it is determined whether the value of the operating state flag is "3". As a result, if it is determined that the value of the operating state flag is "3", the safety device counting process (S1528) is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the operating state flag is not "3", the process moves to a difference ball counter counting process (S1541).

In the difference ball counter counting process (S1541), when it is determined that a prize ball has occurred, an addition process is performed to add a value according to the number of prize balls from the difference ball counter, and it is determined that an out has occurred. In this case, a subtraction process is performed to subtract a value corresponding to the number of outs from the difference ball counter. Note that the difference ball counter counting process (S1531) described above is that when it is determined that a prize ball has occurred, an addition process is performed instead of a subtraction process, and when it is determined that an out has occurred, an addition process is performed. The difference is that the subtraction process is performed without any difference, but the other contents are the same as those related to the difference ball counter counting process (S1531) described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, in S1542, it is determined whether or not the ball difference counter is equal to or greater than the second reference value (195000). As a result, if it is determined that it is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the process moves to S1546. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not equal to or greater than the second reference value, the process moves to S1543.

When the process moves to S1543, it is determined whether or not the difference ball counter is equal to or greater than the first reference value (185000). As a result, if it is determined that it is equal to or greater than the first reference value, the operating state flag is set to "1" in S1549. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not equal to or greater than the first reference value, the operating state flag is set to "0" in S1549.

In addition, if it is determined in S1542 that the difference ball counter is equal to or higher than the second reference value and the process moves to S1546, whether the current gaming state is a jackpot game (or a small win game) is determined. It is determined whether As a result, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (or the small win game is in progress), the operating state flag is set to "2" in S1547. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (or the small win game is in progress), the operating state flag is set to "3" in S1548.

In this way, in the safety device counting process (S1528), the operating state flag is set (from "0" to "3") according to the value of the difference ball counter and the current gaming state. The operating state flag set in the safety device counting process (S1528) is utilized as a flag indicating the following states according to its own set value (“0” to “3”).

When the operating state flag = "0", it indicates that the difference ball counter = "0 to 184499". When the operating state flag = "1", it indicates that the difference ball counter = "184500 to 194999". When the operating state flag is "2", it indicates that the difference ball counter is "195,000 or more" and the current gaming state is a jackpot game (or a small win game). When the operating state flag is "3", it indicates that the difference ball counter is "195,000 or more" and the current gaming state is other than the jackpot game (or the small win game).

The operating state flag set here is referred to in the safety device operation management process (S1512) in Figure 4-2-3, which will be described later, and the safety device is The system is configured to perform various setting processes related to .

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the difference ball counter counting process (S1541) is executed only when it is determined in S1540 that the value of the operating state flag is not "3". Even when the flag is "2", the difference ball counter counting process (S1541) is executed. Therefore, even if the difference ball counter reaches the second reference value (195000), if the current gaming state is during a jackpot game (or during a small win game), the value of the difference ball counter is updated in S1541. Therefore, for example, by intentionally avoiding winning prize balls and increasing the number of outs, it is possible to adjust the value of the difference ball counter to be less than or equal to the second standard value (195000). There is. With this configuration, the activation of the safety device can be delayed, so for example, the activation of the safety device in the current jackpot game (or small win game) can be avoided, and the activation of the safety device in the next jackpot game (or small win game) can be avoided. This can be activated in a winning game). However, in order to prevent such delaying actions, the difference ball will be processed only if the value of the operation status flag is determined not to be "2" or more (if the difference ball counter = "0" or "1"). It may be configured to execute counter counting processing (S1541).

(Safety device operation management process_safety device 2)
Next, a modification regarding the safety device operation management process (S1512) will be described with reference to FIG. 4-2-3. FIG. 4-2-3 shows a flowchart regarding a modified form of the safety device counting process (S1512).

When the safety device operation management process (S1512) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the operation state flag is "3" (S1550). As a result, if it is determined that the value of the operating state flag is "3", a game stop process (S1551) is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the operating state flag is not "3", execution of the game stop process (S1551) is avoided and the process moves to S1552.

Here, the operating state flag referred to is created by the safety device counting process (S1528) shown in FIG. 4-2-2, and when the operating state flag = "3", the difference ball counter = "195000". This indicates that the current gaming state is other than the jackpot game (or the small win game). In other words, when the operating state flag is "3", it indicates that the safety device satisfies the operating conditions and can be controlled to the game stop state. In addition, if the operating state flag is other than "3" (when the operating state flag is "0", "1", or "2"), the safety device is inoperable and the game is in a stopped state and cannot be controlled. It is shown that.

Therefore, in S1550, only when it is determined that the value of the operating state flag is "3", the game is controlled to be stopped by executing the game stopping process (S1551). Further, the game stop processing (S1551) executed at this time is the same as the description based on FIG. 4-1-7 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the process moves to S1552, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the value of the operating state flag changes from "1" to "2". As a result, if it is determined that the timing has come when the value of the operating state flag changes from "1" to "2", a safety device operating warning command is transmitted to the production control unit 540 (S1553). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing when the value of the operating state flag changes from "1" to "2", execution of S1553 is avoided and the process moves to S1554.

Here, when the operating state flag = "1", the difference ball counter = "184500 to 194999", and when the operating state flag = "2", the difference ball counter = "195000" or more and the current game state indicates that a jackpot game is being played (or a small win game is being played). In other words, the timing at which the value of the operating state flag determined in S1552 changes from "1" to "2" is the timing when the value of the difference ball counter changes from a state of "184500" or more but less than "195000" to "195000" or more. This means that the current gaming state is a jackpot game (or a small win game).

In other words, when the value of the difference ball counter reaches "195000" during a jackpot game (or small win game), the operating state flag is set from "1" to "2", so at such timing Only, it is configured to transmit a safety device activation warning command to the production control unit 540 (S1553). Therefore, after the operation state flag is set from "1" to "2" and once the process of S1553 is performed (after the operation state flag = "2"), the safety device No activation warning commands are sent. However, as a result of the value of the difference ball counter being updated by the difference ball counter counting process (S1541), the operating status flag changes from "2" to "1", and as a result of further updating the value of the difference ball counter, the value of the difference ball counter is updated again. When the operating state flag changes from "1" to "2", a safety device operating warning command is transmitted to the production control section 540. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the safety device activation warning command may not be transmitted to the production control unit 540 when the activation state flag changes from "1" to "2" again.

Incidentally, the safety device activation warning command sent to the production control unit 540 in S1553 is the same as the content described in S1522 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the process moves to S1554, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the value of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1". As a result, if it is determined that the timing has come when the value of the operation state flag changes from "0" to "1", a safety device operation notice command is transmitted to the production control section 540 (S1555). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing when the value of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1", execution of S1555 is avoided and the safety device operation management process (S1512) is ended.

Here, when the operating state flag = "0", the difference ball counter = "0 to 184499", and when the operating state flag = "1", the difference ball counter = "184500 to 184999". It shows. In other words, the timing when the value of the operating state flag determined in S1554 changes from "0" to "1" is the timing when the value of the difference ball counter changes from a state of "0" or more and "184499" or less to "184500" or more. It means that it is in a changed state.

In other words, when the value of the difference ball counter reaches "184500", the operation state flag is set from "0" to "1", so only at such timing is it safe for the production control unit 540. It is configured to transmit a device operation advance notice command (S1555). Therefore, after the operation state flag is set from "0" to "1" and once the process of S1555 is performed (after the operation state flag = "1"), the safety device No activation notice command is sent. However, as a result of the value of the difference ball counter being updated by the difference ball counter counting process (S1541), the operating status flag changes from "1" to "0", and as a result of further updating the value of the difference ball counter, the value of the difference ball counter is updated again. When the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1", a safety device operating advance notice command is transmitted to the effect control section 540. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the safety device activation notice command may not be transmitted to the production control unit 540 when the operation state flag changes from "0" to "1" again.

Incidentally, the safety device activation notice command sent to the production control unit 540 in S1555 is the same as the content described in S1517 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of S1555 is completed, the safety device operation management process (S1512) is ended.

Next, a modification (Embodiment 1-3) regarding the control flow of the main control unit 520 equipped with a safety device will be described in detail below using FIGS. 4-3-1 to 4-3-3. Furthermore, the configuration may be a combination of the descriptions regarding the embodiments described above and the descriptions regarding the embodiments described later. In this way, the contents of each embodiment are not limited to individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments. Furthermore, in order to avoid redundant descriptions of the same contents as those described above, explanations will basically be omitted.

(Outside area game start setting process_safety device 3)
With reference to FIG. 4-3-1, a modification regarding the out-of-area game start setting process (S1503) will be described. FIG. 4-3-1 shows a flowchart regarding a modified form of the out-of-area game start setting process (S1503). Note that the processing in S1558 to S1559 and S1561 is the same as the description based on FIG. 4-1-2 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1560, the safety device activation flag is cleared (set to "0"). The safety device activation flag is set when it is determined that the value of the difference ball counter is a predetermined value (“0”) in the safety device counting process (S1528) described later.

In this embodiment, the safety device activation flag is cleared in this process (S1560) regardless of whether the power-on process involves RWM clear process (S1011) or the power-on process involves backup recovery process (S1014). is configured to be Therefore, even if the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), by performing the power-on process accompanied by the backup recovery process (S1014), you can play a jackpot game (or a small win game) or a symbol fluctuation game. It is now possible to clear the safety device activation flag while maintaining this information. As a result, even if, for example, the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (0) and the game can be controlled to stop (for example, the safety device activation flag is ON during a jackpot game), the backup By performing the power-on process accompanied by the recovery process (S1014), it is possible to avoid being controlled to a game stop state while continuing the game even after the power is restored.

In this way, in the out-of-area game start setting process (S1503) executed when the power is turned on, by clearing the safety device activation flag (setting it to "0") (S1560), the safety device is activated every time the power is turned on. It is configured to start each process related to the game with the device operation flag cleared.

(Timer interrupt processing_safety device 3)
Next, a modification of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4-1-3 will be described with reference to FIG. 4-3-2. FIG. 4-3-2 shows a flowchart regarding a modified form of timer interrupt processing. Note that the processing in S1025 to S1045 and S1509 to S1511 is the same as the description based on FIG. 4-1-3 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In S1562, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a jackpot game (or a small win game). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (or the small win game is in progress), execution of the processes of S1563 to S1564 is avoided and the process moves to the process of S1044. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player is not playing a jackpot game (or a small win game), a process (S1563) is performed to determine whether the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH).

If it is determined in S1562 that the jackpot game is in progress (or the small win game is in progress), the execution of the processes in S1563 to S1564 is avoided. ) is controlled so that the game stop flag is not set to the ON state (5AH) (not controlled to the game stop state) regardless of whether the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH). As a result, the game is controlled to be stopped during a jackpot game (or small win game), and the jackpot game (small win game) is canceled/interrupted, and the player loses the profits that he or she could have originally earned. This makes it possible to prevent disadvantages such as not being able to obtain them.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in S1562, the determination condition may be whether or not a round game is being executed. With this configuration, execution of the processing in S1563 to S1564 is avoided while the round game is being executed (because the game is not controlled to a stopped state while the round game is being executed), so if the process is executed during the jackpot game, Even if the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the player can at least earn the profits that can be earned in the round game being executed, and also without waiting for the end of the jackpot (or end of the small win). It becomes possible to immediately shift to the game stop state.

If it is determined in S1562 that the player is not playing a jackpot game (or a small win game), a process (S1563) is performed to determine whether the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH). As a result, if it is determined that the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH), a game stop flag is set (S1564). On the other hand, if it is determined that the safety device activation flag is not in the ON state (5AH), execution of the process of S1564 is avoided and the process moves to the process of S1044.

Here, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) when it is determined that the value of the difference ball counter is a predetermined value (“0”) in the safety device counting process (S1528). It is configured. In other words, the ON state of the safety device activation flag indicates that the difference ball counter has reached a predetermined value (“0”) and the safety device is in a state where it can be activated (functioned). Therefore, if it is determined in S1563 that the safety device activation flag is not in the ON state (5AH), the difference ball counter has not reached the predetermined value (“0”) and the safety device is activated (function ) indicates that the state is not possible, and in such a case, there is no need to control the game to a halt state, so execution of the process of S1564 is avoided.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1563 that the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH), the difference ball counter has reached a predetermined value (“0”) and the safety device can be activated (functioned). In such a case, the process of S1564 is executed to control the game to a stopped state.

As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1562 that the player is not playing a jackpot game (or a small win game), and it is determined that the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH) in the process of S1563. It is configured such that the process of S1564 for controlling the gaming stop state is executed only when the game is stopped. Therefore, even if the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (“0”) and the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH), if the jackpot game is in progress (or the small win game is in progress), S1563 to S1564 Since this process is not executed, the game is not controlled to be stopped until the jackpot game (or small win game) ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the above-mentioned out-of-area game start setting process (S1503), the difference ball counter is always initialized (S1559) and the safety device activation flag is cleared (S1560) when the power is turned on. Therefore, by performing a power reset (power off → power on) during a jackpot game (or a small win game), the game stop flag can be set (S1564) after the jackpot game (or small win game) ends. (The power reset turns the safety device activation flag into an OFF state, thereby avoiding execution of the process in S1564 through S1563). Therefore, when the power is reset, the game does not stop even after the end of the jackpot game (or small win game), and after the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the counting process of the difference ball counter from the initial value.

Further, in this embodiment, the safety device operation management process (S1512) is not executed in the timer interrupt process. Therefore, in the safety device operation management process (S1512), the value of the difference ball counter is determined (S1514 to S1515), the safety device activation flag is set (S1521), the safety device activation warning command is sent (S1522), the safety device Sending the activation notice command (S1517), determining the value of the difference ball counter (S1514 to S1515) among the game stop processing (S1520), setting the safety device activation flag (S1521), and sending the safety device activation warning command (S1522) ), the process of transmitting the safety device activation notice command (S1517) is configured to be executed in the safety device counting process (S1528), which will be described later. In this way, by shifting part of the timer interrupt processing provided in the program within the used area to the safety device counting process (S1528) provided in the program outside the used area, the capacity of the program within the used area is reduced. are doing. Further, in this embodiment, the game stop processing (S1520) is configured not to be executed. Therefore, the transmission of the game stop command (S1526) and the firing stop processing (S1527) are not executed, but for example, when the game stop flag is set (S1564), the transmission of the game stop command (S1526) and the firing stop processing are not executed. (S1527), etc. may be configured.

(Safety device counting process_safety device 3)
Next, a modification regarding the safety device counting process (S1528) will be described with reference to FIG. 4-3-3. FIG. 4-3-3 shows a flowchart regarding a modified form of the safety device counting process (S1528).

When the safety device counting process (S1528) is executed, first, it is determined whether the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH) (S1565). As a result, if it is determined that the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (=5AH), execution of the processes of S1566 to S1575 is avoided and the safety device counting process (S1528) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the safety device activation flag is not in the ON state (≠5AH), the process moves to S1566.

Since the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) when it is determined that the value of the difference ball counter is a predetermined value (“0”) (S1570), the safety device activation flag has already been set in S1565. When is in the ON state, the processing related to counting the difference ball counter (S1566 to S1575) is unnecessary, so that execution is avoided.

If it is determined in S1565 that the safety device activation flag is not in the ON state (≠5AH), a loop number setting process is performed (S1566). The number of loops set here includes various winning openings (special symbol 1 starting opening 38, special symbol 2 starting opening 39, upper left winning opening 40, middle left winning opening 41, lower left winning opening 42, right winning opening 43, top A value ("7") is set according to the number of large winning openings 44 and lower large winning openings 45).

And various winning holes (special symbol 1 starting hole 38, special symbol 2 starting hole 39, upper left winning hole 40, middle left winning hole 41, lower left winning hole 42, right winning hole 43, upper large winning hole 44, lower large winning hole Using a difference ball counter counting table (not shown) in which the number of prize balls for each opening (45) is specified, if the value of the loop number is "7", the number of prize balls (1 ), if the value of the number of loops is "6", the number of prize balls (1) in the special symbol 2 starting hole 39, and if the value of the number of loops is "5", the number of prize balls in the upper left prize hole 40 and the prize in the middle left If the value of the loop number is "4", the number of prize balls (5) in the lower left winning hole 42, and if the value of the loop number is "3", the number of winning balls on the right. The number of prize balls in the opening 43 (2), if the value of the loop number is "2", the number of prize balls in the upper large prize opening 44 (15), and if the value of the loop number is "1", the lower number The number of prize balls (10) in each of the big winning holes 45 is acquired from the difference ball counter counting table when a prize is won, and the number of prize balls is subtracted from the difference ball counter.

After completing the loop number setting process (S1566), next, the out number addition process is executed (S1567). Here, it is determined whether a ball has entered the out switch 47a, and only when it is determined that a ball has entered, a value corresponding to the number of outs that have occurred (1 out = 1 ball) is subtracted from the difference ball counter. It is composed of Here, when determining whether a ball has entered the out switch 47a, reference is made to the switch input data (switch edge data) of the out switch 47a stored in the in-use area RWM. Incidentally, the switch input data (switch edge data) of the out switch 47a stored in the in-use area RWM is created in the input management process (S1026) in the timer interrupt process, which is the in-use area program. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and switch input data (switch edge data) of the out switch 47a stored in the RWM outside the usage area may be referred to. Incidentally, the switch input data (switch edge data) of the out switch 47a stored in the out-of-use area RWM is created by the out-of-area switch update process (S1535), which is an out-of-use area program.

After the process of adding the number of outs (S1567) is completed, the process of subtracting the number of prize balls is then executed (S1568). Here, as mentioned above, using the number of loops and the difference ball counter counting table, only when it is determined that there is a prize in the winning hole corresponding to the current number of loops, the number of prize balls associated with the winning from the difference ball counter. is configured to subtract. Here, when determining whether a ball has entered the out switch 47a, switch input data (switch edge data) of each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a stored in the RWM in the use area See. By the way, the switch input data (switch edge data) of each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a stored in the RWM in the used area is the input in the timer interrupt processing which is the program in the used area. It is created in the management process (S1026). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the switch input data (switch edge data) of each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a stored in the RWM outside the use area may be referred to. By the way, the switch input data (switch edge data) of each winning switch 38a, 39a, 40a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a stored in the out-of-use area RWM is executed by the out-of-area switch update process (which is an out-of-use area program). S1535).

After completing the subtraction process for the number of prize balls (S1568), it is then determined whether the value of the difference ball counter is a predetermined value ("0") (S1569). As a result, if it is determined that the value of the difference ball counter is a predetermined value (“0”), the processes of S1570 to S1571 are executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the difference ball counter is not the predetermined value (“0”), execution of the processes of S1570 to S1571 is avoided and the process moves to the process of S1572.

If it is determined in S1569 that the value of the difference ball counter is a predetermined value ("0"), the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (S1570). Furthermore, a safety device activation warning command for warning that the safety device is activated is transmitted to the production control unit 540 (S1571).

Incidentally, the safety device activation warning command sent to the production control unit 540 in S1571 is the same as the content described in S1522 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in the process of S1572, it is determined whether the value of the difference ball counter is less than or equal to a predetermined value ("10000"). As a result, if it is determined that the value of the difference ball counter is less than or equal to the predetermined value ("10000"), the process of S1573 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the difference ball counter is not the predetermined value ("10000"), execution of the process of S1573 is avoided and the process moves to the process of S1574.

If it is determined in S1572 that the value of the difference ball counter is less than or equal to a predetermined value ("10000"), a safety device activation warning is issued to warn that the possibility of the safety device activation is approaching. The command is sent to the production control section 540 (S1573).

Incidentally, the safety device activation notice command sent to the production control unit 540 in S1573 is the same as the content described in S1517 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in the process of S1574, the number of loops is subtracted (S1574), and if it is determined that the number of loops is "0" in S1575, the safety device counting process (S1528) is ended. If it is determined that the number of loops is not "0", the process moves to S1568, and the processes of S1568 to S1575 are executed again.

In this way, in the safety device counting process (S1528), by repeatedly executing the processes of S1568 to S1575 until the number of loops becomes "0", , various winning openings specified in the difference ball counter counting table (special symbol 1 starting opening 38, special symbol 2 starting opening 39, upper left winning opening 40, middle left winning opening 41, lower left winning opening 42, right winning opening 43, upper The player selects the number of prize balls in the large winning hole 44 and the lower large winning hole 45), and when there is a prize, the selected number of prize balls is subtracted from the difference ball counter. Furthermore, it is configured to set a safety device activation flag and send necessary commands to the performance control section 540 in accordance with the result of subtracting the number of prize balls from the difference ball counter.

When repeatedly executing the processing of S1568 to S1575 until the number of loops becomes "0", for example, if the current number of loops is "4" and it is determined that there is a prize in the lower left winning slot 42, the difference ball counter counts. The number of prize balls (5) of the lower left prize opening 42 specified in the table is obtained, and the obtained number of prize balls (5) is subtracted from the difference ball counter. As a result, when the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (“0”), the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, and a safety device activation warning command is transmitted to the performance control unit 540. In such a case, since the safety device activation flag is already set to the ON state, no further counting processing is necessary; however, in this embodiment, the counting process continues until the number of loops reaches "0". The configuration is such that the processes from S1568 to S1575 are repeated. This eliminates program branch processing and reduces program capacity. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the safety device counting process (S1528) may be configured to end when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, regardless of whether there is a remaining number of loops. In this case, it is possible to avoid unnecessary repetitive processing depending on the number of remaining loops.

In addition, in the safety device counting process (S1528) of this embodiment, prior to the loop process (S1568 to S1575) for subtracting the number of prize balls from the difference ball counter, the process for adding the number of outs from the difference ball counter is performed. (S1567) is configured to be executed in order to prevent inconsistency in the value of the difference ball counter as a result of the counting process. For example, suppose that when a loop process (S1568 to S1575) for subtracting the number of prize balls from the difference ball counter is executed first, the value of the difference ball counter finally becomes "0". In this case, since the value of the difference ball counter has reached "0", the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, but after that, the process (S1567) for adding the number of outs from the difference ball counter is executed. As a result, the value of the difference ball counter is updated from "0" to "1". As a result, a contradiction occurred in that the safety device activation flag was set to the ON state even though the value of the difference ball counter was "1" (even though the value of the difference ball counter was not "0"). Put it away. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that, as in this embodiment, the process (S1567) for adding the number of outs from the difference ball counter is executed first, then the loop process for subtracting the number of prize balls from the difference ball counter can be performed later. As a result of executing (S1568 to S1575), the final value of the difference ball counter will be "1", so the safety device activation flag will not be set to the ON state, and the above-mentioned contradiction will not occur. do not have. In this way, prior to the loop process (S1568 to S1575) for subtracting the number of prize balls from the difference ball counter, the counting process is performed by executing the process (S1567) for adding the number of outs from the difference ball counter. In addition to making it possible to avoid the above contradiction, the setting of the safety device activation flag is postponed to the next safety device counting process (S1528), and the start of the game stop state can be delayed. It is possible to give the player a playable state as much as possible.

Next, a modification (Embodiment 1-4) regarding the control flow of the main control unit 520 equipped with a safety device will be described in detail below using FIGS. 4-4-1 and 4-4-2. Furthermore, the configuration may be a combination of the descriptions regarding the embodiments described above and the descriptions regarding the embodiments described later. In this way, the contents of each embodiment are not limited to individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments. Furthermore, in order to avoid redundant descriptions of the same contents as those described above, explanations will basically be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing_safety device 4)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4-4-1, a modification of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4-3-2 will be described. FIG. 4-4-1 shows a flowchart regarding a modified form of timer interrupt processing. Note that the processing in S1025 to S1045 and S1510 to S1511 is the same as the description based on FIG. 4-3-2 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In S1575, it is determined whether the game stop flag is in the ON state (5AH). As a result, if it is determined that it is in the ON state (=5AH), the process moves to S1576. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the ON state (≠5AH), execution of the processes of S1576 and S1510 to S1511 is avoided, and the process moves to the process of S1025.

In S1576, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a jackpot game (or a small win game). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (or the small win game is in progress), execution of the processes of S1510 to S1511 is avoided and the process moves to S1025. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player is not playing a jackpot game (or a small win game), the processes of S1510 to S1511 are executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is determined in S1575 that the game stop flag is in the ON state (5AH), and it is determined in S1576 that the current gaming state is not a jackpot game (or a small win game). The configuration is such that only when the game is stopped, the processing for controlling the game to be stopped (S1510 to S1511) is executed.

In S1577, a determination process is performed to determine whether the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH). As a result, if it is determined that the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH), a game stop flag is set (S1578). On the other hand, if it is determined that the safety device activation flag is not in the ON state (5AH), execution of the process of S1578 is avoided and the process moves to the process of S1044.

In this embodiment, unlike the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4-3-2 described above, when setting the game stop flag, it is not determined whether or not a jackpot game is being played (or a small win game is being played). , the game stop flag is configured to be set only on the condition that the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (5AH) (S1577 to S1578). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process in Figure 4-3-2, by performing a power reset (power off → power on) during a jackpot game (or a small win game), after the jackpot game (or small win game) ends, , it was possible to avoid setting the game stop flag (S1564), but in this embodiment, even during a jackpot game (or during a small win game), the game stop flag could not be set (S1564). Since the settings are made, even if the power is reset (power off → power on) during a jackpot game (or a small win game), the setting of the game stop flag cannot be avoided. Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the game stop flag is set (S1578) during a jackpot game (or a small win game), the current gaming state is changed to a jackpot game (or a small win game) in S1576. If the game is in progress), the process for controlling the game to a stopped state (S1510 to S1511) is avoided, so the jackpot game (or small win game) will not be interrupted/cancelled. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the jackpot game (or small win game) is interrupted/cancelled.

Further, in this embodiment, the safety device operation management process (S1512) is not executed in the timer interrupt process. Therefore, by executing the safety device counting process (S1528) in FIG. It is configured to process the transmission of a warning command (S1522) and the transmission of a safety device activation notice command (S1517). In addition, in this embodiment, since the game stop process (S1520) is not performed, the game stop command transmission (S1526) and the firing stop process (S1527) are not executed. When executing the processing (S1510 to S1511), it may be configured to transmit a game stop command (S1526), stop firing processing (S1527), etc.

(Timer interrupt outside area processing_safety device 4)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4-4-2, a modification regarding the timer interrupt outside-area processing (S1040) shown in FIG. 4-1-4 will be described. FIG. 4-4-2 shows a flowchart regarding a modification of the timer interrupt intra-area processing (S1040). In addition, in this embodiment, only the processing of S1579 to S1580 is added, and the other processing (S1050 to S1055, S1532 to S1535) is the same as the description based on the above-mentioned Figure 4-1-4. Since they are similar, the explanation will be omitted.

In S1579, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a jackpot game (or a small win game). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (or the small win game is in progress), the process moves to an out-of-use area LED update process (S1052). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (or the small win game is in progress), the process moves to S1533.

Further, in S1580, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a jackpot game (or a small win game). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (or the small win game is in progress), the process moves to an out-of-area switch update process (S1535). On the other hand, if it is determined that the player is not playing a jackpot game (or a small win game), the process moves to S1054.

Here, in the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment, as described above, when setting the game stop flag, it is not determined whether or not a jackpot game is being played (or a small win game is being played), and the safety device activation flag is not determined. The game stop flag is configured to be set only on the condition that it is in the ON state (5AH) (S1577 to S1578). Therefore, even during a jackpot game (or a small win game), there is a possibility that the game stop flag will be in the ON state (5AH), so S1576 will cause the game to stop during a jackpot game (or a small win game). The processing for control (S1510 to S1511) is not executed.

Therefore, regarding the timer interrupt outside area processing (S1040), it is necessary to control so that the game does not stop during the jackpot game (or during the small win game). For example, when the game stop flag is in the ON state (5AH) However, if it is determined in S1579 that the current gaming state is in a jackpot game (or in a small win game), the process in S1533 is avoided. ), the performance display LED is prevented from being turned off.

In addition, if it is determined in S1580 that the current gaming state is a jackpot game (or a small win game), by executing the process of S1535, during a jackpot game (or a small win game), The base value displayed on the performance display LED is not updated.

Regarding the control flow of the main control unit equipped with the safety device described so far, descriptions regarding each embodiment (Embodiment 1-1, Embodiment 1-2, Embodiment 1-3, Embodiment 1-4) are as follows: It is also possible to have a configuration in which one or more of them are combined. Moreover, the contents described in each embodiment are not limited to only individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments.

Next, a time chart (Embodiment 2-1) regarding the operation of the safety device, which is a characteristic part of the present invention, will be described in detail using FIG. 5-1-1. Furthermore, the configuration may be a combination of the descriptions regarding the embodiments described above and the descriptions regarding the embodiments described later. In this way, the contents of each embodiment are not limited to individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments. Furthermore, in order to avoid redundant descriptions of the same contents as those described above, explanations will basically be omitted.

(If the safety device is activated during a jackpot game)
In Figure 5-1-1, a jackpot game is started (ST1), and during the jackpot game, the safety device activation flag is turned on (ST2), after which the round game ends (ST3), and the safety device is activated ( A time chart shows a series of steps from ST4) to the time when the gaming machine 1 enters the game stop state and the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). Furthermore, FIG. 5-5-1 shows how the main control section 520, production control section 540, and payout control section 510 respectively control the various functions shown below in the course of ST1 to ST5. There is.

In FIG. 5-1-1, various functions controlled by the main control unit 520 include functions related to the symbol display device 76 (special symbol display LEDs 76a, 76b, special symbol storage display LEDs 76c, 76d, normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e). , lighting control of various LEDs such as the normal symbol memory display LED 76f, right-handed display LED 76g, etc.), functions related to the performance display LED 521 (lighting control of the 7-segment display, counting the number of wins and outs, processing of calculating the base value) , functions related to the electric chew support (operation control of the special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72), functions relating to the big prize openings 44 and 45 (operation control of the winning opening opening and closing solenoids 70 and 71), functions concerning external terminals (controlling the operation of the special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72), It describes functions related to safety devices (output control), functions related to safety devices (difference ball counting processing), and functions related to sight-fire test signals (output control of safety device activation signals and safety device activation signals).

In addition, various functions controlled by the production control unit 540 include functions related to the variable display device 95 (lighting control of special symbol variation LEDs and normal symbol variation LEDs), functions related to the image display means 31 (mini symbol 103a, right-handed display, Error display, pending display 104a, 105a, special symbol storage number display 106a, 106b, mode display, safety device activation display, display control related to performance display), functions related to LEDs 63a, 64a (lighting control related to safety device activation notification), movable parts 30a and 30b (execution control of movable effects) and adjustment functions (switching control between enabling and disabling the volume adjustment button 16 and the light intensity adjustment button 17) are described.

In addition, various functions controlled by the payout control unit 510 include a payout control function (control of enabling/disabling of the ball lending button 20 and the return button 21, execution control regarding prize ball payout operation), a firing control function (control of the ball lending button 20, control of enabling/disabling of the return button 21, and execution control regarding the prize ball payout operation), (enable/disable switching control).

The embodiment shown in FIG. 5-1-1 shows an example in which the gaming state changes from the jackpot gaming state to the gaming stop state. The jackpot game shown here is configured from 1 round game (1R game) to 10 round game (10R game), with an inter-round interval (INT) between each round game, and finally a jackpot end interval (jackpot game). end INT) is executed. When the jackpot game ends in this way, the game immediately transitions to a stopped state. In this way, the reason why the game is stopped after the jackpot game is over is because the safety device activation flag is controlled to be in the ON state (≈difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value) during the jackpot game.

Next, the control details of various functions controlled by the main control unit 520 in the course of ST1 to ST5 will be explained.

The special symbol fluctuation display LEDs 76a and 76b of the symbol display device 76 are stopped and displayed in a winning mode (jackpot stop light emitting pattern) from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to stop, the special symbol fluctuation display LEDs 76a and 76b are not displayed (lights out) until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). , is controlled to remain hidden (unlit). In this way, in the game stop state, the special symbol variation display LEDs 76a and 76b are controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next special symbol variation game will not be executed. ing.

Next, the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d are lit in a display mode according to the current number of pending memories from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to stop, the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d are not displayed (lights out) until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). , is controlled to remain hidden (unlit). In this way, in the game stop state, the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d are controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), so that the reserved memory disappears for the player and the next special symbol variation game is executed. Indicates that it is not possible.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e can be lit in a fluctuation display mode (fluctuation light emission pattern) from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). If the lottery result is a win, a win display (win stop light emitting pattern) is stopped and displayed. The example shown in Figure 5-1-1 shows an example in which the display stops with a win display (win stop light emitting pattern), but if the lottery result is a loss, it stops with a lose display (loss stop light emission pattern). It will be displayed. In addition, not only when the light is displayed in the fluctuating display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern), but when the right gate switch 46a (normal symbol starting port switch) does not detect a game ball, the normal symbol fluctuating display LED 76e will be stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the previous lottery result. When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to stop, the LED 76e for normal symbol fluctuation display becomes non-display (unlit state) and remains non-display until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). (lights out). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol variation display LED 76e is controlled to be non-displayed (unlit state), thereby indicating to the player that the next normal symbol variation game is not to be executed. .

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-1-1, the safety device is activated (ST4) at the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is stopped and displayed as a hit display (hit stop light emission pattern), and the game is stopped. controlled. When the safety device is activated (ST4) in this way, it is immediately controlled to be hidden (lights out) without waiting for the stop display time (confirmed display time) of the hit display (hit stop light emission pattern) to elapse. It will be done. In addition, not only the win display (win stop light emission pattern) but also the stop display time (determined display time) of the loss display (loss stop light emission pattern) when the stop display is performed on the loss display (loss stop light emission pattern). ), the display is immediately controlled to be non-displayed (unlit). In addition, if the light is displayed in a fluctuating display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern), it will immediately disappear (turn off) without waiting for the fluctuating display time to elapse (the fluctuating normal symbol fluctuating game will end). (state).

Next, the normal symbol storage display LED 76f is lit in a display mode according to the current number of normal symbols held in memory from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to stop, the normal symbol memory display LED 76f will not be displayed (unlit state) and will not be displayed until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). (lights out). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol memory display LED 76f is controlled to be non-display (lights out), so that the normal symbol pending memory disappears for the player, and the next normal symbol variation game is executed. Indicates that it is not possible.

Next, the right-handed firing display LED 76g is lit in a display mode indicating that right-handed firing is advantageous from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is stopped, the right-handed display LED 76g will not be displayed (unlit) and will remain hidden (unlit) until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). It is controlled to maintain the light-off state). In this way, in the game stop state, the right-handed firing display LED 76g is controlled to be non-displayed (unlit state), indicating that right-handed firing is no longer advantageous.

Next, the 7-segment display of the performance display LED 521 is controlled to display the base value from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to stop, the 7-segment display turns off (or displays an error (e.g. "E" display)), and the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. It is controlled to maintain the off state (or error display (eg, "E" display)) until it turns off (ST5). In this way, when the game is stopped, the 7-segment display is controlled to turn off (or display an error display (e.g. "E" display)), thereby displaying the current base value even though the game is not possible. It prevents you from doing it. Here, in the embodiment shown in Figure 5-1-1, the 7-segment display was turned off (or an error display (e.g. "E" display)) when the game was controlled to be stopped. However, the display control of the base value may be performed even when the game is stopped. This makes it possible to check the base value even when the game is stopped.

Next, the counting process of the number of wins and the number of outs by the performance display LED 521 is effectively executed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). Here, during the jackpot game, the process of counting the number of wins is not performed, but only the process of counting the number of outs is performed. When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to be stopped, the counting process of the number of wins and the number of outs on the performance display LED 521 is not executed until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). In this way, the reason why the performance display LED 521 does not count the number of wins and outs in the game stop state is because the game stop state is configured so that no games can be played. This is because it is considered that no outs will occur. Therefore, by disabling the counting process of the number of winnings and the number of outs, the illegal number of winnings and the number of outs are counted, and the base value is prevented from being fraudulently manipulated. In addition, in the game stop state, even if game balls enter the winning holes 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, and 45, the prize balls will not be paid out to the player. , it is desirable that the base value counting process for winning a prize is not performed. However, even when the game is stopped, the performance display LED 521 may be configured to count the number of wins and outs. In this case, it is desirable to enable the firing of game balls at least even when the game is stopped. . Further, even when the performance display LED 521 performs the process of counting the number of wins and the number of outs, prize balls are not paid out to the player.

Next, the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521 is effectively executed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to a halt state, the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521 is not executed until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). In this way, the reason why the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521 is not executed in the game stop state is because the game stop state is configured such that no games can be played, and under such a situation, winnings and outs occur in the first place. This is because there is nothing to do. Therefore, by disabling the base value calculation process, the base value is calculated based on the illegal number of wins and the number of outs, and the base value is prevented from being fraudulently manipulated. In addition, in the game stop state, even if game balls enter the winning holes 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, and 45, the prize balls will not be paid out to the player. , it is desirable that the base value calculation process for winning a prize is also not performed. However, even in the game stop state, the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521 may be executed, and in this case, it is desirable to enable the firing of game balls at least even in the game stop state. Furthermore, even when the base value calculation process for the performance display LED 521 is executed, prize balls are not paid out to the player.

Next, the opening/closing control of the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 related to the operation of the electric chew support function is effectively executed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). The special symbol 2 starting port 39 is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state according to the result of variation of the symbol variation display LED 76e. When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to stop, the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is controlled to the OFF state, thereby controlling the special symbol 2 starting port 39 to the closed state. . In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-1-1, the safety device is activated (ST4) when the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is controlled to the ON state and the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is in the open state. ing. In this case, the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is controlled to be in the closed state without waiting for the elapse of the preset opening time. In this way, when the safety device is activated (ST4), the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is controlled to the OFF state, and the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is closed, thereby preventing the subsequent game stop state. This prevents the game ball from entering the special symbol 2 starting port 39. Then, when the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is controlled to be closed upon activation of the safety device (ST4), the closed state is maintained until the power to the gaming machine 1 is shut off (ST5).

Next, the opening/closing control of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoids 70 and 71 for opening and closing the big winning openings 44 and 45 is effectively executed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). and is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state depending on the progress of the round game. When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to be stopped, the big prize opening opening/closing solenoids 70 and 71 are always controlled to be in the OFF state. Then, until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5), control is performed to maintain the closed state of the grand prize openings 44 and 45. When the safety device is activated (ST4) in this way, by controlling the big winning opening opening/closing solenoids 70 and 71 to the OFF state and closing the big winning openings 44 and 45, in the subsequent game stop state. Game balls are prevented from entering the grand prize openings 44 and 45.

Next, the output control of the security signal of the external terminal is controlled to a non-output state from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the security signal is controlled to the output state, and thereafter, the output of the security signal is maintained until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). controlled to do so. When the safety device is activated (ST4) in this manner, the security signal is controlled to be output, thereby making it possible to notify the hall computer that the game has been stopped.

Next, the difference ball counting process of the difference ball counter related to the safety device is effectively executed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device activation flag turns ON (ST2). By executing the difference ball counting process, when the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value and the safety device activation flag becomes ON (ST2), the process continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is shut off. (ST5) The difference ball counting process is not executed. This is because once the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), the game will transition to the stop state after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the subsequent value of the difference ball counter. This is because it is considered unnecessary to execute the counting process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a difference ball counting process of a difference ball counter is executed. Specifically, it may be configured to be executed effectively after the safety device activation flag is turned ON (ST2) until the safety device is activated (ST4), or the safety device activation flag may be It may be configured to be effectively executed after the ON state (ST2) is turned on until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). However, in any case, the safety device activation flag, which was once set from the OFF state to the ON state, may change from the ON state to the OFF state again as a result of executing the difference ball counting process of the difference ball counter. It is desirable to configure the system so that it does not occur. As a result, after the safety device activation flag is in the ON state, by controlling the number of wins and the number of outs, the safety device activation flag is changed (ON state → OFF state) and the activation of the safety device is delayed or canceled. It is possible to prevent this behavior.

Next, the output processing of the safety device pre-activation signal related to the sight test signal is controlled to an output enabled state from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). Here, the output enabled state means that it is controlled to be output when a predetermined condition is met (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)). When a predetermined condition is satisfied (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (eg, 90000)), a safety device pre-operation signal is output as a sighting test signal from that point on.

Here, the test firing test signal is a signal for outputting necessary information in the certification test of the gaming machine 1 to an external testing device. Therefore, these signals are not output to the outside from the gaming machine 1 shipped to the market and installed in the hall. As mentioned above, the safety device pre-operation signal is output when a predetermined condition is met (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)), and this safety device pre-operation signal is output. This makes it possible to notify the test equipment that the safety device is about to be activated (ST4). Incidentally, in the embodiment shown in Figure 5-1-1, it is described that the safety device pre-operation signal can be output after the start of the jackpot game (ST1), but in reality, the signal before the activation of the safety device can be output after the start of the jackpot game (ST1). Even before ST1), the safety device pre-operation signal is in a state where it can be output.

Also, after a predetermined condition is met (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)) and a safety device activation signal is output, the predetermined condition is not met (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)). (below a predetermined value (for example, 90000)), it is desirable to control the safety device pre-operation signal from an output state to a non-output state. In this case, the configuration may be such that the output state is immediately switched to the non-output state, or the output state is maintained for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 500ms, 30s, etc.) and then switched to the non-output state. It may be configured as follows. After that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied again (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (eg 90000)), the safety device pre-operation signal is controlled to be in the output state. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (the value of the difference ball counter is less than a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)) after the safety device pre-operation signal is output, the safety device The configuration may be such that the pre-operation signal is maintained in the output state.

The output processing of the safety device pre-activation signal is switched from the output state to the non-output state when the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to be in the stopped state. At this time, it may be configured to immediately switch from the output state to the non-output state, or it may be configured to maintain the output state for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 500ms, 30s, etc.) and then switch to the non-output state. It may be configured as follows. Thereafter, the non-output state is maintained until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). As mentioned above, the purpose of the safety device pre-activation signal is to notify the test equipment that the safety device is about to activate (ST4), so the safety device has already activated (ST4). Since there is no need to output in the game stop state, it is desirable to leave it in the non-output state.

In addition, the output processing of the signal before safety device activation is enabled until the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), and after the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), it is in a non-output state. It may also be configured to control. At this time, it may be configured to immediately switch from the output state to the non-output state when the safety device activation flag turns ON (ST2), or for a predetermined period of time (e.g. After maintaining the output state (500ms, 30s, etc.), it may be configured to switch to the non-output state. With this configuration, the safety device activation pre-activation signal indicates that the condition for the safety device activation flag to be in the ON state is approaching (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95000)). This makes it possible to notify the test equipment in advance.

In addition, the safety device pre-operation signal is to be output when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000), but if the value of the difference ball counter exceeds the predetermined value (e.g. 90000). It may be configured to output the output all the time, or it may be output only for a predetermined time (e.g. 500ms, 30s, etc.) when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000). It may be configured to do so.

Next, the output processing of the safety device activation signal related to the sight test signal is controlled to a non-output state from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). After the safety device is activated (ST4), the output state is maintained until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output may be configured to be output for a predetermined period of time (eg, 500 ms, 30 s, etc.) after the safety device is activated (ST4). After the safety device is activated (ST4), a safety device activation signal is output when the game is controlled to stop, indicating that the safety device has been activated for the test device (≒ the game is stopped). control).

Further, the safety device activation signal may be configured to be output when the safety device activation flag is turned ON (ST2). At this time, it may be configured to immediately switch from the output state to the non-output state, or it may be configured to maintain the output state for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 500ms, 30s, etc.) and then switch to the non-output state. It may be configured as follows. Further, in this case, it is desirable to stop outputting the safety device pre-activation signal at the timing when the safety device activation signal is output. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the output of the safety device pre-activation signal may be maintained until the safety device activation timing (ST4).

Next, the control contents of various functions controlled by the effect control section 540 in the course of ST1 to ST5 will be explained.

The special symbol variable LED of the variable display device 95 is displayed in a stop display mode (stop light emission pattern or stop light extinguishing pattern) from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to stop, the special symbol variation LED will not be displayed (unlit) and will remain undisplayed (unlit) until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). (If the stop display mode is a stop light-off pattern, the light remains off even after the game is stopped). In this way, in the game stop state, the special symbol variation LED is controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next special symbol variation game will not be executed.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation LED can be lit in a fluctuating display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern) from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4), and the normal symbol It is displayed in a variable display mode or a stationary display mode in response to (synchronized with) the lottery result of the variable game (variation mode of the LED 76e for normal symbol variation display). When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to stop, the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e becomes non-display (unlit state) and remains non-displayed until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). It is controlled to maintain the display (unlit state). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol variation display LED 76e is controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next normal symbol variation game will not be executed. There is.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-1-1, the safety device is activated (ST4) at the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is displayed in the stop display mode, and the game is controlled to stop. When the safety device is activated (ST4) in this way, it is immediately controlled to be non-displayed (lights out) without waiting for the stop display time (determined display time) to elapse. In addition, if the light is displayed in a fluctuating display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern), it will immediately disappear (turn off) without waiting for the fluctuating display time to elapse (the fluctuating normal symbol fluctuating game will end). (state).

Next, the mini symbols 103a displayed on the image display means 31 are displayed in a stop display mode (a hit stop pattern such as "777") from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). be done. When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to be stopped, the mini symbol 103a is controlled to be hidden and remains hidden until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). controlled as follows. In this way, in the game stop state, the mini symbols 103a of the image display means 31 are controlled to a non-display state, thereby indicating to the player that the next special symbol variation game will not be executed.

Next, the right-handed display displayed on the image display means 31 is a display mode (right-handed shot) indicating that right-handed firing is advantageous from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). Displayed in a display format that encourages firing. When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is stopped, the right-handed display is controlled to be hidden and remains hidden until the power to gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). controlled as follows. In this way, in the game stop state, the right-handed firing display is controlled to a non-display state, indicating that right-handed firing is no longer advantageous.

Next, the error display displayed on the image display means 31 is displayed until the safety device is activated (ST4) from the start of the jackpot game (ST1), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and then the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. (ST5), the error contents (RWM initialization, ball jam, out of supply, counting abnormality, disconnection, door opening, prize opening error, radio wave error, magnetic error, etc.) are controlled to be able to be reported. Here, regarding the error display, the reason why it is possible to notify even when the game is stopped is to accurately notify the content of the error that is occurring even when the game is stopped. Therefore, if an error display is displayed during a jackpot game, the safety device is activated (ST4), and even if the game is stopped, the error display that is currently displayed will continue to be displayed. be done. In this way, by continuing to display the error even after the activation of the safety device (ST4), it is possible to easily understand and clear the content of the error that is occurring even after shifting to the game stop state.

Further, it is desirable to configure the system so that no new error display (error notification) is executed for a new error that occurs after the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to be stopped. This is because if the game is controlled to be in a stopped state, subsequent gaming activities are restricted, so under such circumstances there is a low possibility of errors occurring (it is unlikely that a wrongdoing will occur in the first place), and new This is because it is considered that there is little need to perform error display (error notification). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that an error display (error notification) regarding a newly occurring error is executed in the game stop state. In this case, it becomes possible to accurately notify the content of the error that has occurred even when the game is stopped. In addition, only for specific errors (those that affect the player's profits such as ball jams, out of supply, and counting abnormalities), an error display (error The system may also be configured to perform notifications. Further, the specific error is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but may be one related to a wrongdoing such as a disconnection of a wire, an open door, a winning slot error, a radio wave error, a magnetic error, etc.

In addition, the error display can notify the error details from the start of the jackpot game (ST1), when the safety device is activated (ST4), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and after that, the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to notify the error details from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). In this case, when the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is stopped, the error display is hidden and remains hidden until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). You can. In this case, if there is an error display being performed during a jackpot game, the safety device may be activated (ST4) and the display may be switched to non-display immediately when the game is stopped, or the display may be switched to non-display in advance. The display may be continued even after the game is stopped for a predetermined display time (eg, 30 seconds).

Moreover, the above-described content is not limited to error display, but may be similarly applied to error notification using LEDs or audio. For example, if error notification is performed using not only an error display but also an LED or sound, a safety device is activated (ST4) from the start of a jackpot game (ST1), the game is controlled to be stopped, and then, The error notification may be configured to be possible until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). Furthermore, the other configurations described above may be similarly applied to error notification using LEDs or audio.

In addition, only the error display can be displayed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and then the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). However, the error notification using LED or sound may be configured to be able to notify the error from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). For example, if a specific error (RWM initialization, ball jam, out of supply, counting abnormality, disconnection, door opening, winning slot error, radio wave error, magnetic error, etc.) occurs, a jackpot game will start (ST1). Until the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to stop, the error will be notified by error display, LED and/or sound, and after the game is controlled to stop, only the error will be displayed. The LED and/or sound may be controlled to a game stop state notification mode (LED: lighting pattern or light off pattern, sound: with notification sound, may be without notification sound) indicating that the game has been stopped. . Thereby, it is possible to appropriately notify the error display and the fact that the game is being controlled to be stopped. Further, at this time, the image display means 31 may be configured to display an error display and a game stop state notification image indicating that the game is being controlled to a stop state. Regarding error notification using LEDs and audio, the safety device is activated (ST4) from the start of the jackpot game (ST1), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and then until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off ( ST5) It may be configured to be able to notify an error, and the error display may be configured to be able to display an error from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4).

In addition, the error display that is displayed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4), the safety device is activated (ST4), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and then the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. The display mode of the error display displayed until the cutoff (ST5) may be configured to be different. This makes it possible to display errors according to the gaming status. Specifically, the error display that is displayed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4) will be displayed in a location, size, and display that takes into account the placement relationship with other information display images related to the game. Regarding the content, the error display that is displayed after the safety device is activated (ST4), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and then until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5), there are relatively few restrictions regarding the display. The display location, display size, and display content may be configured to be displayed in an easy-to-identify manner. For example, when the game is stopped (after the safety device is activated), the background image becomes a solid black image, so that the error display contents can be more easily identified than during the game (before the safety device is activated). good.

Next, the pending display 104a, 105a displayed on the image display means 31 is the current pending display indicated by the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c, 76d from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). Control is performed to display pending images according to the number of stored images. When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is stopped, the hold display on the image display means 31 is controlled to be hidden and remains hidden until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). controlled to maintain the state. In this way, in the game stop state, the pending displays 104a and 105a of the image display means 31 are controlled to a non-display state, so that the player's pending memory disappears and the next special symbol variation game is not executed. It shows that.

Next, the special symbol memory number displays 106a and 106b displayed on the image display means 31 are indicated by the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). It is controlled to display the number of pending items (for example, display a numerical value of "0" to "4") according to the current number of pending memories. When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to stop, the special symbol storage number displays 106a and 106b of the image display means 31 are controlled to a non-display state, and the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. It is controlled to maintain the hidden state until (ST5). In this way, in the game stop state, the special symbol storage number display 106a, 106b of the image display means 31 is controlled to a non-display state, so that the reserved storage number disappears for the player and the next special symbol variation game is started. Indicates that it is not being executed.

Further, the special symbol memory number displays 106a and 106b may be configured to continue to be displayed even when a safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to be stopped. In this case, before the safety device is activated (ST4), the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d display the number of reserved pieces according to the current number of reserved pieces (for example, any number from "0" to "4"). After the safety device is activated (ST4), it is desirable to switch the display to "0" indicating that there is no pending memory number.

Regarding the pending display 104a, 105a or the special symbol storage number display 106a, 106b displayed on the image display means 31, when the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to be stopped, only one of them is displayed. It may be configured such that the display is controlled to be in a non-display state, and the other display continues to be in a display state. For example, the pending displays 104a and 105a may be in a non-display state, and the special symbol storage number displays 106a and 106b may be in a display state, or vice versa.

Next, regarding the mode display displayed on the image display means 31, from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) to the end of the round game (ST3), the current gaming state (e.g., the fact that the jackpot game state is in effect, the jackpot game state, etc.) A display image indicating the type of state (10 round jackpot, etc.) is controlled to be displayed. From the timing when the round game ends (ST3), the safety device is activated (ST4), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and the mode display is in a hidden state until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). controlled by. In addition, the mode display is not limited to the current gaming state, but also the next gaming state (if the game does not stop, the display of the mode that was scheduled to change after the jackpot ends (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state) In any case, from the timing when the round game ends (ST3), the safety device is activated (ST4), the game is controlled to be stopped, and the gaming machine 1 It is desirable that the mode display be controlled to a non-display state until the power is cut off (ST5).As a result, when the game is stopped, the current gaming state may be restricted or It is possible to suggest that the next gaming state will not occur.

Furthermore, the mode display may be configured to be displayable from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). In this case, for example, during the jackpot end INT, the next gaming state (if the gaming stop state does not occur, the mode to which the jackpot was scheduled to be shifted to after the jackpot ends (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state, etc.), A display image that suggests them) may be displayed.As a result, after the jackpot ends INT, the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game stops, but the game stops. It becomes possible to notify the player of the mode display that was scheduled to be shifted to if the safety device had not been activated previously.

Next, the safety device activation display displayed on the image display means 31 is a trigger for the safety device activation flag to be in the ON state from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2). The system is controlled so that a notice of operation can be displayed indicating that the operation is imminent. The activation notice display is configured to start displaying when a predetermined condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)), and when the display starts, the safety device The display is configured to be displayed continuously until the activation flag is in the ON state (ST2). In addition, if a predetermined condition (the value of the difference ball counter is a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)) is not satisfied (the value of the difference ball counter is less than a predetermined value (90000), etc.) after starting the operation notice display, , the operation notice display is controlled to be in a non-display state. In addition, the operation notice display is configured to display a numerical value based on the current value of the difference ball counter, for example, "Current number of difference balls / 950000 (predetermined value at which the safety device activation flag is in the ON state)" As shown in the figure, the current number of differential balls is constantly updated and displayed, and the numerical value until the safety device activation flag is turned on is displayed so that it can be grasped in real time. Furthermore, the counting of the difference number of balls is not limited to constant updating, but may be configured to be updated every predetermined unit (10, 100, 1000, etc.), for example. Further, the update unit may be changed, for example, the update unit may be changed as it approaches a predetermined value (95000) (for example, from 1000 to 100 to 10). In addition, when displaying the operation notice, the main control unit 520 sends a command to the production control unit 540 with information regarding the number of outs and the number of prize balls, and the production control unit 540 receives the information regarding the number of outs and the number of prize balls. may be used to perform counting processing regarding the current number of difference balls. In this case, the main control 520 may send a command to the production control unit 540 every time an out and/or win is detected, or the main control 520 may send a command to the production control unit 540 under predetermined conditions (for example, the production control from the main control unit 520 After the main control unit 520 is configured to send a command to the production control unit 540 every time an out and/or a winning is detected, You can. In addition, the main control unit 520 sends a command to the performance control unit 540 with information regarding the number of difference balls that has already been counted, and the performance control unit 540 uses the received information regarding the number of difference balls to calculate the current number of difference balls. It may be configured to perform processing. In this case, the main control unit 520 may send a command to the production control unit 540 every time the process of counting the number of difference balls is performed, or the information on the number of difference balls may be sent to the safety device activation notice command. The command may be sent in addition. In addition, each time the main control unit 520 performs counting processing of the number of difference balls after a predetermined condition (for example, when the main control unit 520 sends a safety device activation notice command to the production control unit 540). The command may be sent to the production control section 540 at the same time.

In addition, the operation notice display is not limited to the above-mentioned content, but it will be displayed for a predetermined period of time after the display starts when a predetermined condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)) is met. (Example: 30 seconds) The display may be configured to be in a non-display state after 30 seconds have elapsed. Further, the display state and the non-display state may be repeated at predetermined time intervals (eg, 60 seconds). In addition, if a predetermined condition (the value of the difference ball counter is a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)) is not satisfied (the value of the difference ball counter is less than a predetermined value (90000), etc.) after starting the operation notice display, It may be configured such that the operation notice display continues to be displayed even if In this case, after the predetermined condition is not met, the display continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 30 seconds), and if the predetermined condition is still not met after the predetermined time has passed, the display is turned off. It may be configured to control. In addition, if the predetermined condition is met again after a predetermined time has passed (or before the predetermined time has elapsed) after the predetermined condition has not been met, the display state will continue even after the predetermined time has passed. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, although it was assumed that the activation notice display would start when a predetermined condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)), there are other conditions (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)). (e.g., when the value of 80,000 has reached a predetermined value (eg, 80,000)), and the hall employee or player may be able to select one of a plurality of conditions. If the configuration is such that only those involved in the hall can select, a selection switch may be provided on the main control board 52 or effect control boards 53, 54, 55, 56, etc. located on the back side of the gaming machine 1, It may be configured such that it can be selected on the hall menu screen that can be accessed with . Further, so that the player can also make a selection, it may be configured such that selection can be made by operating the middle push button 14a or the cross button 18 arranged on the front side of the gaming machine 1 during non-gaming and/or during gaming.

In addition, a notice of activation when the condition is not satisfied is displayed only when a predetermined condition (the value of the difference ball counter is a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)) is not satisfied (the value of the difference ball counter is less than a predetermined value (90000), etc.) There may also be a display, and the activation notification display may be configured to notify that the activation notification display is to be terminated because the value has fallen below a predetermined value (90000), for example.

In addition, although the activation warning display is a numerical value based on the current value of the difference ball counter, it is not limited to this, but is also a display indicating that the opportunity for the safety device activation flag to turn ON is approaching (e.g. : "The safety device will be activated soon", "The safety device activation flag will be set soon", etc.).

Furthermore, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-1-1, the operation notice display is possible from the start of the jackpot game (ST1); If the value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90000) is established, the display of the operation notice display may be started even before the start of the jackpot game (ST1). Also, before the start of the jackpot game (ST1), the same configuration as described above may be adopted for controlling the display and non-display of the operation notice display.

The safety device activation display displayed on the image display means 31 includes an activation warning display to notify that the safety device is activated until the safety device activation flag is turned ON (ST2) and the safety device is activated (ST4). Displayable control. The activation warning display starts to be displayed when a predetermined condition is met (when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2) ≒ when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95000)) After the display starts, the display is continuously displayed until the safety device is activated (ST4). However, the display is not limited to this, and will be displayed if a predetermined condition (when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2) ≒ when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95000)) is met. It may be configured such that the display starts and then becomes a non-display state after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. Further, the display state and the non-display state may be repeated at predetermined time intervals (eg, 60 seconds).

In addition, once the condition for starting the activation warning display (when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2) ≒ when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95000)) is satisfied, , the system is configured so that it will not subsequently fail (the safety device activation flag is OFF and/or the value of the difference ball counter is less than a predetermined value (e.g. 95000)), but the ROM and RAM are modified. Even if the operation warning display is not established due to a glitch or a malfunction, it is desirable to continue displaying the operation warning display instead of turning it into a non-display state. In this case, after the predetermined condition is not met, the display continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 30 seconds), and if the predetermined condition is still not met after the predetermined time has passed, the display is turned off. It may be configured to control. In addition, if the predetermined condition is met again after a predetermined time has passed (or before the predetermined time has elapsed) after the predetermined condition has not been met, the display state will continue even after the predetermined time has passed. It may be configured as follows. This makes it possible to continue displaying the operation warning even if a trifle or a malfunction occurs. Furthermore, if the situation is not satisfied, it is desirable to activate the safety device (ST4) and control the game to a stopped state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the game is not controlled to be stopped by not activating the safety device.

In addition, the activation warning display may be a display content such as "The safety device will be activated soon" or a display content that suggests the activation timing such as "The safety device will be activated after this jackpot game ends." It may be. Furthermore, the display content may be such as "The safety device is activated because the difference number of balls has reached 95,000" which suggests the reached value of the difference number of balls. Furthermore, display content may be a combination of these display content.

In addition, under the conditions for starting the operation warning display (when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2) ≒ when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95000)), the operation warning display is not displayed. At this time, if an operation warning display is being displayed, the operation warning display that is currently being displayed is hidden and the operation warning display is started. As a result, the operation warning display indicating that the safety device activation flag may be turned ON changes to the operation warning display indicating that the safety device activation flag is ON (≒ the safety device will be activated). This makes it possible to shift the notification content. Further, the operation notice display and the operation warning display may be configured so that the display position and display size are the same, or they may be configured so that the display position and display size are different. You may. If the display position and display size are different, it is preferable to configure the operation warning display so that the display position is closer to the center of the image display means and the display size (display area) is larger than the operation warning display. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation notice display may have the above-mentioned configuration.

Further, regarding the safety device operation display, it may be configured such that only one of the operation advance notice display and the operation warning display is displayed. For example, if only the operation notice display is to be performed, the operation notice display can be displayed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), and then the safety device activation flag is displayed. When it is in the ON state (ST2), it may be controlled so that it is in a non-display state. In addition, the activation warning display can be displayed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4), and the activation warning display can be displayed even after the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2). It may be configured to do so. Further, when only the activation warning display is to be performed, the activation warning display may be displayed until the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2) and the safety device is activated (ST4). In this case, since the operation advance notice is not displayed, no notification regarding the operation of the safety device is given at all until the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2).

The safety device activation display displayed on the image display means 31 is controlled to be in a non-display state when the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to be in a stopped state. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-1-1, the operation warning display that is being displayed is turned off at the activation (ST4) timing of the safety device (≈starting timing of the game stop state). After the safety device is activated (ST4) in this manner, it is desirable to control the activation warning display to a non-display state because there is little need to display the activation warning display. In addition, at this time, it may be configured to display an in-operation indication (eg, "The safety device is in operation" or "The game is in a stopped state") instead of the operation warning display.

Next, as a performance display displayed on the image display means 31, a round performance is displayed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) to the end of the round game (ST3). The round performance is composed of information about the round game being executed (e.g. 1st round, etc.), the performance display during the round game (character image, etc., displayed during the round), the number of game balls acquired, etc. There is. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-1-1, the round effect can be executed even if the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2) during the jackpot game. This makes it possible to perform a round performance that is unaffected by whether the safety device is activated or not.

However, the configuration is not limited to the above-described configuration, and the configuration may be such that execution of the round effect is restricted when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2) during the jackpot game. For example, when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), the performance display during the round game is changed to a special performance display (displayed only when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state during the jackpot game). (Special performance) may be changed. Further, the display of the number of acquired game balls may be controlled to be hidden, or the display state may be maintained and no further updates may be performed. In this way, by making some changes to the round performance when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), it is possible to make the player aware that the safety device is activated. can.

Regarding the number of game balls acquired, when the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000), the safety device activation flag becomes ON (ST2), but the number of game balls acquired is greater than this predetermined value (95000). The display limit value may be configured to be larger (eg, 99999). As a result, if a round game remains after the safety device activation flag turns ON (ST2) during a jackpot game, the updated display of the number of acquired game balls that is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (95,000) will continue to be executed. becomes possible. Furthermore, the display limit value of the number of game balls acquired is the maximum number of round games (10R) that can be unplayed after the safety device activation flag turns ON (ST2) during a jackpot game. It is desirable that the value is equal to or greater than the sum of the number of game balls (eg 1500) and the predetermined value (eg 96500). However, it is preferable to set the display limit value to a value (for example, 99999) in which the number of digits currently displayed is not incremented, and thereby it is possible to configure the display so as not to impose a load on the display update control. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display limit value of the number of acquired game balls and the predetermined value (95000) may be the same value. In addition, if the display limit value of the number of acquired game balls is configured to be larger than the predetermined value (95000) and the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), the number of acquired game balls It may also be configured to stop the display or update process.

In addition, when the current number of difference balls is displayed on the operation notice display, if the number of difference balls reaches a predetermined value (95000), the update of the number of difference balls by the operation notice display is terminated. It is desirable to continue updating the number of acquired game balls. In the operation notice display, the update ends when "Current number of difference balls (95000) / 95000" is displayed (at this time, the operation notice display may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time, or may be terminated. (Also, it may be configured to start the activation warning display in any case.) On the other hand, by updating the number of game balls acquired when a winning occurs, the activation warning display may be started. The display limit value of the number of acquired game balls may be configured to be larger than the limit value (95000) that can be displayed (for example, 99999). Further, the activation warning display may also have a similar configuration when the current number of differential balls is displayed.

As a performance display displayed on the image display means 31, an ending performance is executed during the jackpot end INT period from the end of the round game (ST3) until the safety device is activated (ST4). In the ending effect, the player is notified that the jackpot game has ended, and a mode display to which the player will switch after the jackpot game is finished is displayed. Here, when the safety device is activated (ST4) after the end of the jackpot game, a special ending effect that is not executed when the safety device is not activated (ST4) may be configured to be executed. The special ending effect may be configured to notify that the game will be stopped after the end of the jackpot game, or to praise the player for acquiring a large number of game balls.

Further, even if the safety device is activated (ST4) after the end of the jackpot game, the same ending effect as when the safety device is not activated (ST4) may be executed. In this case, the mode display that could have been changed after the end of the jackpot game will be executed, but the game will actually be changed to the stopped state. This allows the player to know which modes he or she could have transitioned to even when transitioning to the game stop state. In addition, in this way, even if a mode display that has a possibility of transition is executed in the ending performance, the activation warning display notifies the player that the safety device will operate even during the ending performance, so that the player can It is possible to configure the migration destination to avoid misidentification.

Additionally, as a performance display to be displayed on the image display means 31, a performance before the start of the ending performance is executed from the timing when the safety device activation flag is turned on (ST2) during the jackpot game until the end of the round game (ST3). It may be configured to do so. The ending performance pre-start performance plays the role of an introductory performance before the aforementioned ending performance is executed, and by setting the safety device activation flag to the ON state (ST2) as a start condition, the round starts. Using the relatively long production time until the end of the game (ST3), notification that the game will be stopped after the end of the jackpot game, its introduction contents, and praise for acquiring a large number of game balls The system will be configured to notify the public of the issue and the details of its introduction. In addition, when performing a performance before the start of the ending performance, the display of specific display objects displayed on the image display means 31 (e.g., pending display 104a, 105a, special symbol storage number display 106a, 106b, mode display, etc.) may be restricted. is desirable. In other words, by executing the ending effect before the start of the effect, the player is notified that the game will be controlled to a stop state after the end of the jackpot game, so it is not necessary when transitioning to the play stop state. It is desirable to control specific display objects (eg, pending displays 104a, 105a, special symbol storage number displays 106a, 106b, mode display, etc.) to a non-display state from the time the ending performance is being performed. Further, by making these display objects non-displayed, the display area of the image display means 31 becomes free, so that it is possible to secure a display area for displaying the effect before the start of the ending effect.

As a performance display displayed on the image display means 31, when a safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to a stop state, a game stop screen is displayed which can notify that the game has become stopped. The game stop screen consists of a black background image that displays a solid black background image over the entire display area of the image display means 31, and a message display image that indicates that the game is in a stopped state (e.g., ``The game is in a stopped state. (e.g., "Please extend the following information.") In this way, when the game is in the stopped state, the game stop image is displayed on the image display means 31, so that the player can be informed that the game is in the stopped state. There is. Further, the game stop screen may be configured to display a two-dimensional code for storing predetermined game information (earned benefit information, history information, etc.). This makes it possible to obtain bonus information acquired and accumulated history information before the game is stopped.

Next, the safety device activation notification using the LED is carried out from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2). Executes an operation warning that causes everything to emit white light. This activation notice makes it possible to suggest that the safety device activation flag is about to turn ON. Here, when the operation advance notification is performed using some or all of the board-side LEDs 63a, a part or all of the frame-side LEDs 64a performs a light emitting effect according to the jackpot game (≒ round game) that is being executed. It may be configured to do so. In addition, when the operation advance notification is performed using some or all of the frame side LEDs 64a, a part or all of the board side LEDs 63a performs a light emitting effect according to the jackpot game (≒ round game) that is being executed. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, the operation advance notice is set to cause a part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a to emit white light under the start condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)). However, when a predetermined condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 91000)) is satisfied, part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a is changed from white light emission. It may be configured to change the light emission mode (eg, yellow light emission, etc.). Furthermore, under another condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 92000)), part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a may be changed from yellow light emission to a different light emission mode (e.g. It may be configured to change to green light emission, etc.). In this way, the light emitting mode may be changed in predetermined units (1000) until the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000). Further, regarding the change in the light emission mode, not only the color of the light emitted but also the type of light emission (lighting, flashing, slow flashing, fast flashing, etc.) may be changed.

Here, the operation advance notice is controlled to be executed in synchronization with (corresponds to) the operation advance notice described above. Therefore, unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that the operation advance notice is also being executed when the operation advance notice display is executed. Further, the operation advance notification is configured to be executable in synchronization with (corresponding to) various execution contents related to the operation advance notice described above. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed in synchronization with (corresponding to) the operation advance notice display, and for example, the operation advance notice may be configured to be executed even after the operation advance notice display ends. Furthermore, the operation advance notice display may be configured to be executed even after the end of the operation advance notice. In this way, the execution period (or execution timing) of the operation advance notice display and the execution period (or execution timing) of the operation advance notice may be configured to be different. Furthermore, at least either the operation advance notice display or the operation advance notice may be configured to be executed between the start of the jackpot game (ST1) and the time when the safety device operation flag is turned ON (ST2). good. This makes it safe for players even when either one (the image display means 31 or the LED) cannot be executed due to a malfunction or when a jackpot game effect (round game effect) is executed using either one. It is possible to suggest that the opportunity for the device operation flag to turn ON is approaching.

Further, the start condition for displaying the operation advance notice (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (eg, 90000)) and the start condition for the operation advance notice may be set as a common start condition. Also, different starting conditions may be used. If different starting conditions are used, a difference ball counter is used, and an operation notice is executed when the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (85000) or a predetermined value (91000). It may be configured so that advance notice of operation can be executed.

Safety device activation notification using LEDs turns part or all of the panel side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a red until the safety device activation flag turns ON (ST2) and the safety device is activated (ST4). Executes an operation warning notification that emits light. This activation warning notification makes it possible to notify that the safety device is activated. Here, when the operation warning notification is performed using some or all of the board side LEDs 63a, some or all of the frame side LEDs 64a will emit light according to the jackpot game (≒ round game) that is being executed. It may be configured to run. In addition, when the operation warning notification is performed using a part or all of the frame side LED 64a, a part or all of the board side LED 63a performs a light emitting effect according to the jackpot game (≒ round game) that is being executed. It may be configured to do so.

Here, the operation warning notification is controlled to be executed in synchronization (correspondence) with the operation warning display described above. Therefore, unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that when the operation warning display is executed, the operation warning notification is also executed. Further, the operation warning notification is configured to be executable in synchronization with (corresponding to) various execution contents related to the operation warning display described above. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed in synchronization with (corresponding to) the operation warning display, and for example, the operation warning notification may be configured to be executed even after the operation warning display ends. Furthermore, the operation warning display may be configured to be displayed even after the operation warning notification ends. In this way, the execution period (or execution timing) of the operation warning display may be configured to be different from the execution period (or execution timing) of the operation warning notification. Furthermore, at least one of the activation warning display and activation warning notification may be configured to be executable between the time when the safety device activation flag is turned ON (ST2) and the safety device is activated (ST4). good. As a result, even when either one (the image display means 31 or the LED) cannot be executed due to a malfunction or when a jackpot game effect (round game effect) is executed using either one, the player is provided with a safety device. It is possible to notify that the system is activated.

Further, the operation advance notice is given by white light emitted by the panel side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a, and the operation warning notice is given by red light emitted by the panel side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a, each in a different light emitting manner. By changing the light emission mode in this manner, it is possible to identify that the operation advance notification has been switched to the operation warning notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a similar light emission mode may be used. In addition, even if they are configured with the same light emission mode, by making the display contents of the operation notice display and the operation warning display different, it is possible to identify when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2). It is possible to configure

Further, the operation advance notification and the operation warning notification may be configured to use a common LED (all or part of the panel side LED 63a and/or the frame side LED 64a). Further, the notification may be configured to be performed using different LEDs (all or part of the panel side LED 63a and/or the frame side LED 64a). In either case, it is desirable to have a configuration in which the switching from the operation advance notice to the operation warning notice can be identified by making the light emission modes different between the operation advance notice and the operation warning notice.

Further, it may be configured such that the operation advance notification is executed while the operation advance notice is being displayed, and the operation warning notification is not executed while the operation warning is being displayed. With this configuration, while the operation notice is being displayed, the operation notice is executed, so that all or part of the board-side LED 63a and/or the frame-side LED 64a is used to produce light emission (the jackpot game being executed (≒ round game) ) is restricted and priority is given to the notification regarding the activation of the safety device.While the activation warning notification is not executed while the activation warning is being displayed, all or In some cases, a light emitting effect is executed in accordance with the jackpot game (≈round game) being executed, and the light emitting effect can be given priority over notification regarding the operation of the safety device. This makes it possible to appropriately notify the contents to be prioritized before and after the safety device is activated (before and after the safety device activation flag turns ON (ST2)).

In addition, regarding the operation notice display, if the game by the player is interrupted or canceled and the player enters a non-gaming state after the start of the display of the operation notice display, the display of the operation notice display is continued even in the non-gaming state. You may. Here, the non-gaming state is a state in which no special symbol changes are made. For example, if the activation notice display starts during a jackpot game, the safety device will not operate during the jackpot game. When a jackpot game ends without a hit and then shifts to a predetermined game state (such as a variable probability game state, a normal game state, or a time-saving game state), the game by the player is interrupted or canceled, resulting in a non-gaming state. controlled by. In the non-gaming state, a standby screen displays a static image of the decorative symbols 100, 101, 102, a volume/light amount adjustment image, a menu image, etc., and a predetermined period of time (e.g., after the non-gaming state (or standby screen) starts). :180s) After the elapse of 180 seconds, a demo movie to introduce the model and a warning display to prevent players from becoming absorbed in the game are displayed. At this time, an operation preview display may be displayed together with a standby screen, a demo movie, a warning display, etc. In addition, it is desirable to display the operation notice with priority over the standby screen, demo movie, and alert display. Specifically, the operation notice should be displayed on top of the standby screen, demo movie, and alert display (the display layer is higher). A preview display may also be executed. This makes it possible to check the operation notice display even in a non-gaming state, so that a player who is about to start playing the game can understand the contents of the operation notice display immediately before starting the game. In addition, although it is assumed that the operation notice display is superimposed on the standby screen, demo movie, and warning display (in a higher display layer), the demo movie and/or attention display is given priority over the operation notice display. (Displayed over the operation notice display) may be configured to be executed. Furthermore, while the demo movie and/or the attention-calling display is being executed, the operation notice display may be controlled to be in a non-display state (the operation notice display is displayed on the standby screen). This does not impede the visibility of the model introduction and warning display using the demo movie, making it possible to appropriately notify players of necessary information.

Further, even during the non-gaming state, control may be performed such that the operation advance notification is executed in synchronization with (corresponds to) the operation advance notice display. Furthermore, during the non-gaming state, it may be configured such that only the operation advance notice is displayed without executing the operation advance notice. Further, when the operation advance notification is executed during the non-gaming state, the light emission mode may be configured not to be changed every predetermined unit (1000) even if the value of the difference ball counter changes. Further, the light emitting mode may be changed in predetermined units (1000) as in the case of a game (during a jackpot game, etc.).

Further, the light emitting mode of the board side LED 63a and/or the frame side LED 64a may be configured to be different between the operation advance notice during non-gaming and the operation advance notice during play. By making the light emitting modes different in this way, it is configured such that it is easy to identify whether a game is being played or not, depending on the light emitting mode of the operation advance notice. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and a similar light emission mode may be used.

The safety device activation notification using the LED is such that when the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to be stopped, part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a are controlled to be turned off. , until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5), the light is kept in the off state. When the game is stopped in this way, by stopping the light emitting effect of each LED (all or part of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a), it is ensured that no more games will be played. Structured to suggest. However, when executing an error display while the game is stopped, a part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a is configured to be controlled to emit light in an error light emission mode according to the content of the error display. Good too. Further, even if an error display is to be performed during the game stop state, the configuration may be such that part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or the frame side LED 64a are controlled to be turned off.

Next, the movable effects by the movable objects 30a and 30b are activated from the start of the jackpot game (ST1), when the safety device is activated (ST4), and then stopped at the original position until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). controlled. In this way, during the jackpot game where there is a possibility that the safety device will be activated, the movable objects 30a and 30b are controlled not to perform the movable performance. As a result, the movable objects 30a and 30b move to the presentation position (in front of the image display means 31) by the movable effect, and the safety device operation display (operation notice display, operation warning display), game stop screen, etc. are displayed on the movable object 30a. , 30b, there is no risk of the safety device being hidden (obstructing visibility), and it is possible to reliably notify the player regarding the safety device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable effects by the movable objects 30a and 30b may be performed even during a jackpot game in which the safety device may be activated. In this case, for example, if a movable effect is being executed at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST4), the game is controlled to be stopped, the movable effect that is being executed is stopped, and the movable objects 30a and 30b are It is desirable to control the movement from the presentation position (or the movable position) to the origin position. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game stop screen displayed on the image display means 31 from being obstructed by the movable objects 30a and 30b when the game is controlled to be in the game stop state. In addition, if a movable effect is being executed at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST4), the movable effect that is being executed will be stopped; The movable objects 30a, 30b may be controlled to move from the presentation position (or the movable position) to the origin position.

Next, as an adjustment function, the volume adjustment button 16 is controlled so that the volume adjustment operation is valid from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to stop, the volume adjustment operation is thereafter disabled until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). In this manner, when the game is in a stopped state, by disabling the volume adjustment operation, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice that the game is being controlled in a stopped state. Further, for example, if a volume adjustment operation is performed at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST4) and volume setting information indicating the current volume setting is displayed on the image display means 31, the game is controlled to be stopped. At the same time, it is desirable to control the game stop screen so that the currently displayed volume setting information is hidden and the game stop screen is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game stop screen displayed on the image display means 31 from being obstructed by the volume setting information when the game is controlled to be in the game stop state. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, even if the volume setting information is displayed on the image display means 31 at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST4), after the game is controlled to be stopped, the predetermined period of time (e.g. The volume setting information may be displayed superimposed on the game stop screen by 5 seconds (so that the display layer is on top). However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment operation be controlled to be invalid even while the volume setting information is displayed while the game is in the stopped state. Also, when displaying the volume setting information over the game stop screen (so that the display layer is on top), a message display image (e.g., ``The game is stopped. Please send an attendant.'') as the game stop screen. When a two-dimensional code is displayed, it is desirable to display the volume setting information in a position that does not overlap with them.

Next, as an adjustment function, the light amount adjustment button 17 is controlled so that the light amount adjustment operation is valid from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to be stopped, the light amount adjustment operation is thereafter disabled until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). In this way, when the game is in the stopped state, by disabling the light amount adjustment operation, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice that the game is being controlled in the stopped state. Further, for example, if the light amount adjustment operation is performed at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST4) and the light amount setting information indicating the current light amount setting is displayed on the image display means 31, the game is controlled to be stopped. At the same time, it is desirable to control the game stop screen so that the light amount setting information being displayed is hidden and the game stop screen is displayed. Thereby, the game stop screen displayed on the image display means 31 when the game is controlled to be in the game stop state can be prevented from being obstructed (visibility reduced) by the light amount setting information. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the light amount setting information is displayed on the image display means 31 at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST4), after the game is controlled to be in the stopped state, for a predetermined period of time (e.g. The light amount setting information may be displayed overlapping the game stop screen by 5 seconds (so that the display layer is on top). However, it is desirable that the light amount adjustment operation be controlled to be invalid even while the light amount setting information is displayed while the game is in the stopped state. In addition, when displaying the light intensity setting information over the game stop screen (so that the display layer is on top), a message display image (e.g. "Game is stopped. Please send an attendant") as the game stop screen. If a two-dimensional code is displayed, it is desirable to display the light amount setting information in a position that does not overlap with them.

Next, the control contents of various functions controlled by the payout control section 510 in the course of ST1 to ST5 will be explained.

As a payout control, the ball lending button 20 is operated so that the safety device is activated (ST4) from the start of the jackpot game (ST1), and thereafter, the ball lending operation is valid until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). controlled. As a result, the lending process is performed by operating the ball lending button 20 not only before the game is stopped, but also after the game is stopped, so that game balls can be given to the player. It is composed of

Next, as a payout control, the return button 21 is activated so that the safety device is activated (ST4) from the start of the jackpot game (ST1), and the return operation remains valid until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). controlled by. As a result, the balance information on the frequency display 62a is cleared by operating the return button 21 not only before the game is stopped, but also after the game is stopped, and the game ball is returned to the player. It is configured so that the balance can be returned.

In this way, by controlling the ball lending operation using the ball lending button 20 and the return operation using the return button 21 to be effective even in the game stop state, the ball lending and return operations of game balls can be performed even after shifting to the game stop state. Since players can return game balls that they have acquired in advance before the game is stopped, the player does not have to return the game balls that they have acquired through previous games after the game has stopped. It becomes possible to do so.

Next, as a payout control, the prize ball payout operation is performed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) to the activation of the safety device (ST4), and then until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). The operation is controlled to be effective. As a result, the prize ball payout device 23 operates not only before the game stop state is controlled, but also after the game stop state is controlled, so that the game ball payout operation is executed, and the game ball is delivered to the player. The ball is configured to be executable. Therefore, even if the payout of game balls has not yet been completed at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST4) and the gaming stop state is controlled, the prize ball payout device 23 is activated after the gaming stop state is controlled. It is possible to perform a game ball payout operation regarding unpaid prize balls. However, while the game is stopped, processing related to the payout of prize balls related to winning is not performed (a payout control command (number of prize balls designation command) is not transmitted from the main control unit 520 to the payout control unit 510). ), various winning holes (special symbol 1 starting hole 38, special symbol 2 starting hole 39, upper left winning hole 40, middle left winning hole 41, lower left winning hole 42, right winning hole 43, upper large winning hole) while the game is stopped. Even if a ball enters the winning hole 44 or the lower major winning hole 45), the prize ball payout device 23 will not perform a payout operation for the prize ball based on the new winning.

Next, the firing of game balls as firing control is effectively executed from the start of the jackpot game (ST1) until the safety device is activated (ST4). When the safety device is activated (ST4) and the game is controlled to be stopped, the firing control is controlled to be invalid until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). Thereby, in the game stop state, the game ball is controlled to be in a state where it is impossible to shoot, so it is possible to make the player aware that the game is in the stop state. In addition, while the game is stopped, processing related to the game (lottery processing, symbol variation processing, prize winning and prize ball processing, etc.) is not executed, so there is no benefit for the player to fire the game ball, and the firing control is stopped. It is desirable to leave it there. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a stopped state, the firing control may be controlled to remain effective until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST5). Thereby, after the game is stopped, the operation of the firing control can be checked by the person concerned with the hall. In addition, if the game ball scheduled to be launched remains on the launch rail, stopping the launch will make it impossible for the player to retrieve the game ball, so this can be prevented. In order to do this, by enabling the launch control even when the game is stopped, it is possible to collect the game balls that remain on the launch rail (it is possible to collect them by intentionally firing them at a launch intensity that makes them foul balls). It may be configured as follows.

Further, as described above, the main control unit 520 is partially restricted from executing the program processing during the gaming stop state, but the payout control unit 510 is limited from executing the program processing even during the gaming stop state. Never. This is because, as described above, even during the game stop state, it is necessary for the payout control unit 510 to effectively control the ball lending operation using the ball lending button 20, the return operation using the return button 21, and the prize ball payout operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout control unit 510 may also be configured to limit some (including a plurality of) or all program processes (ball lending operation, return operation, prize ball payout operation).

Although not shown, during the pre-jackpot start interval provided before the start of the jackpot game (ST1), the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000) and the safety device activation flag is turned ON. In this case, it is desirable to immediately activate the safety device and control the game to a halt state. Thereby, it is possible to control the game to be stopped before the start of the jackpot game. This is because during the interval period before the jackpot start, the jackpot game is not yet in the state, so there is little need to wait for the jackpot game to end before activating the safety device. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000) and the safety device activation flag is turned on during the interval period before the start of the jackpot, the safety device will be activated during the jackpot game. As in the case where the flag is turned on, the control may be made to stop the game after the jackpot game ends. As a result, during the interval before the start of the jackpot, when giving a game explanation regarding the jackpot game that is about to start (e.g., please start hitting right), the safety device will be activated and the jackpot game will not start (game explanation This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a contradiction in which the jackpot game is not started even though the jackpot game has been performed.

Next, a time chart (Embodiment 2-2) regarding the operation of the safety device, which is a characteristic part of the present invention, will be described in detail using FIG. 5-2-1. Furthermore, the configuration may be a combination of the descriptions regarding the embodiments described above and the descriptions regarding the embodiments described later. In this way, the contents of each embodiment are not limited to individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments. Furthermore, in order to avoid redundant descriptions of the same contents as those described above, explanations will basically be omitted.

(If the safety device is activated during symbol variation game 1)
In Figure 5-2-1, the symbol variation of the special symbol starts (ST1), and during the symbol variation, the safety device activation flag is turned ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is stopped and the game machine A time chart shows a series of steps until the power is cut off (ST3). Furthermore, Figure 5-2-1 shows how the main control section 520, production control section 540, and payout control section 510 each control the various functions shown below in the course of ST1 to ST3. It shows.

In FIG. 5-2-1, various functions controlled by the main control unit 520 include functions related to the symbol display device 76 (special symbol display LEDs 76a, 76b, special symbol memory display LEDs 76c, 76d, normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e). , lighting control of various LEDs such as the normal symbol memory display LED 76f, right-handed display LED 76g, etc.), functions related to the performance display LED 521 (lighting control of the 7-segment display, counting the number of wins and outs, processing of calculating the base value) , functions related to the electric chew support (operation control of the special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72), functions relating to the big winning openings 44 and 45 (operating control of the winning opening opening and closing solenoids 70 and 71), functions relating to external terminals (controlling the operation of the opening and closing solenoids 70 and 71 of the special symbol 2 starting opening), It describes functions related to safety devices (output control), functions related to safety devices (difference ball counting processing), and functions related to sighting test signals (output control of safety device activation signals and safety device activation signals).

In addition, various functions controlled by the production control unit 540 include functions related to the variable display device 95 (lighting control of special symbol variation LEDs and normal symbol variation LEDs), functions related to the image display means 31 (mini symbol 103a, right-handed display, Error display, pending display 104a, 105a, special symbol storage number display 106a, 106b, mode display, safety device activation display, display control related to performance display), functions related to LEDs 63a, 64a (lighting control related to safety device activation notification), movable parts 30a and 30b (execution control of movable effects) and adjustment functions (switching control between enabling and disabling the volume adjustment button 16 and the light intensity adjustment button 17) are described.

In addition, various functions controlled by the payout control unit 510 include a payout control function (control of enabling/disabling of the ball lending button 20 and the return button 21, execution control regarding prize ball payout operation), a firing control function (control of the firing control), (enable/disable switching control).

In the example shown in FIG. 5-2-1, in a game state where right-handed hitting is advantageous (here, a low probability high base state where a variable game with special symbols can be executed, a high probability high base state, etc.), special symbol symbols An example of transitioning to a game stop state during fluctuation is shown. A right-handed game is a right-handed game state in which a variable game with special symbols can be executed, and the safety device activation flag is controlled to be ON (≒ the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000)) during the right-handed game. This causes the game to be stopped.

Furthermore, in the embodiment shown in Figure 5-2-1, when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (≒ the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000)), the safety device is activated immediately. (ST2), and is configured to be controlled to a game stop state. In this way, in a game state where a variable game with special symbols can be executed (a game state other than jackpot games and small win games), when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (≒ the difference ball counter is set to a predetermined value) (95000)), even if there is a variable game with special symbols in progress, the safety device is immediately activated (ST2) without waiting for the end of the special symbol variable game, and the game is controlled to be stopped. .

Next, the control details of various functions controlled by the main control section 520 in the course of ST1 to ST3 will be explained.

The special symbol fluctuation display LEDs 76a and 76b of the symbol display device 76 display fluctuations from the start of special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). It is possible to display the lighting in various modes (fluctuating light emitting pattern). After that, when the game is controlled to be stopped, the special symbol fluctuation display LEDs 76a and 76b are not displayed (lights out) and remain hidden (lights out) until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). controlled to maintain In this way, in the game stop state, the special symbol variation display LEDs 76a and 76b are controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby informing the player that the next special symbol variation game will not be executed. It shows.

Here, when the special symbol fluctuation display LEDs 76a and 76b are lit in a fluctuation display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern) and the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (≒ the difference ball counter is set to a predetermined value), When the value is reached), the safety device is immediately activated (ST2) at that point, and the game is controlled to be stopped. Therefore, when the safety device activation flag is ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), even if the special symbol fluctuation display LEDs 76a and 76b are displaying fluctuations, the remaining fluctuation display time does not have to elapse. At that point, the variable display ends and is immediately controlled to be non-displayed (lights out).

In addition, when the safety device activation flag is ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), the special symbol fluctuation display LEDs 76a and 76b display a stop display mode (big hit stop light pattern, small hit stop light pattern, loss stop light pattern, etc.) ), the stop display will end at that point without waiting for the predetermined stop display time (e.g. 500 ms) to elapse, and the display will be immediately turned off (unlit). Become.

Next, the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d display the current pending memory from the start of special symbol variation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). The light is displayed in a display mode according to the number. Thereafter, when the game is controlled to be stopped, the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d are not displayed (lights out) and remain hidden (lights out) until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). controlled to maintain In this way, in the game stop state, the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d are controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby informing the player that the pending memory is erased and the next special symbol variation game is executed. This indicates that the device is not being used.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is displayed in a fluctuation display mode (fluctuating) from the start of special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). If the lottery result is a win, the winning display (win stop light emitting pattern) is displayed in a stopped state. The example shown in Figure 5-2-1 shows an example in which the display stops with a win display (win stop light emitting pattern), but if the lottery result is a loss, it stops with a lose display (loss stop light emission pattern). It will be displayed. In addition, not only when the light is displayed in the fluctuating display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern), but when the right gate switch 46a (normal symbol starting port switch) does not detect a game ball, the normal symbol fluctuating display LED 76e will be stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the previous lottery result. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is not displayed (lights out), and the gaming machine 1 The display is controlled to remain non-displayed (unlit) until the power is cut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol variation display LED 76e is controlled to be non-display (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next normal symbol variation game is not to be executed. ing.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-1, the safety device is activated (ST2) at the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is stopped and displayed in the hit display (hit stop light emission pattern), and the game is stopped. is controlled by. In this way, when the safety device is activated (ST2), the hit display (hit stop light emission pattern) is immediately controlled to be hidden (lights out) without waiting for the stop display time (determined display time) to elapse. It will be done. In addition, not only the win display (win stop light emission pattern) but also the stop display time (determined display time) of the loss display (loss stop light emission pattern) when the stop display is performed on the loss display (loss stop light emission pattern). ) is immediately controlled to be non-displayed (unlit). In addition, if it is lit in a fluctuating display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern), it is immediately hidden (lights out) without waiting for the fluctuating display time to elapse (the fluctuating normal symbol fluctuating game ends). ).

Next, the normal symbol memory display LED 76f displays the current normal symbol pending memory from the start of special symbol variation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). The light is displayed in a display mode according to the number. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the normal symbol memory display LED 76f is not displayed (lights out), and the gaming machine 1 The display is controlled to remain non-displayed (unlit) until the power is cut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol memory display LED 76f is controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), so that the normal symbol pending memory disappears for the player and the next normal symbol variation game is executed. This indicates that the device is not being used.

Next, the right-handed display LED 76g indicates that right-handed firing is advantageous from when the special symbol starts changing (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). The display will be lit in a display mode to indicate this. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the right-hand hitting display LED 76g is not displayed (unlit state) and the gaming machine 1 is turned off. It is controlled to remain non-displayed (unlit) until the power is cut off (ST3). In this manner, in the game stop state, the right-handed firing display LED 76g is controlled to be non-displayed (unlit state), indicating that right-handed firing is no longer advantageous.

Next, the 7-segment display of the performance display LED 521 displays the base value from the start of the special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). control is in place. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the 7-segment display is turned off (or an error display (e.g. "E" display) )), and is controlled to maintain the off state (or error display (eg, "E" display)) until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). In this way, when the game is stopped, the 7-segment display is controlled to turn off (or display an error (e.g. "E" display)), so that the current base value is displayed even though the game is not possible. This prevents it from being displayed. Here, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-1, when the game is controlled to be stopped, the 7-segment display is turned off (or an error display (e.g. "E" display)). The configuration is not limited to this, and the display control of the base value may be performed even when the game is stopped. This makes it possible to check the base value even when the game is stopped.

By the way, when the 7-segment display of the performance display LED 521 is performing the operation confirmation display, the safety device activation flag turns ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is stopped. , the 7-segment display becomes off (or error display (e.g. "E" display)) and remains off (or error display (e.g. "E" display)) until the power to gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3) ) is controlled to maintain. In this way, even if there is still time left to execute the operation confirmation display, the 7-segment display is controlled to be in an off state (or an error display (eg, "E" display)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the operation confirmation display is continued if there is time left to execute the operation confirmation display. This makes it possible to check whether or not the 7-segment display of the performance display LED 521 operates normally even when the game is controlled to be stopped.

Next, the counting process of the number of wins and the number of outs on the performance display LED 521 is performed from the start of the special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). be executed effectively. Here, during right-handed games (here, low probability high base state, high probability high base state, etc. where variable games with special symbols can be executed), the process of counting the number of wins is not performed, but only the process of counting the number of outs is performed. be done. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a halt state, the performance display LED 521 shows winnings until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Counting the number and number of outs is not performed. In this way, the reason why the performance display LED 521 does not count the number of wins and outs in the game stop state is because the game stop state is configured so that no games can be played. This is because it is considered that winnings and outs will not occur. Therefore, by disabling the counting process of the number of winnings and the number of outs, the illegal number of winnings and the number of outs are counted, and the base value is prevented from being fraudulently manipulated. In addition, in the game stop state, even if game balls enter the winning holes 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, and 45, the prize balls will not be paid out to the player. , it is desirable that the base value counting process for winning a prize is not performed. However, even when the game is stopped, the performance display LED 521 may be configured to count the number of wins and outs. In this case, it is desirable to enable the firing of game balls at least even when the game is stopped. . Further, even when the performance display LED 521 performs the process of counting the number of wins and the number of outs, prize balls are not paid out to the player.

Next, the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521 is effectively executed from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). Ru. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the base of the performance display LED 521 remains unchanged until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Value calculation processing is not executed. In this way, the reason why the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521 is not executed in the game stop state is because the game stop state is configured such that no games can be played. This is because it is thought that it will never occur. Therefore, by disabling the base value calculation process, the base value is calculated based on the illegal number of wins and the number of outs, and the base value is prevented from being fraudulently manipulated. In addition, in the game stop state, even if game balls enter the winning holes 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, and 45, the prize balls will not be paid out to the player. , it is desirable that the base value calculation process for winning a prize is not performed. However, even in the game stop state, the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521 may be executed, and in this case, it is desirable to enable the firing of game balls at least even in the game stop state. Moreover, even when the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521 is executed, prize balls are not paid out to the player.

Next, the opening/closing control of the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 related to the operation of the electric chew support function is performed by setting the safety device activation flag to the ON state from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1) and activating the safety device ( Until ST2), it is effectively executed and the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state according to the fluctuation result of the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to the stopped state, the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is controlled to the OFF state, The special symbol 2 starting port 39 is controlled to be in a closed state. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-1, the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is controlled to the ON state, and the safety device is activated (ST2) when the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is in the open state. ing. In this case, the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is controlled to be in the closed state without waiting for the elapse of the preset opening time. In this way, when the safety device is activated (ST2), the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is controlled to the OFF state, and the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is closed, thereby preventing the subsequent game from being stopped. In this case, the game ball is prevented from entering the special symbol 2 starting port 39. Then, when the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is controlled to the closed state in response to activation of the safety device (ST2), the closed state is maintained until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3).

Next, the opening/closing control of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoids 70 and 71 for opening and closing the big winning openings 44 and 45 is performed by setting the safety device activation flag to the ON state from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1) and setting the safety device to the ON state. is activated (ST2), the gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a stopped state, and thereafter, it is controlled to be in a closed state until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Therefore, during ST1 to ST3, the big prize opening opening/closing solenoids 70 and 71 are always controlled to be in the OFF state. In this way, even in the game stop state, by controlling the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoids 70 and 71 to the OFF state and closing the grand prize openings 44 and 45, the grand prize openings 44 and 45 can be closed during the gaming stopped state. This prevents game balls from entering the ball.

Next, the output control of the security signal of the external terminal is in a non-output state from the start of the special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). controlled. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to the stopped state, the security signal is controlled to the output state, and then the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. control is performed to maintain the output of the security signal until (ST3). In this manner, when the safety device is activated (ST2), by controlling the security signal to the output state, it is possible to notify the hall computer that the game has been stopped.

Next, the difference ball counting process of the difference ball counter related to the safety device is performed from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). be executed effectively. By executing the difference ball counting process, when the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value and the safety device activation flag becomes ON (ST2), the process continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is shut off. (ST3) The difference ball counting process is not executed. This is because once the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), the game will transition to the stopped state regardless of the value of the difference ball counter after that, so the execution of the difference ball counting process is This is because it is considered unnecessary. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a difference ball counting process of a difference ball counter is executed. Specifically, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), and after the game is controlled to a stopped state, until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). , may be configured to effectively execute. However, in any case, the safety device activation flag, which was once set from the OFF state to the ON state, may change from the ON state to the OFF state again as a result of executing the difference ball counting process of the difference ball counter. It is desirable to configure the system so that it does not occur. As a result, after the safety device activation flag is in the ON state, by controlling the number of wins and the number of outs, the safety device activation flag is changed (ON state → OFF state) and the activation of the safety device is delayed or canceled. It is possible to prevent this behavior.

Next, the output processing of the safety device pre-activation signal related to the test firing test signal is performed from the start of the special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). , and is controlled to be able to output. Here, the output enabled state means that it is controlled to be output when a predetermined condition is met (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)). When a predetermined condition is satisfied (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (eg, 90000)), a safety device pre-operation signal is output as a sighting test signal from that point on.

Here, as mentioned above, the safety device pre-operation signal is output when a predetermined condition is met (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)), and this safety device pre-operation signal is output. By doing so, it is possible to notify the test equipment that activation of the safety device (ST2) is approaching. Incidentally, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-1, it is described that the safety device pre-operation signal can be output after the start of the special symbol fluctuation (ST1), but after the special symbol fluctuation start (ST1) ), the safety device pre-operation signal can be output.

The output processing of the safety device pre-activation signal is switched from the output state to the non-output state when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to the stopped state. It will be done. At this time, it may be configured to immediately switch from the output state to the non-output state, or it may be configured to maintain the output state for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 500ms, 30s, etc.) and then switch to the non-output state. It may be configured as follows. Thereafter, the non-output state is maintained until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). As mentioned above, the purpose of the safety device pre-activation signal is to notify the test device that the safety device is about to activate (ST2), so it cannot be used in the game stop state where the safety device is already activated. In this case, it is desirable to leave it in a non-output state because there is no need to output it.

In addition, the output processing of the signal before safety device activation is enabled until the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), and after the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), it is in a non-output state. It may also be configured to control. At this time, it may be configured to immediately switch from the output state to the non-output state when the safety device activation flag becomes ON state (ST2), or it may be configured to immediately switch from the output state to the non-output state, or for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 500ms). , 30 seconds, etc.) may be configured to maintain the output state and then switch to the non-output state. With this configuration, the condition for the safety device activation flag to turn ON due to the safety device activation signal (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95000)) is approaching. It becomes possible to notify the test equipment in advance.

Next, the output processing of the safety device activation signal related to the test firing test signal is performed from the start of special symbol variation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). Controlled to non-output state. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the output state remains until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). will be maintained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output may be configured to be output for a predetermined period of time (eg, 500 ms, 30 s, etc.) after the safety device is activated (ST2). In this way, after the safety device is activated (ST2), when the game is controlled to stop, the safety device activation signal is output, indicating that the safety device has been activated for the test device (≒ game stop state) control).

Next, the control contents of various functions controlled by the effect control section 540 in the course of ST1 to ST3 will be explained.

The special symbol fluctuation LED of the fluctuation display device 95 is in a fluctuating display mode (fluctuating) from the start of special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). It can be displayed in a variable display mode or a stationary display mode in response to (synchronized with) the lottery result of the special symbol variation game (the variation mode of the special symbol variation display LEDs 76a and 76b). be done. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the special symbol fluctuation LED is not displayed (unlit state), and the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. It is controlled to maintain non-display (lights out state) until it is interrupted (ST3) (if the stop display mode is a stop lights out pattern, lights out is maintained even after the game is stopped). In this way, in the game stop state, the special symbol variation LED is controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next special symbol variation game will not be executed.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation LED is displayed in a fluctuating display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern) from the start of special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). ), and is displayed in a variable display mode or a stopped display mode in response to (synchronized with) the lottery result of the normal symbol variation game (variation mode of the normal symbol variation display LED 76e). When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to stop, the normal symbol fluctuation LED will not be displayed (unlit state) and the power supply of the gaming machine 1 will be turned off. The display is controlled to remain non-displayed (unlit) until it is shut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol variation LED is controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next normal symbol variation game will not be executed.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-1, at the timing when the normal symbol variation LED is displayed in the stop display mode, the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to stop. In this manner, when the safety device is activated (ST2), it is immediately controlled to be non-displayed (lights out) without waiting for the stop display time (determined display time) to elapse. In addition, if it is lit up in a fluctuating display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern), it is immediately hidden (lights out) without waiting for the fluctuating display time to elapse (the fluctuating normal symbol fluctuating game ends). ).

Next, the mini symbol 103a displayed on the image display means 31 is displayed in a variable manner from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). (variable display of numerical symbols by scroll display using numerical symbols such as "↓↓↓" and "7↓7"). When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to be stopped, the mini symbol 103a is controlled to be hidden and the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. It is controlled to maintain the hidden state until it is displayed (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the mini symbols 103a of the image display means 31 are controlled to a non-display state, thereby indicating to the player that the next special symbol variation game is not to be executed. .

Next, the right-handed display displayed on the image display means 31 is displayed during the period from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). It is displayed in a display mode that indicates that firing is advantageous (a display mode that encourages right-handed firing). When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the right-handed display is controlled to a hidden state and the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. It is controlled to maintain the hidden state until it is displayed (ST3). In this manner, in the game stop state, the right-handed firing display is controlled to a non-display state, indicating that right-handed firing is no longer advantageous.

Next, the error display displayed on the image display means 31 is such that the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (ST1), the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to be stopped. After that, until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3), the error contents (RWM initialization, ball jam, out of supply, counting error, disconnection, door opening, winning slot error, radio wave error, magnetic error, etc.) are notified. controlled to a possible state. Here, regarding the error display, the reason why it is possible to notify even when the game is stopped is to accurately notify the content of the error that is occurring even when the game is stopped. Therefore, if an error display is displayed during a jackpot game, the safety device is activated (ST2) and even if the game is stopped, the error display currently displayed will continue to be displayed. be done. In this way, by continuing to display the error even after the activation of the safety device (ST2), it is possible to easily understand and clear the content of the error that is occurring even after the game has shifted to the stopped state.

In addition, the error display is such that the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1), the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to be stopped, and then the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. The error details can be reported until the system is shut off (ST3), but the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state from the start of the special symbol fluctuation (ST1), and the safety device is activated (ST2). It may also be possible to notify the error details until the error occurs. In this case, when the game is controlled to be stopped, the error display may be hidden and the hidden state may be maintained until the gaming machine 1 is powered off (ST3). In addition, if there is an error display during execution, a safety device may be activated (ST2) and the display may be switched to non-display immediately when the game is stopped, or the display may be switched off for a predetermined display time ( For example, the display may be continued even after the game has been stopped for 30 seconds.

Moreover, the above-described content is not limited to error display, but may be similarly applied to error notification using LEDs or audio. For example, if error notification is performed using not only an error display but also an LED or sound, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state from the start of special symbol fluctuation (ST1), and the safety device is activated ( ST2), the gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a stopped state, and thereafter, the error notification may be made possible until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Furthermore, the other configurations described above may be similarly applied to error notification using LEDs or audio.

In addition, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state from the start of the variation of the special symbol (ST1), the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to be stopped, and then the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. The configuration is configured so that an error can be displayed until it is shut off (ST3), and for error notification using LEDs or audio, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1), and the safety device is activated. It may be configured such that error notification is possible until the activation (ST2). For example, when a specific error (RWM initialization, ball jam, out of supply, counting abnormality, disconnection, door opening, winning slot error, radio wave error, magnetic error, etc.) occurs, the special symbol fluctuation starts (ST1 ), the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), and until the game is controlled to stop, the error is notified by error display, LED, and/or audio, and the game is stopped. After being controlled, only an error display is performed, and the LED and/or audio indicate the game stop state notification mode (LED: lighting pattern or light off pattern, sound: notification sound) , or without the notification sound). Thereby, it is possible to appropriately notify the error display and the fact that the game is being controlled to be stopped. Further, at this time, the image display means 31 may be configured to display an error display and a game stop state notification image indicating that the game is being controlled to a stop state. In addition, regarding error notification using LEDs and audio, the safety device activation flag is set to ON state from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (ST1), the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to be stopped. Thereafter, the system is configured to enable error notification until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3), and as for error display, the safety device activation flag is set to ON state from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1), and the safety device The configuration may be such that an error can be displayed until the activation (ST2).

In addition, the error display that is displayed from the start of the special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state. At the same time, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and thereafter, the display mode of the error display that is displayed until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3) is configured to be different. Good too. This makes it possible to display errors in accordance with the gaming status. Specifically, the error display that is displayed from the start of the special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) is a display of other information related to the game. The display location, display size, and display content are designed with consideration to the placement relationship with the image, and the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to be stopped, and then the gaming machine Since there are relatively few restrictions on the display of the error display that is displayed until the power supply of 1 is cut off (ST3), the display location, display size, and display content may be configured to be displayed in an easy-to-identify manner. . For example, when the game is stopped (after the safety device is activated), the background image becomes a solid black image, so that the error display contents can be more easily identified than during the game (before the safety device is activated). good.

Next, the pending displays 104a and 105a displayed on the image display means 31 are displayed from the start of the special symbol variation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). It is controlled to display a pending image according to the current pending storage number indicated by the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the hold displays 104a and 105a of the image display means 31 are controlled to a non-display state, It is controlled to maintain the non-display state until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the pending displays 104a and 105a of the image display means 31 are controlled to a non-display state, so that the player's pending memory disappears and the next special symbol variation game is not executed. This indicates that the condition is

Next, the special symbol memory number displays 106a and 106b displayed on the image display means 31 are displayed from the start of special symbol variation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). During this period, the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d are controlled to display the number of reserved symbols (for example, display any numerical value from "0" to "4") according to the current number of reserved symbols indicated by the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to be stopped, the pending number display on the image display means 31 is controlled to a non-display state, and the game machine The display is controlled to maintain the non-display state until the power of the display 1 is cut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the display of the pending number of symbols on the image display means 31 is controlled to a non-display state, thereby providing the player with a state in which the pending memory number disappears and the next special symbol variation game is not executed. It shows that.

In addition, regarding the special symbol memory number displays 106a and 106b, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the display state continues even when the game is controlled to be stopped. It may be configured to do so. In this case, before the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2), the number of reserved pieces is displayed (for example, " After the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2), the value is “0” indicating that there is no pending memory number. It is desirable to switch to display.

Regarding the pending display 104a, 105a or special symbol storage number display 106a, 106b displayed on the image display means 31, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to be stopped. In such a case, only one of the displays may be controlled to be in a non-display state, and the other display may be configured to continue to be displayed. For example, the pending displays 104a and 105a may be in a non-display state, and the special symbol storage number displays 106a and 106b may be in a display state, or vice versa.

Next, regarding the mode display displayed on the image display means 31, the current game is It is controlled to display a display image indicating the state (eg, a display indicating a variable display game mode during a right-handed game, etc.). When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and thereafter, the mode display is not displayed until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Controlled by display state. This makes it possible to suggest that the current gaming state is limited or that the next gaming state will not occur when the game is in a stopped state.

Next, the safety device activation display displayed on the image display means 31 is displayed during the period from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). The device is controlled to be able to display an operation notice indicating that the opportunity for the device operation flag to turn ON is approaching. The activation notice display is configured to start displaying when a predetermined condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)), and when the display starts, the safety device The display is configured to be displayed continuously until the activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). In addition, if a predetermined condition (the value of the difference ball counter is a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)) is not satisfied (the value of the difference ball counter is less than a predetermined value (90000), etc.) after starting the operation notice display, , the operation notice display is controlled to be in a non-display state. In addition, the operation notice display is configured to display a numerical value based on the current value of the difference ball counter, for example, "Current number of difference balls / 950000 (predetermined value at which the safety device activation flag is in the ON state)" As shown in the figure, the current number of differential balls is constantly updated and displayed, and the numerical value until the safety device activation flag is turned on is displayed so that it can be grasped in real time. Furthermore, the counting of the difference number of balls is not limited to constant updating, but may be configured to be updated every predetermined unit (10, 100, 1000, etc.), for example. Further, the update unit may be changed, for example, the update unit may be changed as it approaches a predetermined value (95000) (for example, from 1000 to 100 to 10). In addition, when displaying the operation notice, the main control unit 520 sends a command to the production control unit 540 with information regarding the number of outs and the number of prize balls, and the production control unit 540 receives the information regarding the number of outs and the number of prize balls. may be used to perform counting processing regarding the current number of difference balls. In this case, the main control 520 may send a command to the production control unit 540 every time an out and/or win is detected, or the main control 520 may send a command to the production control unit 540 under predetermined conditions (for example, the production control from the main control unit 520 After the main control unit 520 is configured to send a command to the production control unit 540 every time an out and/or win is detected, You can. In addition, the main control unit 520 sends a command to the performance control unit 540 with information regarding the number of difference balls that has already been counted, and the performance control unit 540 uses the received information regarding the number of difference balls to calculate the current number of difference balls. It may be configured to perform processing. In this case, the main control unit 520 may send a command to the production control unit 540 every time the process of counting the number of difference balls is performed, or the information on the number of difference balls may be sent to the safety device activation notice command. The command may be sent in addition. In addition, each time the main control unit 520 performs counting processing of the number of difference balls after a predetermined condition (for example, when the main control unit 520 sends a safety device activation notice command to the production control unit 540). The command may be sent to the production control section 540 at the same time.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-1, it is described that the operation notice display can be displayed from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1), but this is not limited to this, and predetermined conditions (difference ball counter When the value of 1 reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)), it may be configured to start displaying the operation notice display even before the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1). . Also, before the start of variation of the special symbols (ST1), the same configuration as described above may be adopted for display/non-display control of the operation notice display.

The safety device activation display displayed on the image display means 31 is controlled to a non-display state when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to be stopped. Ru. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-1, the operation notice display that is currently being displayed is turned off at the activation (ST2) timing of the safety device (≈starting timing of the game stop state). In this way, after the safety device is activated (ST2), there is little need to display the activation notice display, and therefore it is desirable to control the display to a non-display state. Further, at this time, it may be configured to display an in-operation indication (eg, "The safety device is in operation" or "The game is in a stopped state") instead of the operation notice display.

Here, during the right-handed game (or during the variable display of special symbols), only the operation warning display is performed as the safety device operation indication, and the operation warning display is not executed. This means that if the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state during a right-handed game (or while a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner), the safety device is controlled to be activated immediately (ST2) at that point. It's for a reason. In this way, since a predetermined period does not occur after the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state until the safety device is activated (ST2), the activation warning display that is performed during this period is not executed.

In addition, if the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) during a right-handed game (or while a special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner) and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stop state, the game will stop. It may be configured to display an activation warning display such as "The safety device will be activated because the number of difference balls has reached 95,000" at the start of the state. In addition, with the start of the game stop state, messages such as ``Fluctuating display of special symbols has been forcibly terminated'' and ``Fluctuating display of normal symbols have been forcibly terminated'' have been sent to notify the discontinuation of the fluctuation of special symbols and normal symbols. It may be configured to display a variation stop indication. In this way, the safety device activation display (operation notice display, operation warning display, etc.) may be configured to be different.

Next, as an effect display to be displayed on the image display means 31, a decorative pattern 100 is displayed on the image display means 31 from when the special symbol starts changing (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). , 101, and 102 are configured to be able to perform normal variable effects (variable effects in a non-reach state), reach effects (variable effects in a ready-to-reach state), and the like. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) to control the game to a stop state, a game stop screen capable of informing that the game is in the stop state is displayed. The game stop screen consists of a black background image that displays a solid black background image on the entire display area of the image display means 31, and a message display image that indicates that the game is being controlled to be stopped (for example, ``The game is being stopped.'' (e.g., “Please send a member of staff to the office.”) In this way, when the game is in the stopped state, the game stop image is displayed on the image display means 31, so that the player can be informed that the game is in the stopped state. There is. Further, the game stop screen may be configured to display a two-dimensional code for storing predetermined game information (earned benefit information, history information, etc.). This makes it possible to obtain bonus information acquired and accumulated history information before the game is stopped.

Here, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-1, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state while the reach effect is being executed, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to be stopped. In this case, the ready-to-win effect that is being executed ends at the timing when the game stops, and is immediately switched to the game stop screen. In this way, when the game is controlled to be stopped, the performance display being executed (normal variable performance, ready-to-win performance) is stopped/interrupted.

In addition, if the result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed is a jackpot variation pattern, the image display means 31 displays effects according to the jackpot variation pattern (e.g. normal variation effect pattern at jackpot, reach at jackpot). At this time, for example, the left decorative pattern 100, the middle decorative pattern 101, and the right decorative pattern 102 are displayed in a jackpot display mode in which all the same patterns are arranged, so that a jackpot game occurs. There may be cases where a presentation announcement with content that suggests the following is made. Even if a performance notification with content that suggests the occurrence of such a jackpot game is performed, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to be stopped. In this case, the performance notification being executed will end at the timing when the game is stopped.

Therefore, the jackpot game that was originally scheduled to be executed (if the safety device was not activated) will not occur and the game will be stopped, causing a disadvantage to the player. There is a possibility that Therefore, during a right-handed game (during a special symbol variation game), it is desirable to display an operation notice that allows the player to grasp the current value of the difference ball counter. Since the firing of the game ball can be controlled so that it does not reach the predetermined value (95000), it is possible to avoid the situation where the game is stopped during the execution of the jackpot variable game, and the jackpot that is scheduled to occur can be avoided. It becomes possible to enjoy the game. In addition, the contents of the activation notice display are not limited to those mentioned above, for example, ``Please stop firing, the jackpot game may not be executed'', etc. Depending on how you play, there is a possibility of losing the jackpot game. It may also be possible to display that there is.

Next, the safety device activation notification using the LED is carried out using the board side LED 63a and /Or an operation advance notification is executed that causes some or all of the frame-side LEDs 64a to emit white light. This activation notice makes it possible to suggest that the safety device activation flag is about to turn ON. Here, when the operation advance notification is performed using some or all of the board-side LEDs 63a, some or all of the frame-side LEDs 64a will be activated depending on the performance display being executed (normal variable performance, reach performance, etc.). The device is configured to perform a light emitting effect. In addition, when a part or all of the frame-side LED 64a is used to notify the operation notice, some or all of the board-side LED 63a will be activated according to the performance display being executed (normal variable performance, reach performance, etc.). Execute a light-emitting effect.

In addition, the operation advance notice is set to cause a part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a to emit white light under the start condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)). However, when a predetermined condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 91000)) is satisfied, part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a is changed from white light emission. It may be configured to change the light emission mode (eg, yellow light emission, etc.). Furthermore, under another condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 92000)), part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a may be changed from yellow light emission to a different light emission mode (e.g. It may be configured to change to green light emission, etc.). In this way, the light emitting mode may be changed in predetermined units (1000) until the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000). Further, regarding the change in the light emission mode, not only the color of the light emission but also the type of light emission (lighting, blinking, slow blinking, fast blinking, etc.) may be changed.

Here, the operation advance notice is controlled to be executed in synchronization with (corresponds to) the operation advance notice described above. Therefore, unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that the operation advance notice is also being executed when the operation advance notice display is executed. Further, the operation advance notice is configured to be executable in synchronization with (corresponding to) various execution contents related to the operation advance notice described above. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed in synchronization with (corresponding to) the operation advance notice display, and for example, the operation advance notice may be configured to be executed even after the operation advance notice display ends. Furthermore, the operation advance notice display may be configured to be executed even after the end of the operation advance notice. In this way, the execution period (or execution timing) of the operation advance notice display and the execution period (or execution timing) of the operation advance notice may be configured to be different. In addition, at least either the operation advance notice display or the operation advance notice is executed from the start of the special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). The configuration may be such that this is possible. As a result, even if either one (the image display means 31 or the LED) cannot be executed due to a malfunction, or if one of them is used to display an effect (normal variable effect, reach effect, etc.), the player can On the other hand, it is possible to suggest that the opportunity for the safety device activation flag to turn ON is approaching.

The safety device activation notification using the LED is performed when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is stopped, the LED 63a on the board side and/or the frame side Part or all of the LED 64a is controlled to be turned off and maintained in the turned off state until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). When the game is stopped in this way, by stopping the light emitting effect of each LED (all or part of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a), it is ensured that no more games will be played. Structured to suggest. However, when executing an error display while the game is stopped, a part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a is configured to be controlled to emit light in an error light emission mode according to the content of the error display. Good too. Further, even if an error display is to be performed during the game stop state, it may be configured to control part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a to be turned off.

Next, the movable effects by the movable objects 30a and 30b are in a movable state from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). controlled by In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-1, the movable objects 30a and 30b are positioned at the origin position during the first half of the period from the period in which the effect display normally executes the variable effect to the period in which the reach effect is executed. It is controlled to move to the performance position in the latter half of the reach performance. The movable performance by the movable animals 30a, 30b is configured to be determined according to the contents of the performance display, and in this embodiment, the movable performance by the movable animals 30a, 30b is performed in the latter half of the reach performance. This makes it possible to notify the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbols is a jackpot. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to stop, the movable performance that is being executed is stopped and the movable objects 30a and 30b are moved to the performance position ( A return-to-origin operation is performed to move the robot from the movable position) to the origin position. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game stop screen displayed on the image display means 31 from being obstructed by the movable objects 30a and 30b when the game is controlled to be in the game stop state. In addition, it was decided to stop the movable performance in progress at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST2), but this is not limited to this. After the movable performance in progress ends, the movable objects 30a and 30b are moved to the performance position (or It may be configured to perform a return-to-origin operation for moving from the middle position) to the origin position.

Next, as an adjustment function, the volume adjustment button 16 is effective from the time when the special symbol starts changing (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). It is controlled so that When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the volume adjustment operation is continued until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). is controlled so that it is invalid. In this way, when the game is in a stopped state, by disabling the volume adjustment operation, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice that the game is being controlled in a stopped state. Further, for example, if a volume adjustment operation is performed at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST2) and volume setting information indicating the current volume setting is displayed on the image display means 31, the game is controlled to be stopped. At the same time, it is desirable to control the game stop screen so that the currently displayed volume setting information is hidden and the game stop screen is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game stop screen displayed on the image display means 31 from being obstructed by the volume setting information when the game is controlled to be in the game stop state. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the volume setting information is displayed on the image display means 31 at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST2), after the game is controlled to be stopped, for a predetermined period of time (e.g. The volume setting information may be displayed superimposed on the game stop screen (so that the display layer is at the top) for only 5 seconds). However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment operation be controlled to be invalid even while the volume setting information is displayed while the game is stopped. In addition, when displaying volume setting information over the game stop screen (so that the display layer is on top), a message display image (e.g., ``Game is in a stop state. Please send an attendant.'') as the game stop screen. ) or two-dimensional code are displayed, it is desirable to display the volume setting information in a position that does not overlap with them.

Next, as an adjustment function, the light intensity adjustment button 17 is effective for light intensity adjustment operation from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). It is controlled so that When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the light amount adjustment operation is continued until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). is controlled so that it is invalid. In this way, when the game is in the stopped state, by disabling the light amount adjustment operation, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice that the game is being controlled in the stopped state. For example, if the light amount adjustment operation is performed at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST2) and the light amount setting information indicating the current light amount setting is displayed on the image display means 31, the game is controlled to be stopped. At the same time, it is desirable to control the game stop screen so that the light amount setting information being displayed is hidden and the game stop screen is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game stop screen displayed on the image display means from being obstructed (visibility reduced) by the light amount setting information when the game is controlled to be in the game stop state. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the light amount setting information is displayed on the image display means 31 at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST2), the predetermined period of time (for example: The light amount setting information may be displayed overlapping the game stop screen by 5 seconds (so that the display layer is on top). However, it is desirable that the light amount adjustment operation be controlled to be invalid even while the light amount setting information is displayed while the game is in the stopped state. In addition, when displaying light intensity setting information over the game stop screen (so that the display layer is on top), a message display image (e.g. "Game is in a stop state. Please send an attendant") as the game stop screen. ) or two-dimensional code are displayed, it is desirable to display the light amount setting information in a position that does not overlap with them.

Next, the control details of various functions controlled by the payout control section 510 in the course of ST1 to ST3 will be explained.

As a payout control, the ball lending button 20 is controlled so that the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1), the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is stopped, and then the gaming machine The ball lending operation is controlled to remain valid until the power supply of the player 1 is cut off (ST3). As a result, the lending process is performed by operating the ball lending button 20 not only before the game is stopped, but also after the game is stopped, so that game balls can be given to the player. It is composed of

Next, as a payout control, the return button 21 is controlled so that the safety device activation flag is set to ON state from the start of variation of special symbols (ST1), the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is stopped, and then, The return operation is controlled to remain valid until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). As a result, the balance information on the frequency display 62a is cleared by operating the return button 21 not only before the game is stopped, but also after the game is stopped, and the player is not allowed to play the game. The system is configured so that the ball balance can be returned.

In this way, by controlling the ball lending operation using the ball lending button 20 and the return operation using the return button 21 to be valid even in the game stop state, ball lending and return of game balls can be performed after shifting to the game stop state. For example, the player does not need to return the game balls that he or she has acquired in advance before the game is stopped, and after the game is stopped, the player does not have to return the game balls that he or she has acquired through previous games. It becomes possible to perform operations.

Next, as a payout control, the prize ball payout operation starts from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (ST1), sets the safety device activation flag to ON state, and activates the safety device (ST2), and is controlled to stop the game. The payout operation of the won prize balls is controlled to be valid until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). As a result, the prize ball payout device 23 operates not only before the game stop state is controlled, but also after the game stop state is controlled, so that the game ball payout operation is executed, and the game ball is delivered to the player. The ball is configured to be executable. Therefore, even if the payout of game balls has not yet been completed at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST2) and the gaming stop state is controlled, the prize ball payout device 23 is activated after the gaming stop state is controlled. It is possible to perform a game ball payout operation regarding unpaid prize balls. However, while the game is stopped, processing related to the payout of prize balls related to winning is not performed (the payout control command (number of prize balls designation command) is not transmitted from the main control unit 520 to the payout control unit 510. ) During the game stop state, various winning holes (special symbol 1 starting hole 38, special symbol 2 starting hole 39, upper left winning hole 40, middle left winning hole 41, lower left winning hole 42, right winning hole 43, upper large winning hole) 44, even if a ball enters the lower large prize opening 45), the prize ball payout device 23 will not execute the payout operation for the prize ball based on the new winning.

Next, the firing of the game ball as firing control is effectively executed from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). . When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to a halt state, the launch control will continue until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Controlled to be invalid. Thereby, in the game stop state, the game ball is controlled to be in a state where it is impossible to shoot, so the player can be made aware that the game is in the stop state. In addition, while the game is stopped, processing related to the game (lottery processing, symbol variation processing, prize winning and prize ball processing, etc.) is not executed, so there is no benefit for the player to fire the game ball, and the firing control is stopped. It is desirable to leave it there. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a stopped state, the firing control may be controlled to remain effective until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). As a result, after the game is stopped, the operator of the hall can check the operation of the firing control. In addition, if the game ball scheduled to be launched remains on the launch rail, stopping the launch will make it impossible for the player to retrieve the game ball, so this can be prevented. In order to do this, by enabling the launch control even when the game is stopped, it is possible to collect the game balls that are staying on the launch rail (this can be done by intentionally launching the ball with a launch intensity that makes it a foul ball). It may be configured as follows.

Further, as described above, the main control unit 520 is partially restricted from executing the program processing during the gaming stop state, but the payout control unit 510 is limited from executing the program processing even during the gaming stop state. Never. This is because, as described above, even during the game stop state, it is necessary for the payout control unit 510 to effectively control the ball lending operation using the ball lending button 20, the return operation using the return button 21, and the prize ball payout operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout control unit 510 may also be configured to restrict some (including a plurality of) or all program processes (ball lending operation, return operation, prize ball payout operation).

Next, a time chart (Embodiment 2-3) regarding the operation of the safety device, which is a characteristic part of the present invention, will be described in detail using FIG. 5-2-2. Furthermore, the configuration may be a combination of the descriptions regarding the embodiments described above and the descriptions regarding the embodiments described later. In this way, the contents of each embodiment are not limited to individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments. Furthermore, in order to avoid redundant descriptions of the same contents as those described above, explanations will basically be omitted.

(If the safety device is activated during symbol variation game 2)
In Figure 5-2-2, the symbol variation of the special symbol is started (ST1), and during the symbol variation, the safety device activation flag is turned ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is stopped and the game machine A time chart shows a series of steps up to when the power source 1 is cut off (ST3). Furthermore, FIG. 5-2-2 shows how the main control section 520, production control section 540, and payout control section 510 respectively control the various functions shown below during the progress of ST1 to ST3. ing.

In FIG. 5-2-2, various functions controlled by the main control unit 520 include functions related to the symbol display device 76 (special symbol display LEDs 76a, 76b, special symbol memory display LEDs 76c, 76d, normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e). , lighting control of various LEDs such as the normal symbol memory display LED 76f, right-handed display LED 76g, etc.), functions related to the performance display LED 521 (lighting control of the 7-segment display, counting the number of wins and outs, processing of calculating the base value) , functions related to the electric chew support (operation control of the special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72), functions relating to the big winning openings 44 and 45 (operating control of the winning opening opening and closing solenoids 70 and 71), functions relating to external terminals (controlling the operation of the opening and closing solenoids 70 and 71 of the special symbol 2 starting opening), It describes functions related to safety devices (output control), functions related to safety devices (difference ball counting processing), and functions related to sighting test signals (output control of safety device activation signals and safety device activation signals).

In addition, various functions controlled by the production control unit 540 include functions related to the variable display device 95 (lighting control of special symbol variation LEDs and normal symbol variation LEDs), functions related to the image display means 31 (mini symbol 103a, right-handed display, Error display, pending display 104a, 105a, special symbol storage number display 106a, 106b, mode display, safety device activation display, display control related to performance display), functions related to LEDs 63a, 64a (lighting control related to safety device activation notification), movable parts 30a and 30b (execution control of movable effects) and adjustment functions (switching control between enabling and disabling the volume adjustment button 16 and the light intensity adjustment button 17) are described.

In addition, various functions controlled by the payout control unit 510 include a payout control function (switching control of enabling/disabling of the ball lending button 20 and return button 21, execution control regarding prize ball payout operation), a firing control function (control of firing control (enable/disable switching control).

In the example shown in FIG. 5-2-2, in a game state in which left-handed hitting is advantageous (here, a low probability low base state, a high probability low base state, etc. in which a variable game with special symbols can be executed), special symbol symbols An example of transitioning to a game stop state during fluctuation is shown. The left-handed game is a left-handed game state in which a variable game with special symbols can be executed, and the safety device activation flag is controlled to be in the ON state (≒ the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000)) during the left-handed game. This causes the game to be stopped.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in Figure 5-2-2, when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (≒ the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000)), the safety device is activated immediately. (ST2), and is configured to be controlled to a game stop state. In this way, in a game state where a variable game with special symbols can be executed (a game state other than jackpot games and small win games), when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (≒ the difference ball counter is set to a predetermined value) (95000)), even if there is a variable game with special symbols in progress, the safety device is immediately activated (ST2) without waiting for the end of the special symbol variable game, and the game is controlled to be stopped. .

Next, the control details of various functions controlled by the main control section 520 in the course of ST1 to ST3 will be explained.

In addition, lighting control of 7-segment displays such as special symbol display LEDs 76a and 76b, special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d, normal symbol memory display LED 76f, and performance display LED 521, base value calculation processing, and grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 70. , 71 operation control, security signal output control, difference ball counting processing, safety device pre-operation signal, and safety device activation signal output control are the same as those described above based on Figure 5-2-1. I will omit the explanation.

The normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is in a fluctuation display mode (light emission pattern during fluctuation) from the start of special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). It is possible to display the lights in a stop display pattern (win stop light emission pattern, loss stop pattern) depending on the lottery result. In addition, not only when the light is displayed in the fluctuating display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern), but when the right gate switch 46a (normal symbol starting port switch) does not detect a game ball, the normal symbol fluctuating display LED 76e will be stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the previous lottery result. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) to control the game to a stopped state, the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is not displayed (lights out), and the gaming machine 1 The display is controlled to remain non-displayed (unlit) until the power is cut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol variation display LED 76e is controlled to be non-display (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next normal symbol variation game is not to be executed. ing.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-2, the safety device is activated (ST2) at the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is lit in the fluctuation display mode (fluctuation light emission pattern), and the game is stopped. is controlled by. In this way, when the safety device is activated (ST2), it is activated immediately without waiting for the elapse of the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display mode (the fluctuating light emitting pattern) (the end of the fluctuation of the fluctuating normal symbol fluctuation game). It will be controlled to be non-displayed (unlit). Similarly, when the stop display is displayed in the win display (win stop light emission pattern) or loss display (loss stop light emission pattern), the display is immediately hidden without waiting for the stop display time (determined display time) to elapse. (lights out).

Next, the right-handed display LED 76g is set from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1) to the safety device activation flag being set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is stopped, and then the game is stopped. Until the power of aircraft 1 is cut off (ST3), the display is displayed in a display mode (non-display state≒unlit state) indicating that left-handed firing is advantageous. In this way, when the safety device is activated (ST2) during a left-handed game, the right-handed game display LED 76g is controlled to continue to be non-displayed (unlit state) even when the game is stopped.

Next, the counting process of the number of wins and the number of outs on the performance display LED 521 is performed from the start of the special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). be executed effectively. Here, during the left-handed game, a process of counting the number of wins and a process of counting the number of outs are executed. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to stop, the performance display LED 521 will display winnings until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Counting the number and number of outs is not performed. In this way, the reason why the performance display LED 521 does not count the number of wins and outs in the game stop state is because the game stop state is configured so that no games can be played. This is because it is thought that winnings and outs will not occur. Therefore, by disabling the counting process of the number of winnings and the number of outs, the illegal number of winnings and the number of outs are counted, and the base value is prevented from being fraudulently manipulated. In addition, in the game stop state, even if a game ball enters the winning hole 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, the prize ball will not be paid out to the player. It is also desirable that the base value counting process for winning a prize is not performed. However, even when the game is stopped, the performance display LED 521 may be configured to count the number of wins and outs. In this case, it is desirable to enable the firing of game balls at least even when the game is stopped. . In addition, even when the performance display LED 521 performs the process of counting the number of wins and the number of outs, prize balls are not paid out to the player.

Next, the opening/closing control of the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 related to the operation of the electric chew support function is performed by setting the safety device activation flag to the ON state from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1) and activating the safety device ( Until ST2), it is effectively executed and the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state according to the fluctuation result of the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-2, the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is still fluctuating, so it is controlled to be in the closed state. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to the stopped state, the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is controlled to the OFF state, The special symbol 2 starting port 39 is controlled to be in a closed state. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-2, the safety device is activated (ST2) when the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is controlled to the OFF state and the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is in the closed state. Therefore, the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is continuously controlled to be in the closed state even during the game stop state. This prevents the game ball from entering the special symbol 2 starting port 39 in the game stop state.

Next, the control contents of various functions controlled by the effect control section 540 in the course of ST1 to ST3 will be explained.

In addition, special symbol fluctuation LED, mini symbol 103a, error display, pending display 104a, 105a, special symbol storage number display 106a, 106b, mode display, safety device operation display, display control related to performance display, lighting control related to safety device operation notification. , the execution control of the movable effects, and the switching control of enabling/disabling the volume adjustment button 16 and the light amount adjustment button 17 are the same as those described above based on FIG. 5-2-1, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol fluctuation LED lights up in a fluctuation display mode (light emission pattern during fluctuation) from the start of special symbol fluctuation (ST1) until the safety device activation flag is set to ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). It is possible to display it, and it is displayed in a variable display mode or a stopped display mode in response to (synchronized with) the lottery result of the normal symbol variation game (the variation mode of the normal symbol variation display LED 76e). When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the normal symbol fluctuation LED 76e is not displayed (unlit state), and the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. The display is controlled to remain non-displayed (unlit) until it is shut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol variation LED 76e is controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next normal symbol variation game will not be executed.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-2-2, the safety device is activated (ST2) at the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation LED is displayed in the fluctuation display mode, and the game is controlled to be stopped. In this way, when the safety device is activated (ST2), it is activated immediately without waiting for the elapse of the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display mode (the fluctuating light emitting pattern) (the end of the fluctuation of the fluctuating normal symbol fluctuation game). It will be controlled to be non-displayed (lights out). Similarly, when the stop display is displayed in the win display (win stop light emission pattern) or loss display (loss stop light emission pattern), the display is immediately hidden without waiting for the stop display time (determined display time) to elapse. (lights out).

Next, the right hit display displayed on the image display means 31 is such that the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state from the start of variation of the special symbol (ST1), the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to be stopped. Thereafter, the display is controlled to be in a non-display state until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). In this way, when the safety device is activated (ST2) during a left-handed game, the right-handed game display displayed on the image display means 31 is controlled to be hidden even when the game is stopped.

In addition, in the process of ST1 to ST3, the control contents of various functions controlled by the payout control section 510 are the same as the contents described based on the above-mentioned FIG. 5-2-1, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a time chart (Embodiment 2-4) regarding the operation of the safety device, which is a characteristic part of the present invention, will be described in detail using FIG. 5-3-1. Furthermore, the configuration may be a combination of the descriptions regarding the embodiments described above and the descriptions regarding the embodiments described later. In this way, the contents of each embodiment are not limited to individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments. Furthermore, in order to avoid redundant descriptions of the same contents as those described above, explanations will basically be omitted.

(If the safety device is activated while not playing 1)
In Figure 5-3-1, the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and the state becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag turns ON during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). The time chart shows a series of steps from when the safety device is activated (ST2) to when the game is brought to a halt state and the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Furthermore, FIG. 5-3-1 shows how the main control section 520, production control section 540, and payout control section 510 respectively control the various functions shown below in the course of ST1 to ST3. ing.

In FIG. 5-3-1, various functions controlled by the main control unit 520 include functions related to the symbol display device 76 (special symbol display LEDs 76a, 76b, special symbol memory display LEDs 76c, 76d, normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e). , lighting control of various LEDs such as the normal symbol memory display LED 76f, right-handed display LED 76g, etc.), functions related to the performance display LED 521 (lighting control of the 7-segment display, counting the number of wins and outs, processing of calculating the base value) , functions related to the electric chew support (operation control of the special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72), functions relating to the big prize openings 44 and 45 (operation control of the winning opening opening and closing solenoids 70 and 71), functions concerning external terminals (controlling the operation of the special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72), It describes functions related to safety devices (output control), functions related to safety devices (difference ball counting processing), and functions related to sight-fire test signals (output control of safety device activation signals and safety device activation signals).

In addition, various functions controlled by the production control unit 540 include functions related to the variable display device 95 (lighting control of special symbol variation LEDs and normal symbol variation LEDs), functions related to the image display means 31 (mini symbol 103a, right-handed display, Error display, pending display 104a, 105a, special symbol storage number display 106a, 106b, mode display, safety device activation display, display control related to performance display), functions related to LEDs 63a, 64a (lighting control related to safety device activation notification), movable parts 30a and 30b (execution control of movable effects) and adjustment functions (switching control between enabling and disabling the volume adjustment button 16 and the light intensity adjustment button 17) are described.

In addition, various functions controlled by the payout control unit 510 include a payout control function (control of enabling/disabling of the ball lending button 20 and the return button 21, execution control regarding prize ball payout operation), a firing control function (control of the firing control), (enable/disable switching control).

In the example shown in FIG. 5-3-1, in a game state in which right-handed hitting is advantageous (here, a low-probability high base state where a special symbol variable game can be executed, a high-probability high base state, etc.), special symbols are not used. This shows an example of transitioning to a game stop state while symbols are changing (during non-gaming). A right-handed game is a right-handed game state in which a variable game with special symbols can be executed, and the safety device activation flag is controlled to be ON (≒ the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000)) during the right-handed game. This will cause the game to be stopped.

Furthermore, in the embodiment shown in Figure 5-3-1, when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (≒ the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000)), the safety device is activated immediately. (ST2), it is configured to be controlled to a game stop state. In this way, in a game state where a variable game with special symbols can be executed (a game state other than jackpot games and small win games), when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (≒ the difference ball counter is set to a predetermined value) (95000)), even if the special symbols are not changing (not playing), the safety device is immediately activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to be stopped.

Next, the control details of various functions controlled by the main control section 520 in the course of ST1 to ST3 will be explained.

The special symbol fluctuation display LEDs 76a and 76b of the symbol display device 76 are turned on when the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol ends and becomes non-symbol fluctuation (non-gaming) (ST1). Until the activation flag is turned on and the safety device is activated (ST2), a stop display is displayed in a loss mode (loss stop light emission pattern). After that, when the game is controlled to be stopped, the special symbol fluctuation display LEDs 76a and 76b are not displayed (lights out) and remain hidden (lights out) until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). controlled to maintain In this way, in the game stop state, the special symbol variation display LEDs 76a and 76b are controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next special symbol variation game will not be executed. ing.

Next, the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d indicate that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and the symbol is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is activated during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). When the is turned on, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to be stopped, and then it is not displayed until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3) (unlit state ≒ the current number of pending memories is 0) (indicates that it is). In this way, in the game stop state, the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d are controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), so that the reserved memory is erased for the player and the next special symbol variation game is not executed. This indicates that the condition is

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e of the symbol display device 76 is turned on after the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol ends and becomes non-symbol fluctuation (non-gaming) (ST1), and becomes safe during non-symbol fluctuation (non-gaming). Until the device operation flag turns ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), the stop display is displayed in a lose mode (loss stop light emitting pattern). In addition, not only when the display is stopped in a loss mode (loss stop light emitting pattern), but when the right gate switch 46a (normal symbol starting port switch) detects a game ball, the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e displays a fluctuation display. It will be displayed by lighting in the mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern). When the safety device activation flag is turned on and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to stop, the special symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is not displayed (unlit) and the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. The display is controlled to remain non-displayed (unlit) until it is shut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol variation display LED 76e is controlled to be non-displayed (unlit state), thereby indicating to the player that the next normal symbol variation game is not to be executed. .

In addition, if the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state at the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is lit in the fluctuation display mode (fluctuation light emission pattern), the fluctuation display mode It will be controlled to be non-displayed (lights out) immediately without waiting for the elapse of the fluctuation display time (the end of the fluctuation of the fluctuating normal symbol fluctuation game) of the (fluctuation light emitting pattern). Similarly, when the stop display is displayed in the win display (win stop light emission pattern) or loss display (loss stop light emission pattern), the display is immediately hidden without waiting for the stop display time (determined display time) to elapse. (lights out).

Next, the normal symbol memory display LED 76f indicates that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and it is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is turned ON during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). When the state is reached, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to be stopped, and then it is not displayed (unlit state ≒ the current number of pending memories is 0) until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). display). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol memory display LED 76f is controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), so that the normal symbol retention memory is erased for the player, and the next normal symbol variation game is not executed. This indicates that the condition is

Next, the right-handed display LED 76g indicates that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and it is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is in the ON state during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). At the same time, until the safety device is activated (ST2), the light is displayed in a display mode indicating that right-handed firing is advantageous. Thereafter, when the game is controlled to be stopped, the right-handed display LED 76g becomes non-display (unlit state) and remains non-displayed (unlit state) until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). controlled by. In this manner, in the game stop state, the right-handed firing display LED 76g is controlled to be non-displayed (unlit state), indicating that right-handed firing is no longer advantageous.

Next, the 7-segment display of the performance display LED 521 indicates that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and the state is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is displayed during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). Display control of the base value is performed until the safety device is activated (ST2). After that, when the game is controlled to be stopped, the 7-segment display becomes off (or displays an error (e.g. "E" display)), and remains off until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). (or an error display (eg, "E" display)). In this way, when the game is stopped, the 7-segment display is controlled to turn off (or display an error display (e.g. "E" display)), thereby displaying the current base value even though the game is not possible. It prevents you from doing it. Here, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-1, when the game is controlled to be stopped, the 7-segment display is turned off (or an error display (e.g. "E" display)). The configuration is not limited to this, and the display control of the base value may be performed even when the game is stopped. This makes it possible to check the base value even when the game is stopped.

By the way, when the 7-segment display of the performance display LED 521 is performing the operation confirmation display, the safety device activation flag turns ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is stopped. , the 7-segment display becomes off (or error display (e.g. "E" display)) and remains off (or error display (e.g. "E" display)) until the power to gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3) ) is controlled to maintain. In this way, even if there is still time left to execute the operation confirmation display, the 7-segment display is controlled to be in an off state (or an error display (eg, "E" display)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the operation confirmation display is continued if there is time left to execute the operation confirmation display. This makes it possible to check whether or not the 7-segment display of the performance display LED 521 operates normally even when the game is controlled to be stopped.

Next, the performance display LED 521 counts the number of wins and outs after the symbol variation of the special symbol ends, and the state becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and non-symbol variation (non-gaming) occurs. This is effectively executed until the safety device activation flag turns ON and the safety device is activated (ST2). Here, during right-handed games (here, low probability high base state, high probability high base state, etc. where special symbol variable games can be executed), the number of wins is not counted, and only the number of outs is counted. Ru. Thereafter, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a stopped state, the counting process of the number of wins and the number of outs on the performance display LED 521 is not executed until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). In this way, the reason why the performance display LED 521 does not count the number of wins and outs in the game stop state is because the game stop state is configured so that no games can be played. This is because it is considered that winnings and outs will not occur. Therefore, by disabling the counting process of the number of winnings and the number of outs, the illegal number of winnings and the number of outs are counted, and the base value is prevented from being fraudulently manipulated. In addition, in the game stop state, even if a game ball enters the winning hole, the winning ball will not be paid out to the player, so it is desirable that the base value counting process related to winning is not performed. However, even when the game is stopped, the performance display LED 521 may be configured to count the number of wins and outs. In this case, it is desirable to enable the firing of game balls at least even when the game is stopped. . In addition, even when the performance display LED 521 performs the process of counting the number of wins and the number of outs, prize balls are not paid out to the player.

Next, in the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521, the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed and the state becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is set during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). This is effectively executed until the switch is turned on and the safety device is activated (ST2). Thereafter, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a stopped state, the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521 is not executed until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). In this way, the reason why the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521 is not executed in the game stop state is because the game stop state is configured such that no games can be played, and under such a situation, winnings and outs occur in the first place. This is because there is nothing to do. Therefore, by disabling the base value calculation process, the base value is calculated based on the illegal number of wins and outs, and the base value is prevented from being manipulated fraudulently. In addition, in the game stop state, even if game balls enter the winning holes 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, and 45, the prize balls will not be paid out to the player. , it is desirable that the base value calculation process for winning a prize is not performed. However, the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521 may be executed even in the game stop state, and in this case, it is desirable to enable the firing of game balls at least even in the game stop state. Moreover, even when the base value calculation process of the performance display LED 521 is executed, prize balls are not paid out to the player.

Next, the opening/closing control of the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 related to the operation of the electric chew support function is performed after the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1). During (non-gaming), the safety device activation flag is turned ON and the special symbol 2 is effectively executed until the safety device is activated (ST2), and according to the fluctuation result of the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e. The starting port 39 is controlled to be open or closed. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-1, the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is stopped and displayed in a loss mode (loss stop light emitting pattern) and is therefore controlled to be in a closed state. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to stop, the special symbol 2 will be displayed until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). By controlling the starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 to the OFF state, the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is controlled to the closed state. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-1, the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is controlled to the OFF state, and the safety device is activated (ST2) when the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is in the closed state. Therefore, even during the game stop state, the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is continuously controlled to be in the closed state. This prevents the game ball from entering the special symbol 2 starting port 39 in the game stop state.

Also, during non-symbol variation (non-gaming), the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is controlled to the ON state, and the safety device is activated when the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is in the open state (ST2). In this case, the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is controlled to be closed without waiting for the preset opening time to elapse. In this way, when the safety device is activated (ST2), the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72 is controlled to the OFF state, and the special symbol 2 starting port 39 is closed, thereby preventing the subsequent game from being stopped. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the special symbol 2 starting port 39.

Next, the opening/closing control of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoids 70 and 71 for opening and closing the big winning openings 44 and 45 is performed after the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed and is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1). During non-symbol variation (non-gaming), the safety device activation flag is turned ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to a stopped state, until the power to the gaming machine 1 is shut off (ST3). ) is controlled to the closed state. Therefore, during ST1 to ST3, the big prize opening opening/closing solenoids 70 and 71 are always controlled to be in the OFF state. In this way, even when the game is stopped, the big prize opening opening/closing solenoids 70 and 71 are controlled to be in the OFF state, and the big winning openings 44 and 45 are closed, so that the big winning openings 44 and 45 can be opened during the gaming stopped state. This prevents game balls from entering the ball.

Next, the output control of the security signal of the external terminal is such that after the symbol variation of the special symbol ends, it becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is set during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). It is controlled to be in a non-output state until it turns on and the safety device is activated (ST2). When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in the gaming stop state, the security signal is controlled to be in the output state, and thereafter, the output of the security signal is maintained until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). In this way, when the safety device is activated (ST2), by controlling the security signal to the output state, it is possible to notify the hall computer that the game has been stopped.

Next, the difference ball counting process of the difference ball counter related to the safety device is performed after the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed and becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and non-symbol variation (non-gaming). This is effectively executed until the safety device activation flag turns ON and the safety device is activated (ST2). By executing the difference ball counting process, when the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value and the safety device activation flag becomes ON (ST2), the process continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is shut off. (ST3) The difference ball counting process is not executed. This is because once the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), the game will transition to the stopped state regardless of the value of the difference ball counter after that, so there is no need to execute the difference ball counting process. This is because it can be considered that. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a difference ball counting process of a difference ball counter is executed. Specifically, after the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a stopped state, until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). , may be configured to effectively execute. However, in any case, the safety device activation flag, which was once set from the OFF state to the ON state, may change from the ON state to the OFF state again as a result of executing the difference ball counting process of the difference ball counter. It is desirable to configure the system so that it does not occur. As a result, after the safety device activation flag is in the ON state, by controlling the number of wins and the number of outs, the safety device activation flag is changed (ON state → OFF state) and the activation of the safety device is delayed or canceled. It is possible to prevent this behavior.

Next, in the output process of the safety device pre-activation signal related to the test firing test signal, the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and non-symbol variation (non-gaming) occurs. The output is enabled until the safety device activation flag is turned ON and the safety device is activated (ST2). Here, the output enabled state means that it is controlled to be output when a predetermined condition is met (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)). When a predetermined condition is satisfied (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (eg, 90000)), a safety device pre-operation signal is output as a sighting test signal from that point on.

Here, as mentioned above, the safety device pre-operation signal is output when a predetermined condition is met (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)), and this safety device pre-operation signal is output. By doing so, it is possible to notify the test equipment that activation of the safety device (ST2) is approaching. Incidentally, in the embodiment shown in Figure 5-3-1, it is stated that the safety device pre-operation signal can be output from the timing when the non-symbols are changing (non-gaming) (ST1). Even before the symbols are changing (non-gaming) (ST1), the safety device pre-operation signal can be output.

The output processing of the safety device pre-activation signal is switched from the output state to the non-output state when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to the stopped state. It will be done. At this time, it may be configured to immediately switch from the output state to the non-output state, or it may be configured to maintain the output state for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 500ms, 30s, etc.) and then switch to the non-output state. It may be configured as follows. Thereafter, the non-output state is maintained until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). As mentioned above, the purpose of the safety device pre-activation signal is to notify the test device that the safety device is about to activate (ST2), so it cannot be used in the game stop state where the safety device is already activated. Since there is no need to output it, it is desirable to leave it in a non-output state.

In addition, the output processing of the signal before safety device activation is enabled until the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), and after the safety device activation flag is in the ON state (ST2), it is in a non-output state. It may also be configured to control. At this time, it may be configured to immediately switch from the output state to the non-output state when the safety device activation flag becomes ON state (ST2), or it may be configured to immediately switch from the output state to the non-output state, or for a predetermined period of time (e.g. After maintaining the output state (500ms, 30s, etc.), it may be configured to switch to the non-output state. With this configuration, the safety device activation pre-activation signal indicates that the condition for the safety device activation flag to be in the ON state is about to be met (the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 95000)). This makes it possible to notify the test equipment in advance.

Next, the output process of the safety device activation signal related to the test firing test signal is carried out after the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed and becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). The output is controlled to be in a non-output state until the safety device activation flag is turned ON and the safety device is activated (ST2). Thereafter, when the gaming machine is controlled to be in the stopped state, it is maintained in the output state until the power of the gaming machine is cut off (ST3). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output may be configured to be output for a predetermined period of time (eg, 500 ms, 30 s, etc.) after the safety device is activated (ST2). In this way, after the safety device is activated (ST2), when the game is controlled to stop, the safety device activation signal is output, indicating that the safety device has been activated for the test device (≒ game stop). It is possible to notify that the state has been controlled.

Next, the control contents of various functions controlled by the effect control section 540 in the course of ST1 to ST3 will be explained.

The special symbol variation LED of the variation display device 95 indicates that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and it is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is ON during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). Until the state is reached and the safety device is activated (ST2), it is possible to display the lighting in the fluctuating display mode (light emitting pattern during fluctuating), and the lottery result of the special symbol fluctuating game (special symbol fluctuating display LED 76a, It is displayed in a variable display mode or a stopped display mode in response to (synchronization with) the variable mode of 76b. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-1, since the special symbol variation game is not being executed, the display is controlled with a stop display lighting pattern (or a stop display lighting pattern). When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the special symbol fluctuation LED is not displayed (unlit state), and the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. It is controlled to maintain non-display (lights out state) until it is shut off (ST3) (if the stop display mode is a stop lights out pattern, lights out is maintained even after the game is stopped). In this way, in the game stop state, the special symbol variation LED is controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next special symbol variation game will not be executed.

Next, the normal symbol variation LED indicates that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and it is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is in the ON state during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). At the same time, until the safety device is activated (ST2), it is possible to display the lighting in a fluctuating display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern), and the lottery result of the normal symbol fluctuating game (fluctuation mode of the LED 76e for normal symbol fluctuating display) is possible. ) is displayed in a fluctuating display mode or a static display mode in response to (synchronization with). In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-1, since the normal symbol variation game is not being executed, the display is controlled with a stop display lighting pattern (or a stop display lighting pattern). When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to stop, the normal symbol fluctuation LED will not be displayed (unlit state) and the power supply of the gaming machine 1 will be turned off. The display is controlled to remain non-displayed (unlit) until it is shut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol variation LED is controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next normal symbol variation game will not be executed.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in Figure 5-3-1, the safety device is activated (ST2) at the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation LED is displayed in the stop display lighting pattern (or the stop light off pattern), and the game is controlled to be stopped. However, if it is lit in a fluctuating display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern), it will be hidden immediately without waiting for the fluctuating display time to elapse (the fluctuating end of the fluctuating normal symbol fluctuating game). (lights out).

Next, the mini symbol 103a displayed on the image display means 31 is changed into a non-symbol variation (non-gaming) after the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed (ST1), and a safety device is set during the non-symbol variation (non-gaming). Until the activation flag turns ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), it is displayed in a stop display mode (missing stop pattern such as "246"). When the game is controlled to be in a stopped state, the mini symbols 103a are controlled to be in a non-display state, and are controlled to maintain the non-display state until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the mini symbols 103a of the image display means 31 are controlled to be hidden, indicating to the player that the next special symbol variation game will not be executed.

Next, the right-handed display displayed on the image display means 31 indicates that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and the symbol is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device is activated during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). Until the activation flag is turned on and the safety device is activated (ST2), the display is displayed in a display mode indicating that right-handed firing is advantageous (a display mode encouraging right-handed firing). When the game is controlled to be in the stopped state, the right-handed display is controlled to be in the non-display state and maintained in the non-display state until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the right-handed firing display is controlled to a non-display state, indicating that right-handed firing is no longer an advantageous state.

Next, the error display displayed on the image display means 31 indicates that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and the state is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device is activated during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). As soon as the flag turns ON, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to stop.Then, until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3), the error details (RWM initialization, ball jam, out of supply) are activated. , counting abnormality, wire breakage, door opening, winning slot error, radio wave error, magnetic error, etc.) are controlled to be able to be reported. Here, regarding the error display, the reason why it is possible to notify even when the game is stopped is to accurately notify the content of the error that is occurring even when the game is stopped. Therefore, if an error display is displayed during a jackpot game, the safety device is activated (ST2), and even if the game is stopped, the error display currently displayed will continue to be displayed. be done. In this way, by continuing to display the error even after the activation of the safety device (ST2), it is possible to easily understand and clear the content of the error that is occurring even after the game has shifted to the stopped state.

In addition, the error display is when the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and the state becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is set to ON state during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). At the same time, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to be stopped, and the error details can be notified until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). The period from when the fluctuation ends and the state becomes non-symbol fluctuation (non-gaming) (ST1) until the safety device activation flag turns ON during non-symbol fluctuation (non-gaming) and the safety device is activated (ST2). , it may be possible to notify the error details. In this case, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a stopped state, the error display may be hidden, and the hidden state may be maintained until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). In addition, if there is an error display during execution, a safety device is activated (ST2) and the display may be switched to non-display immediately when the game is stopped, or a predetermined display time ( For example, the display may be continued even after the game has been stopped for 30 seconds.

Moreover, the above-described content is not limited to error display, but may be similarly applied to error notification using LEDs or audio. For example, if error notification is performed using not only an error display but also an LED or sound, the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the non-symbol variation During (non-gaming) the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and thereafter until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3) It may be configured to enable error notification. Furthermore, the other configurations described above may be similarly applied to error notification using LEDs or audio.

In addition, only the error display is displayed after the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed, and the state becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is set to ON state during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). At the same time, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and thereafter, until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3), it is configured to be able to display an error. Regarding error notification using LEDs and audio, The symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and the symbol is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and during non-symbol variation (non-gaming), the safety device activation flag is turned ON and the safety device is activated (ST2). The configuration may be configured such that error notification can be made until the end of the process. For example, if a specific error occurs (RWM initialization, ball jam, out of supply, counting error, wire breakage, door opening, winning slot error, radio wave error, magnetic error, etc.), the game is controlled to be stopped. Until then, an error notification is made using an error display, LED or/and sound, and after the game is controlled to a stopped state, only an error display is performed, and the LED or/and sound indicates that the game has been controlled to a stopped state. Control may be performed in a stop state notification mode (LED: lighting pattern or non-lighting pattern, sound: with notification sound, or without notification sound). Thereby, it is possible to appropriately notify the error display and the fact that the game is being controlled to be stopped. Further, at this time, the image display means 31 may be configured to display an error display and a game stop state notification image indicating that the game is being controlled to a stop state. In addition, regarding error notification using LED or audio, the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is set during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and thereafter, until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3), it is configured to be able to notify an error, and the error display is , Even if it is configured so that an error can be displayed until the safety device activation flag turns ON and the safety device is activated (ST2) during non-symbol fluctuations (non-gaming) after the symbol variation of the special symbol ends. good.

In addition, the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and the state is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and during non-symbol variation (non-gaming), the safety device activation flag is turned ON and the safety device is activated ( The error display displayed until ST2) and the safety device activation flag are set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and then the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. The display mode of the error display displayed until the error occurs (ST3) may be configured to be different. This makes it possible to display errors according to the gaming state. Specifically, the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and the state becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and during non-symbol variation (non-gaming), the safety device activation flag turns ON and the safety device is activated. The error display to be displayed until the is activated (ST2) should be displayed in a location, size, and content that takes into account the placement relationship with other information display images related to the game, and the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state. The safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is stopped, and then the error display that is displayed until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3) has relatively few restrictions on display. The location, display size, and display content may be displayed in a manner that is easy to identify. For example, when the game is stopped (after the safety device is activated), the background image becomes a solid black image, so that the error display contents can be more easily identified than during the game (before the safety device is activated). good.

Next, the pending displays 104a and 105a displayed on the image display means 31 indicate that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended, that the symbol is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and that it is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming). Until the safety device activation flag is turned on and the safety device is activated (ST2), the system is controlled to be able to display a pending image according to the current number of pending memories indicated by the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d. . In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-1, since there is no reserved storage number of special symbols, the reserved image is not displayed (non-display state). When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to be stopped, the hold display of the image display means 31 is controlled to the non-display state, and the gaming machine 1 The display is controlled to maintain the non-display state until the power is cut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the pending displays 76c and 76d of the image display means 31 are controlled to a non-display state, so that the player's pending memory is erased and the next special symbol variation game is not executed. This indicates that the condition is

Next, the special symbol memory number displays 106a and 106b displayed on the image display means 31 indicate that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and that it is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and that it is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming). Until the safety device activation flag turns ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d display the number of pending items according to the current number of pending memories (e.g. "0"). ” to “4”). In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-1, since there is no special symbol reserved memory, control is performed to display the number of reserved symbols indicating that the current number of reserved symbols is 0. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to be stopped, the pending number display on the image display means 31 is controlled to a non-display state, and the game machine The display is controlled to maintain the non-display state until the power of the display 1 is cut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the display of the pending number of symbols on the image display means 31 is controlled to a non-display state, thereby providing the player with a state in which the pending memory number disappears and the next special symbol variation game is not executed. It shows that.

In addition, regarding the special symbol memory number displays 106a and 106b, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the display state continues even when the game is controlled to be stopped. It may be configured to do so. In this case, before the safety device activation flag is set to ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2), the number of reserved pieces is displayed according to the current number of reserved pieces indicated by the special symbol memory display LEDs 76c and 76d (for example, After the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2), the value is “0” indicating that there is no pending memory number. It is desirable to switch to display.

Regarding the pending display 104a, 105a or special symbol storage number display 106a, 106b displayed on the image display means 31, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to be stopped. In such a case, only one of the displays may be controlled to be in a non-display state, and the other display may be configured to continue to be displayed. For example, the pending displays 104a and 105a may be in a non-display state, and the special symbol storage number displays 106a and 106b may be in a display state, or vice versa.

Next, regarding the mode display displayed on the image display means 31, the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed, the symbol is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device is activated during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). A display image indicating the current gaming state (for example, a display indicating a variable display gaming mode during a right-handed game, etc.) is displayed until the flag turns ON and the safety device is activated (ST2). controlled. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to a stopped state, and thereafter, the mode display is not displayed until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Controlled by display state. This makes it possible to suggest that the current gaming state is limited or that the next gaming state will not occur when the game is in a stopped state.

Next, the safety device operation display displayed on the image display means 31 indicates that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and the state is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and that the safety device is safe during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). During the period from when the device activation flag is turned ON until the safety device is activated (ST2), an operation preview display indicating that the safety device activation flag is about to be turned ON is controlled to be displayed. The activation notice display is configured to start displaying when a predetermined condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)), and when the display starts, the safety device The display is configured to be displayed continuously until the activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2). In addition, if a predetermined condition (the value of the difference ball counter is a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)) is not satisfied (the value of the difference ball counter is less than a predetermined value (90000), etc.) after starting the operation notice display, , the operation notice display is controlled to be in a non-display state. In addition, the operation notice display is configured to display a numerical value based on the current value of the difference ball counter, for example, "Current number of difference balls / 950000 (predetermined value at which the safety device activation flag is in the ON state)" As shown in the figure, the current number of differential balls is constantly updated and displayed, and the numerical value until the safety device activation flag is turned on is displayed so that it can be grasped in real time. Furthermore, the counting of the difference number of balls is not limited to constant updating, but may be configured to be updated every predetermined unit (10, 100, 1000, etc.), for example. In addition, when displaying the operation notice, the main control unit 520 sends a command to the production control unit 540 with information regarding the number of outs and the number of prize balls, and the production control unit 540 receives the information regarding the number of outs and the number of prize balls. It may also be configured to perform counting processing regarding the current difference number of balls using . In this case, the main control 520 may send a command to the production control unit 540 every time an out and/or win is detected, or the main control 520 may send a command to the production control unit 540 under predetermined conditions (for example, After the main control unit 520 is configured to send a command to the production control unit 540 every time an out and/or a winning is detected, You can. In addition, the main control unit 520 sends a command to the performance control unit 540 with information regarding the number of difference balls that has already been counted, and the performance control unit 540 uses the received information regarding the number of difference balls to calculate the current number of difference balls. It may be configured to perform processing. In this case, the main control unit 520 may send a command to the production control unit 540 every time the process of counting the number of difference balls is performed, or the information on the number of difference balls may be sent to the safety device activation notice command. The command may be sent in addition. In addition, each time the main control unit 520 performs counting processing of the number of difference balls after a predetermined condition (for example, when the main control unit 520 sends a safety device activation notice command to the production control unit 540). A command may be sent to the production control section 540 at the same time.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-1, it is written that the operation notice display is possible after the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and the state is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if a predetermined condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90,000)) is met, during non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1) It may be configured to start displaying the operation notice display even before the operation occurs. Further, even before the non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), the same configuration as described above may be adopted for display/non-display control of the operation notice display.

The safety device activation display displayed on the image display means 31 is controlled to a non-display state when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state. be done. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-1, the operation notice display that is being displayed is turned off at the activation (ST2) timing of the safety device (≈timing at which the game stop state starts). In this way, after the safety device is activated (ST2), there is little need to display the activation notice display, and therefore it is desirable to control the display to a non-display state. Further, at this time, it may be configured to display an in-operation indication (eg, "The safety device is in operation" or "The game is in a stopped state") instead of the operation notice display.

Here, during non-symbol variation (non-gaming), only an operation notice display is performed as a safety device operation display, and an operation warning display is not executed. This is because if the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state during non-symbol variation (non-gaming), the safety device is controlled to be activated immediately (ST2) at that point. In this way, since a predetermined period does not occur after the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state until the safety device is activated (ST2), the activation warning display that is performed during this period is not executed.

In addition, when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) during non-symbol fluctuation (non-gaming) and the game is controlled to a stop state, at the same time as the start of the game stop state. It may be configured to display an activation warning display such as "The safety device will be activated because the difference in number of balls has reached 95,000." Further, it may be configured to display a variation stop display to notify the stop of normal symbol variation, such as "The display of variation of normal symbols has been forcibly terminated" at the start of the game stop state. In this way, the safety device operation display (operation notice display, operation warning (display, etc.) may be configured to differ. In addition, the safety device is activated depending on whether the game is stopped during a right-handed game (or during a special symbol fluctuation display) or when it is controlled into a game stop state during non-symbol fluctuations (non-gaming). The display (operation notice display, operation warning display, etc.) may be configured to be different.

Next, as a performance display displayed on the image display means 31, the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed, and the state becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device is activated during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). Until the flag turns ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), there is a standby screen that displays a static image of decorative symbols, a volume/light intensity adjustment image, a menu image, etc., and a non-gaming state (or standby screen). ) After a predetermined period of time (eg, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the game, a demo screen is displayed that includes a demo movie to introduce the model and a warning display to prevent players from becoming absorbed in the game. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-1, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state while the demonstration screen is displayed, and the safety device is activated (ST2) to control the game to be stopped. When the game is controlled to be stopped, a game stop screen is displayed that can notify that the game has been stopped. The game stop screen consists of a black background image that displays a solid black background image on the entire display area of the image display means 31, and a message display image that indicates that the game is being controlled to be stopped (for example, ``The game is being stopped.'' (e.g., “Please send a member of staff to the office.”) In this way, when the game is in the stopped state, the game stop image is displayed on the image display means 31, so that the player can be informed that the game is in the stopped state. There is. Further, the game stop screen may be configured to display a two-dimensional code for storing predetermined game information (earned benefit information, history information, etc.). This makes it possible to obtain bonus information acquired and accumulated history information before the game is stopped.

Here, in the embodiment shown in Figure 5-3-1, the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state while the demo screen is displayed, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to be stopped. In this case, the demo screen being executed ends at the timing when the game stops, and is immediately switched to the game stop screen. In this way, when the game is controlled to be stopped, the performance display (standby screen, demo screen) that is currently being executed is stopped/interrupted.

Additionally, it may be configured to display an operation notice during non-symbol fluctuations (non-gaming); in this case, the operation notice display has priority over the standby screen or demo screen (demo movie, alert display, etc.). It is desirable to display the Furthermore, the operation preview display may be configured to end after a predetermined period of time (for example, 180 seconds) after the non-symbol variation (non-gaming) has elapsed. Furthermore, the operation preview display may be displayed on the standby screen, while the operation preview display may not be displayed on the demo screen (which may be either a demo movie or an alert display). In addition, if the demonstration screen is displayed after the standby screen is displayed as a production display during non-symbol fluctuation (non-gaming), and then the standby screen is displayed again, the standby screen that is displayed again will be It may be configured so that the operation notice is not displayed. Additionally, when the player operates the handle, touches the handle, operates the volume/light adjustment button, operates the operating means (middle press button 14a), etc., the standby screen is displayed instead of the demo screen being displayed. In such a case, the standby screen that is displayed instead of the demonstration screen may be configured so that the operation preview is not displayed. In this way, by restricting the operation notice display during non-symbol fluctuations (non-gaming), it is possible to prevent a player's desire to start a new game from diminishing. Here, the reason why the activation notice display is not restricted at the timing when the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and the symbol becomes non-variable (non-gaming) is that there is a possibility that existing players are still playing the game. This is because it is assumed that the price will be high, so it is desirable to configure the system so that existing players can confirm the operation notice display.

Next, the safety device activation notification using the LED is carried out when the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is detected during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). Until the safety device is activated (ST2) when the switch is turned on, an operation advance notification is executed in which a part or all of the panel-side LED 63a and/or the frame-side LED 64a emit white light. This activation notice makes it possible to suggest that the safety device activation flag is about to turn ON. Here, when the operation advance notice is given using some or all of the panel side LEDs 63a, some or all of the frame side LEDs 64a are used in accordance with the performance display being executed (standby screen, demo screen, etc.). It is configured to perform a light emitting effect. In addition, when the operation advance notification is performed using some or all of the frame-side LEDs 64a, some or all of the board-side LEDs 63a will emit light according to the performance display being executed (standby screen, demo screen, etc.). Execute the performance.

In addition, the operation advance notice is set to cause a part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a to emit white light under the start condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 90000)). However, when a predetermined condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 91000)) is met, some or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a emit light different from white light emission. It may be configured to change the mode (eg, yellow light emission, etc.). Furthermore, under another condition (when the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g. 92000)), part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a is changed from yellow light emission to a different light emission mode (e.g. green light emission). It may also be configured to change to (e.g., light emission). In this way, the light emitting mode may be changed in predetermined units (1000) until the value of the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000). Further, regarding the change in the light emission mode, not only the color of the light emission but also the type of light emission (lighting, blinking, slow blinking, fast blinking, etc.) may be changed.

Here, the operation advance notice is controlled to be executed in synchronization with (corresponds to) the operation advance notice described above. Therefore, unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that the operation advance notice is also being executed when the operation advance notice display is executed. Further, the operation advance notice is configured to be executable in synchronization with (corresponding to) various execution contents related to the operation advance notice described above. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed in synchronization with (corresponding to) the operation advance notice display, and for example, the operation advance notice may be configured to be executed even after the operation advance notice display ends. Furthermore, the operation advance notice display may be configured to be executed even after the end of the operation advance notice. In this way, the execution period (or execution timing) of the operation advance notice display and the execution period (or execution timing) of the operation advance notice may be configured to be different. In addition, at least one of the operation notice display and the operation notice notice will be displayed after the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed and will be in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and it will be safe to use it during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). It may be configured such that it can be executed between when the device activation flag turns ON and when the safety device is activated (ST2). As a result, even when either one (the image display means 31 or the LED) cannot be executed due to a malfunction or when an effect display (standby screen, demo screen, etc.) is executed using either one, the player It is possible to suggest that the opportunity for the safety device activation flag to turn ON is approaching.

The safety device activation notification using the LED is performed when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is stopped, the LED 63a on the board side and/or the frame side Part or all of the LED 64a is controlled to be turned off and maintained in the turned off state until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). When the game is stopped in this way, by stopping the light emitting effect of each LED (all or part of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a), it is ensured that no more games will be played. Structured to suggest. However, when executing an error display while the game is stopped, a part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a is configured to be controlled to emit light in an error light emission mode according to the content of the error display. Good too. Further, even if an error display is to be performed during the game stop state, it may be configured to control part or all of the board side LED 63a and/or frame side LED 64a to be turned off.

In addition, if it is configured to end the operation notice display after a predetermined period of time (e.g. 180 seconds) after the symbol is not changing (non-gaming), the operation notice is configured not to end. (Conversely, only the operation advance notification may be ended without terminating the operation advance notice display). In addition, when the demonstration screen is displayed after the standby screen is displayed as a performance display during non-symbol fluctuation (non-gaming), and then the standby screen is displayed again, on the standby screen that is displayed again, It may be configured such that only the operation advance notification is performed without displaying the operation advance notice (on the contrary, only the operation advance notice may be displayed and no operation advance notice is performed). Furthermore, the demo screen (either a demo movie or a warning display may be used) may be configured to only display an operation advance notice without displaying an operation advance notice (on the contrary, (It is also possible to execute only the advance notice display and not perform the operation advance notice). When the standby screen is displayed in place of the demo screen being executed when the player operates the handle, touches the handle, operates the volume/light adjustment button, or operates the operating means (middle press button 14a), the operation is activated. It may be configured such that only the operation advance notice display is performed without performing advance notice (on the contrary, only the operation advance notice display may be executed and no operation advance notice is executed). In this way, by restricting either the operation advance notice display or the operation advance notice, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to start a new game from being diminished as much as possible.

Further, the operation preview display and the operation preview notification in progress may be configured to end from the timing (ST1) when the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed and the symbol is not fluctuating (non-gaming). Further, either the operation advance notice display or the operation advance notice being executed may be terminated. In this way, by restricting the operation advance notice display or the operation advance notice, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to start a new game from decreasing as much as possible.

Next, in the movable performance by the movable objects 30a and 30b, the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is set during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). It is controlled in a movable state until it turns on and the safety device is activated (ST2). Here, the movable performance by the movable objects 30a and 30b is configured to be determined according to the content of the performance display, and in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-1, the standby screen and demo The screen is displayed, and when these are displayed, the movable objects 30a and 30b do not perform the movable effect, so they are configured to wait at the origin position. If a movable effect is to be executed on the standby screen and the demo screen, the movable objects 30a and 30b will move from the origin position to the effect position. After that, when the game is controlled to be in a stopped state, the movable performance being executed is stopped, and a return-to-origin operation is performed to move the movable objects 30a, 30b from the performance position (or the movable position) to the origin position. Ru. In the example shown in Figure 5-3-1, the origin return operation is not executed because the robot is waiting at the origin position, but if a movable effect was performed, the origin return operation would not be executed. The Rukoto. Thereby, the visibility of the game stop screen displayed on the image display means 31 when controlled to the game stop state can be prevented from being obstructed by the movable objects 30a and 30b. In addition, although it was decided to stop the movable performance in progress at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST2), the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to perform a return-to-origin operation for moving from a movable position) to an origin position.

Next, as an adjustment function, the volume adjustment button 16 is pressed until the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and the state becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is activated during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). The volume adjustment operation is controlled to be effective until the safety device is activated (ST2) when it is in the ON state. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the volume adjustment operation is continued until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). is controlled so that it is invalid. In this manner, when the game is in a stopped state, by disabling the volume adjustment operation, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice that the game is being controlled in a stopped state. Further, for example, if a volume adjustment operation is performed at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST2) and volume setting information indicating the current volume setting is displayed on the image display means 31, the game is controlled to be stopped. At the same time, it is desirable to control the game stop screen so that the currently displayed volume setting information is hidden and the game stop screen is displayed. Thereby, the game stop screen displayed on the image display means 31 when the game is controlled to be in the game stop state can be prevented from being obstructed (visibility reduced) by the volume setting information. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the volume setting information is displayed on the image display means 31 at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST2), the predetermined period of time (for example: The volume setting information may be displayed overlapping the game stop screen by 5 seconds (so that the display layer is on the top). However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment operation be controlled to be invalid even while the volume setting information is displayed while the game is in the stopped state. In addition, when displaying volume setting information over the game stop screen (so that the display layer is on the top), a message display image (e.g. ``Game is stopped. Please send an attendant.'') as the game stop screen. ) or two-dimensional code are displayed, it is desirable to display the volume setting information in a position that does not overlap with them.

Next, as an adjustment function, the light intensity adjustment button 17 is pressed until the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed and the state becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is activated during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). The light amount adjustment operation is controlled to be effective until the safety device is activated (ST2) when the light is turned on. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the light amount adjustment operation is continued until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). is controlled so that it is invalid. In this way, when the game is in the stopped state, by disabling the light amount adjustment operation, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice that the game is being controlled in the stopped state. Further, for example, if the light amount adjustment operation is performed at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST2) and the light amount setting information indicating the current light amount setting is displayed on the image display means 31, the game is controlled to be stopped. At the same time, it is desirable to control the game stop screen so that the light amount setting information being displayed is not displayed and the game stop screen is displayed. Thereby, the game stop screen displayed on the image display means 31 when the game is controlled to be in the game stop state can be prevented from being obstructed (visibility reduced) by the light amount setting information. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the light amount setting information is displayed on the image display means 31 at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST2), after the game is controlled to be in a stopped state, for a predetermined period of time (e.g. The light amount setting information may be displayed superimposed on the game stop screen (so that the display layer is on the top) by 5 seconds). However, it is desirable that the light amount adjustment operation be controlled to be invalid even while the light amount setting information is displayed while the game is in the stopped state. In addition, when displaying light intensity setting information over the game stop screen (so that the display layer is on top), a message display image (e.g. "Game is in a stop state. Please send an attendant") as the game stop screen. ) or two-dimensional code are displayed, it is desirable to display the light amount setting information in a position that does not overlap with them.

In addition, the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and the state is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and during non-symbol variation (non-gaming), the safety device activation flag is turned ON and the safety device is activated ( Until ST2), while the standby screen or demo screen is displayed as a production display, a volume adjustment display indicating that volume adjustment is possible (e.g. "Volume adjustment is possible") and light intensity adjustment are displayed. A display indicating that the light intensity is adjustable (e.g., "The light intensity can be adjusted") or a menu screen operation display indicating that the menu screen can be operated (e.g., "The menu screen can be operated") ), etc. may be configured to be displayed. In this case, while the volume adjustable display, light intensity adjustable display, and menu screen operation display are being executed, the safety device activation flag turns ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to stop. It is desirable to end the volume adjustable display, light intensity adjustable display, and menu screen operation display.

Next, the control contents of various functions controlled by the payout control section 510 in the course of ST1 to ST3 will be explained.

As a payout control, the ball lending button 20 is used when the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is turned on during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). At the same time, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to be stopped, and thereafter, the ball lending operation is controlled to be valid until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). As a result, the lending process is performed by operating the ball lending button 20 not only before the game is stopped, but also after the game is stopped, and game balls can be given to the player. It is configured to be.

Next, as a payout control, the return button 21 is pressed until the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed and the state becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is turned ON during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). When the state is reached, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to be stopped, and thereafter, the return operation is controlled to be valid until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). As a result, not only before the game is stopped, but also after the game is stopped, the balance information on the frequency display 62a is cleared by operating the return button 21, and the player The game ball balance is configured to be able to be returned.

In this way, by controlling the ball lending operation using the ball lending button 20 and the return operation using the return button 21 to be valid even in the game stop state, ball lending and return of game balls can be performed after shifting to the game stop state. For example, the player does not need to return game balls that he or she has acquired in advance before the game is stopped, and after the game has stopped, he or she can return the game balls that he or she has acquired through previous games. It becomes possible to perform operations.

Next, as a payout control, the prize ball payout operation is performed after the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is set during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). When it becomes ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to stop state, and thereafter, the payout operation of the won prize balls is controlled to be valid until the power of gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). be done. As a result, the prize ball payout device 23 is activated to execute the payout operation of the game balls not only before the game is stopped, but also after the game is stopped, and the game balls are put out to the player. The system is configured to be able to pay out game balls. Therefore, even if the payout of game balls has not yet been completed at the timing when the safety device is activated (ST2) and the gaming stop state is controlled, the prize ball payout device 23 It is possible to perform a game ball payout operation regarding unpaid prize balls. However, while the game is stopped, processing related to the payout of prize balls related to winning is not performed (the main control unit 520 does not send a payout control command (number of prize balls designation command) to the payout control unit 510). ), various winning holes (special symbol 1 starting hole 38, special symbol 2 starting hole 39, upper left winning hole 40, middle left winning hole 41, lower left winning hole 42, right winning hole 43, upper large winning hole) are opened while the game is stopped. Even if a ball enters the winning hole 44 or the lower major winning hole 45), the prize ball payout device 23 will not perform a payout operation for the prize ball based on the new winning.

Next, as a firing control, the game ball is fired after the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is set during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). This is effectively executed until the safety device is activated (ST2) when it is turned on. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to a halt state, the launch control will continue until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Controlled to be invalid. Thereby, in the game stop state, the game ball is controlled to be in a state where it is impossible to shoot, so the player can be made aware that the game is in the stop state. In addition, while the game is stopped, processing related to the game (lottery processing, symbol variation processing, prize winning and prize ball processing, etc.) is not executed, so there is no benefit for the player to fire the game ball, and the firing control is stopped. It is desirable to leave it there. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a stopped state, the firing control may be controlled to remain effective until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Thereby, after the game is stopped, the operation of the firing control can be checked by the person concerned with the hall. In addition, if the game ball scheduled to be launched remains on the launch rail, stopping the launch will make it impossible for the player to retrieve the game ball, so this can be prevented. In order to do this, by enabling launch control even when the game is stopped, it is possible to collect game balls that are staying on the launch rail (recovery is possible by intentionally firing with a launch intensity that makes a foul ball). It may be configured as follows.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, while the main control section is partially restricted from executing the program while the game is stopped, the payout control section is restricted from executing the program even when the game is stopped. There is no. This is because, as described above, even during the game stop state, it is necessary for the payout control unit to effectively control the ball lending operation using the ball lending button, the return operation using the return button, and the prize ball payout operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout control unit may also be configured to limit some (including a plurality of) or all program processes (ball lending operation, return operation, prize ball payout operation).

Next, a time chart (Embodiment 2-5) regarding the operation of the safety device, which is a characteristic part of the present invention, will be described in detail using FIG. 5-3-2. Furthermore, the configuration may be a combination of the descriptions regarding the embodiments described above and the descriptions regarding the embodiments described later. In this way, the contents of each embodiment are not limited to individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments. Furthermore, in order to avoid redundant descriptions of the same contents as those described above, explanations will basically be omitted.

(If the safety device is activated while not playing 2)
In Figure 5-3-2, the symbol variation of the special symbol ends and the state becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag turns ON during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). The time chart shows a series of steps from when the safety device is activated (ST2) to when the game is stopped and the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Furthermore, FIG. 5-3-2 shows how the main control section 520, production control section 540, and payout control section 510 respectively control the various functions shown below in the course of ST1 to ST3. ing.

In FIG. 5-3-2, various functions controlled by the main control unit 520 include functions related to the symbol display device 76 (special symbol display LEDs 76a, 76b, special symbol memory display LEDs 76c, 76d, normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e). , lighting control of various LEDs such as the normal symbol memory display LED 76f, right-handed display LED 76g, etc.), functions related to the performance display LED 521 (lighting control of the 7-segment display, counting the number of wins and outs, processing of calculating the base value) , functions related to the electric chew support (operation control of the special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72), functions relating to the big prize openings 44 and 45 (operation control of the winning opening opening and closing solenoids 70 and 71), functions concerning external terminals (controlling the operation of the special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 72), It describes functions related to safety devices (output control), functions related to safety devices (difference ball counting processing), and functions related to sight-fire test signals (output control of safety device activation signals and safety device activation signals).

In addition, various functions controlled by the production control unit 540 include functions related to the variable display device 95 (lighting control of special symbol variation LEDs and normal symbol variation LEDs), functions related to the image display means 31 (mini symbol 103a, right-handed display, Error display, pending display 104a, 105a, special symbol storage number display 106a, 106b, mode display, safety device activation display, display control related to production display), functions related to LEDs 63a, 64a (lighting control related to safety device activation notification), movable parts 30a and 30b (execution control of movable effects) and adjustment functions (switching control of enable/disable of the volume adjustment button 16 and the light amount adjustment button 17) are described.

In addition, various functions controlled by the payout control unit 510 include a payout control function (control of enabling/disabling of the ball lending button 20 and the return button 21, execution control regarding prize ball payout operation), a firing control function (control of the firing control), (enable/disable switching control).

In the example shown in FIG. 5-3-2, in a game state in which left-handed hitting is advantageous (here, a low probability low base state in which a special symbol variable game can be executed, a high probability low base state, etc.), the special symbol is not used. This shows an example of transitioning to a game stop state while symbols are changing (during non-gaming). The left-handed game is a left-handed game state in which a variable game with special symbols can be executed, and the safety device activation flag is controlled to be in the ON state (≒ the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000)) during the left-handed game. By doing so, the game is controlled to be in a stopped state.

Furthermore, in the embodiment shown in Figure 5-3-2, when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (≒ the difference ball counter reaches a predetermined value (95000)), the safety device is activated immediately. (ST2), and is configured to be controlled to a game stop state. In this way, in a game state where a variable game with special symbols can be executed (a game state other than jackpot games and small win games), when the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state (≒ the difference ball counter is set to a predetermined value) (95000)), even if the special symbols are not changing (not playing), the safety device is immediately activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to be stopped.

Next, the control details of various functions controlled by the main control section 520 in the course of ST1 to ST3 will be explained.

In addition, the lighting control of the special symbol display LEDs 76a and 76b, the special symbol memory display LED, the lighting control of the 7-segment display of the performance display LED 521, the base value calculation process, the operation control of the special symbol 2 starting port opening/closing solenoid 72, The operation control of the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoids 70 and 71, the output control of the security signal, the differential ball counting process, the safety device activation signal, and the output control of the safety device activation signal are described based on the above-mentioned Figure 5-3-1. Since the content is the same, we omit the explanation.

The normal symbol variation display LED 76e of the symbol display device 76 indicates that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and the symbol is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is displayed during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). Until the is turned ON and the safety device is activated (ST2), it is possible to display the lighting in the fluctuating display mode (fluctuating light emitting pattern), and the lottery result of the normal symbol fluctuating game (for the normal symbol fluctuating display) is possible. It is displayed in a variable display mode or a static display mode in response to (synchronization with) the LED variation mode. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) to control the game to a stopped state, the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is not displayed (lights out), and the gaming machine 1 The display is controlled to remain hidden (unlit) until the power is cut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol variation display LED 76e is controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next normal symbol variation game is not to be executed. There is.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-2, at the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation display LED 76e is displayed in the fluctuation display mode, the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to be stopped. In this way, when the safety device is activated (ST2), it is activated immediately without waiting for the elapse of the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display mode (the fluctuating light emitting pattern) (the end of the fluctuation of the fluctuating normal symbol fluctuation game). It will be controlled to be non-displayed (lights out). Similarly, when the stop display is displayed in the win display (win stop light emission pattern) or loss display (loss stop light emission pattern), the display is immediately hidden without waiting for the stop display time (determined display time) to elapse. (lights out).

Next, the normal symbol memory display LED 76f indicates that the symbol variation of the special symbol is completed and becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device activation flag is turned ON during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). Until the state is reached and the safety device is activated (ST2), the light is displayed in a display mode according to the current number of normal symbols held in memory. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to be stopped, the normal symbol memory display LED 76f is not displayed (unlit state), and the gaming machine 1 The display is controlled to remain non-displayed (unlit) until the power is cut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol memory display LED 76f is controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), so that the normal symbol pending memory disappears for the player, and the next normal symbol variation game is executed. This indicates that the device is not being used.

Next, the counting process of the number of wins and the number of outs of the performance display LED 521 is performed after the symbol variation of the special symbol ends, and the state becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and non-symbol variation (non-gaming) occurs. This is effectively executed until the safety device activation flag turns ON and the safety device is activated (ST2). Here, during the left-handed game, a process of counting the number of wins and a process of counting the number of outs are executed. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state and the safety device is activated (ST2) and the game is controlled to stop, the performance display LED 521 shows winnings until the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). Counting the number and number of outs is not performed.

Next, the control contents of various functions controlled by the effect control section 540 in the course of ST1 to ST3 will be explained.

In addition, special symbol fluctuation LED, mini symbol 103a, error display, pending display 104a, 105a, special symbol storage number display 106a, 106b, mode display, safety device operation display, display control related to performance display, lighting control related to safety device operation notification. , execution control of the movable effects, and switching control of enabling/disabling the volume adjustment button 16 and the light intensity adjustment button 17 are the same as those described based on FIG. 5-3-1 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol variation LED indicates that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and it becomes non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and during non-symbol variation (non-gaming), the safety device activation flag turns ON and it is safe. Until the device is activated (ST2), it is possible to display the lighting in the fluctuating display mode (fluctuation light emitting pattern), and it corresponds to the lottery result of the normal symbol variation game (the variation mode of the LED 76e for normal symbol variation display). (synchronized) and displayed in a fluctuating display mode or a static display mode. When the safety device activation flag is set to the ON state, the safety device is activated (ST2), and the game is controlled to a stopped state, the normal symbol fluctuation LED is not displayed (unlit state) and the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. The display is controlled to remain non-displayed (unlit) until it is shut off (ST3). In this way, in the game stop state, the normal symbol variation LED is controlled to be non-displayed (lights out), thereby indicating to the player that the next normal symbol variation game will not be executed.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5-3-2, the safety device is activated (ST2) at the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation LED is displayed in the fluctuation display mode, and the game is controlled to be stopped. In this way, when the safety device is activated (ST2), it will be activated immediately without waiting for the elapse of the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display mode (the fluctuating light emitting pattern) (the end of the fluctuation of the fluctuating normal symbol fluctuation game). It will be controlled to be non-displayed (unlit). Similarly, when the stop display is displayed in the win display (win stop light emission pattern) or loss display (loss stop light emission pattern), the display is immediately hidden without waiting for the stop display time (determined display time) to elapse. (lights out).

Next, the right-handed display displayed on the image display means 31 indicates that the symbol variation of the special symbol has ended and the symbol is in non-symbol variation (non-gaming) (ST1), and the safety device is activated during non-symbol variation (non-gaming). When the activation flag turns ON, the safety device is activated (ST2), the game is controlled to be stopped, and thereafter, the display is controlled to be hidden until the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (ST3). In this way, when the safety device is activated (ST2) during a left-handed game, the right-handed game display displayed on the image display means 31 is controlled to be hidden even when the game is stopped.

In addition, in the process of ST1 to ST3, the control contents of various functions controlled by the payout control section 510 are the same as the contents described based on the above-mentioned FIG. 5-3-1, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding the time chart regarding the operation of the safety device described so far, regarding the description regarding each embodiment (Embodiment 2-1, Embodiment 2-2, Embodiment 2-3, Embodiment 2-4, Embodiment 2-5) may be one or a combination of two or more. Moreover, the contents described in each embodiment are not limited to only individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments.

Next, using FIG. 6, a time chart (Embodiment 3-1) of the jackpot end INT regarding the operation of the safety device, which is a characteristic part of the present invention, will be described in detail. Furthermore, the configuration may be a combination of the descriptions regarding the embodiments described above and the descriptions regarding the embodiments described later. In this way, the contents of each embodiment are not limited to individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments. Furthermore, in order to avoid redundant descriptions of the same contents as those described above, explanations will basically be omitted.

(Regarding the jackpot end INT when the safety device is activated)
FIG. 6 shows an embodiment regarding the presentation contents of the jackpot end INT executed after the end of the round game in the jackpot game.

First, the first time (at the time of entry into probability change) shown in FIG. 6 will be explained. Here, the contents of the performance of the jackpot end INT executed in the first jackpot game (when entering the probability change) are shown. A jackpot game for the first time (at the beginning of a probability change) is a game state in which left-handed hitting is advantageous (low probability low base state, high probability low base state, etc.), and the symbol fluctuation result of the special symbol is a probability fluctuation jackpot (high probability after the jackpot game). This refers to a jackpot game that is executed when the game is a jackpot that moves to a high-probability base state. Taking this jackpot game as an opportunity, the game shifts from left-handed games that are disadvantageous for the player (low probability low base state, high probability low base state, etc.) to right-handed games that are advantageous for the player (high probability high base state). I will do it.

At the jackpot end INT executed in the first jackpot game (when entering the probability change), the end INT effect (mode entry display), ``addiction prevention display'', ``card forgetting prevention display'', and company logo display are performed.

The end INT performance (mode entry display) is executed for a predetermined period of time (1s to 10s) from the start of the jackpot end INT. Here, notification is made that the jackpot game has ended, and a mode display to which the player will switch after the jackpot game ends is displayed.

The "display to prevent getting hooked" and the "display to prevent forgetting to take out a card" are executed for a predetermined period of time (6s to 10s) from the middle of the jackpot end INT. The "addiction prevention display" is to alert the player about getting addicted to the game, and the "card-forgetting prevention display" is to warn the player about forgetting to take out the prepaid card.

Here, the "display to prevent getting hooked" and the "display to prevent forgetting to take out a card" are executed in parallel with the end INT effect (mode entry display). Specifically, when the jackpot end INT starts, the end INT performance (mode entry display) using the entire display area of the image display means 31 is executed, and from the middle of the execution (at 6s), the display of the image display means 31 starts. A part of the area is used to display messages related to "display to prevent getting addicted" and "display to prevent forgetting to take out a card" (e.g. "Be careful not to get absorbed in the game", "be careful not to forget to take out your prepaid card") etc.) will be carried out. Then, the display of the "display to prevent getting hooked" and the "display to prevent forgetting to remove the card" ends (at 10 seconds) with the end INT effect (mode entry display).

The company logo display is executed for a predetermined period of time (11s to 14s) after the completion of the end INT effect (mode entry display), the ``absorption prevention display'', and the ``card forgetting prevention display''. The company logo display is to display an advertisement for the company that manufactured the gaming machine 1.

Next, the second and subsequent times (when probability variation continues) shown in FIG. 6 will be explained. Here, the contents of the performance of the jackpot end INT executed in the jackpot game from the second time onward (when the probability variation continues) are shown. A jackpot game from the second time onwards (when the probability variation continues) is a jackpot game in which the symbol variation result of the special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (jackpot game This means a jackpot game that is executed when the game is a jackpot (which later shifts to a high probability high base state). The right-handed game, which is advantageous for the player, continues over the execution of this jackpot game.

The end INT performance (mode continuation display) is executed for a predetermined period of time (1s to 114s) from the start of the jackpot end INT. Here, notification is made that the jackpot game has ended, and a mode display that continues after the jackpot game is displayed. Also, the number of game balls acquired through jackpot games is displayed.

Here, in the jackpot game from the second time onwards (when the probability change continues), the ``display to prevent getting addicted'', the ``display to prevent forgetting to take out a card'', and the company logo display are not executed. This is because these displays have already been executed in the first jackpot game (when the probability change begins), and are configured so that they will not be repeated in the second and subsequent jackpot games (when the probability change continues). ing.

Next, the second and subsequent ending effects 1 shown in FIG. 6 will be explained. Here, the content of the performance of the jackpot end INT that is executed when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state in the second and subsequent jackpot games (when the probability variation continues) is shown.
When the safety device activation flag is turned ON in the second and subsequent jackpot games (when the probability variation continues), the end INT performance (mode continuation display) and the “safety device activation warning display” are executed in parallel.

The end INT performance (mode continuation display) and the "safety device activation warning display" are executed for a predetermined period of time (1s to 14s) from the start of the jackpot end INT. The end INT effect (mode continuation display) is executed using the entire display area of the image display means 31, and the "safety device activation warning display" is executed using a part of the display area of the image display means 31. executed.

Here, the "safety device activation warning display" refers to the aforementioned activation warning display, and for example, a message such as "the safety device will be activated soon" is displayed. More specifically, the end INT effect (mode continuation display) is executed in the entire display area of the image display means 31, and a message "safety device activation warning display" is displayed so as to overlap part or all of the display area. It will be displayed. Here, it is desirable that the "safety device activation warning display" be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display characters of the mode continuation display (for example, "○○ mode continuation"). This overlaps with a part of the end INT effect that has relatively low importance as information (e.g. background image), but displays characters that have relatively high importance as information (e.g. "Continue 〇〇 mode") This makes it possible to execute the "safety device activation warning display" without reducing the visibility of the displayed characters. Further, the display may be configured so that the "safety device activation warning display" does not overlap with all of the displayed characters (eg, "Continue XX mode"), but overlaps with some of them. This makes it possible to execute the "safety device activation warning display" while maintaining the visibility of the displayed characters (for example, "Continue 〇〇 mode").

Here, the "safety device activation warning display" refers to each of the embodiments described above (Embodiment 2-1, Embodiment 2-2, Embodiment 2-3, Embodiment 2-4, Embodiment 2-5). This refers to the safety device operation display displayed on the image display means 31 by the production control unit 540, as described in the explanation, and for example, it is not limited to the execution of an operation warning display, but may also execute an operation preview display.

In addition, in the second and subsequent ending effects 1 shown in FIG. 6, the safety device activation flag is turned on in the jackpot game, and even though the game is controlled to stop after the jackpot ends, the mode continues to be displayed as an ending INT effect (e.g. : "Continue 〇〇 mode"). By executing the mode continuation display (e.g. "〇〇mode continuation") in this way, the mode will not actually continue after the jackpot ends, but the game mode will continue with this jackpot game as an opportunity. It is possible to notify the player whether or not the game has been completed (or not).

Next, the first and second and subsequent ending effects 2 shown in FIG. 6 will be explained. Here, the performance contents of the jackpot end INT that is executed when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state in the first jackpot game (when entering the probability variation) or the second and subsequent jackpot games (when the probability variation continues) are shown. This embodiment is applicable to the ending effect executed during the jackpot game shown in FIG. 5-1-1. Therefore, in reality, the ending effect of this embodiment is executed in parallel with the operations of the various functions of the main control unit 520, the effect control unit 540, and the payout control unit 510 shown in FIG. 5-1-1. Become.

In the first and second and subsequent ending effects 2, the ending effect is configured to include an end INT effect (mode entry display or continuous display), ``an addictive prevention display'', ``a card forgetting prevention display'', and a company logo display. There is. In parallel with these performance displays, the performance control unit 540 executes a "safety device activation warning display."

Specifically, the end INT effect (mode entry display or continuous display) is executed for a predetermined period of time (1s to 10s) from the start of the jackpot end INT, and the "addiction prevention display" and "card forgetting prevention display" are displayed when the jackpot ends. It is executed for a predetermined period of time (6s to 10s) from the middle of INT in parallel with the end INT effect, and then a company logo display is executed for a predetermined period of time (11s to 14s).

Further, the "safety device activation warning display" by the performance control unit 540 is executed in parallel with these displays from the start to the end of the jackpot end INT (1s to 14s).

Here, regarding the end INT performance (mode entry display or continuous display), if this jackpot game is the first jackpot game (when entering the probability change), the mode entry display will be executed as the end INT performance, and from the second time onwards, the mode entry display will be executed as the end INT performance. In the case of a jackpot game (during continuation of variable probability), a continuation display will be executed as an end INT effect.

In addition, the "display to prevent getting addicted", "display to prevent forgetting to take out a card", and the company logo display are not normally executed in the second and subsequent jackpot games (when the probability change continues), but the safety device activation flag is turned ON during the jackpot game. In this case, the game is configured to be executed even if it is a jackpot game from the second time onward (when the probability variation continues). As a result, during the last jackpot game before the game is stopped, it is possible to carry out warnings such as ``display to prevent getting hooked'' and ``display to prevent forgetting to take out a card'', as well as advertising by displaying the company logo. .

Furthermore, the "safety device activation warning display" is shown in each of the embodiments described above (Embodiment 2-1, Embodiment 2-2, Embodiment 2-3, Embodiment 2-4, Embodiment 2-5). Further, it refers to a safety device operation display displayed on the image display means 31 by the production control unit 540, and for example, it is not limited to the execution of an operation warning display, but may also execute an operation preview display.

In addition, the "safety device activation warning display" is not limited to the one that is executed from the start to the end of the jackpot end INT (1s to 14s), for example, it can be executed in parallel with only the company logo display (11s to 14s). may be configured. As a result, the "safety device activation warning display" will not be executed during the execution of the end INT effect, "display to prevent getting addicted", "display to prevent forgetting to remove a card", etc., so it is possible to prevent the visibility of these displays from decreasing. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the "safety device activation warning display" may be configured to be executed (1 s to 10 s) in parallel with the end INT effect, the "absorption prevention display", and the "card forgetting prevention display". In this case, since the "safety device activation warning display" is not executed while the company logo is being displayed, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the company logo from decreasing.

Further, instead of the end INT effect (mode entry display or continuous display), an ending effect (result display effect) may be executed. In the ending performance (result display performance), information on the total number of balls acquired through jackpot games so far and the number of consecutive jackpot games are displayed. Thereby, the game result immediately before the game is controlled to be stopped can be notified to the player. In addition, at this time, if the series of jackpot games is not continuing, or if there is no information on the number of balls that have been acquired, the result effect image may not be displayed, or the result effect image may be displayed when the jackpot game It may also be possible to display that there is no information regarding the continuation of consecutive games or the number of balls that have been acquired (eg, "Number of continuations: 0", "Number of balls acquired: 0", etc.).

Then, when executing the ending effect (result display effect) instead of the end INT effect (mode entry display or continuation display), the effect control unit 540 executes the "safety device activation warning display" in parallel. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the ending effect (result display effect) is executed for a predetermined period of time (1s to 10s) from the start of the jackpot end INT, and the "addiction prevention display" and "card removal prevention display" are executed for a predetermined time from the middle of the jackpot end INT. (6s to 10s) is executed in parallel with the result display performance, and then the company logo display is executed for a predetermined time (11s to 14s), and the "safety device activation warning display" by the performance control unit 540 is the start of the jackpot end INT. The process is executed in parallel with these displays from 1s to 14s until the end.

In addition, instead of the end INT effect (mode entry display or continuation display), when executing the ending effect (result display effect), a "safety device activation warning display" is executed in parallel with only the company logo display (11s ~14s). In addition, instead of displaying the company logo, the ``safety device activation warning display'' is executed in parallel with the ending effect (result display effect), ``display to prevent getting addicted'', and ``display to prevent forgetting to remove the card'' ( 1s to 10s).

In addition, as in the first and second and subsequent ending effects 3 shown in Figure 6, this is executed when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state in the first jackpot game (when entering the probability variation) or the second and subsequent jackpot games (when the probability variation continues). At the jackpot end INT, only the ending effect (result display effect) may be executed. In this embodiment, the ending performance (result display performance) is executed from the start to the end of the jackpot end INT (1s to 14s). In addition, "display to prevent getting addicted", "display to prevent forgetting to take out the card", and display of the company logo are not executed. At this time, the "safety device activation warning display" is executed in parallel with the ending performance (result display performance) (1s to 14s).

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a company logo is displayed in the ending effect 3 for the first and second and subsequent times. In this case, the ending effect (result display effect) is executed for a predetermined period of time (1s to 10s) from the start of the jackpot end INT, and after the end of the ending effect (result display effect), the company logo is displayed until the end of the jackpot end INT (11s). ~14s) will be executed. At this time, the "safety device activation warning display" is executed in parallel with the ending performance (result display performance) and the company logo display (1s to 14s).

In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the ending performance 3 for the first and second and subsequent times, it may be configured to perform a "display to prevent getting hooked" and a "display to prevent forgetting to take out a card." In this case, the ending effect (result display effect) is executed from the start to the end of the jackpot end INT (1s to 14s), and the "addiction prevention display" and "card forgetting prevention display" are displayed for a predetermined period of time (1s to 14s) from the middle of the jackpot end INT. 10s to 14s), and is executed in parallel with the ending performance (result display performance). At this time, the "safety device activation warning display" is executed in parallel with the ending effect (result display effect), the "absorption prevention display", and the "card forgetting prevention display" (1s to 14s). Further, in this case, the company logo is not displayed.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the ending effect 3 for the first and second and subsequent times, the ending effect (mode entry display or continuous display) may be executed instead of the ending effect (result display effect).

In addition, as shown in the first and second and subsequent ending effects 4 shown in Fig. 6, this is executed when the safety device activation flag is in the ON state in the first jackpot game (when entering the probability variation) or the second and subsequent jackpot games (when the probability variation continues). The jackpot end INT may be configured so that the jackpot end INT time is longer than the jackpot end INT that is executed when the safety device activation flag is not turned on. In this embodiment, the ending performance (result display performance) is executed from the start to the end of the jackpot end INT (1s to 21s). In addition, "display to prevent getting addicted", "display to prevent forgetting to take out the card", and display of the company logo are not executed. At this time, the "safety device activation warning display" is executed in parallel with the ending performance (result display performance) (1s to 21s).

In this way, by lengthening the performance time of the jackpot end INT that is executed when the safety device activation flag is turned on in a winning game, the player can receive enough attention before the game is controlled to stop. In addition to giving a lingering feeling, by using this time to perform an ending effect (result display effect), it is possible to further enhance the player's sense of accomplishment.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the company logo may be displayed in the ending performance 4 for the first and second and subsequent times. In this case, the ending performance (result display performance) is executed for a predetermined period of time (1s to 17s) from the start of the jackpot end INT, and after the end of the ending performance (result display performance), the company logo is displayed until the end of the jackpot end INT (18s). ~21s) will be executed. At this time, the "safety device activation warning display" is executed in parallel with the ending performance (result display performance) and the company logo display (1s to 14s).

Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the ending effect 4 for the first and second and subsequent times, it may be configured to perform a "display to prevent getting hooked" and a "display to prevent forgetting to take out a card." In this case, the ending effect (result display effect) is executed from the start to the end of the jackpot end INT (1s to 21s), and the "addiction prevention display" and "card removal prevention display" are displayed from the middle of the jackpot end INT for a predetermined period of time ( 13s to 21s), is executed in parallel with the ending performance (result display performance). At this time, the "safety device activation warning display" is executed in parallel with the ending effect (result display effect), the "absorption prevention display", and the "card forgetting prevention display" (1s to 14s). Further, in this case, the company logo is not displayed.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the ending effect 4 for the first and second and subsequent times, the ending effect (mode entry display or continuous display) may be executed instead of the ending effect (result display effect).

In addition, the ending effects that are executed in the first and second ending effects 3 and 4 are not limited to the result display effects, but are also executed in the jackpot end INT that is executed when the safety device activation flag is not turned on. It may also be configured to execute a special ending effect. Further, a result display effect may be executed together with a special ending effect.

Further, when the safety device activation flag is turned on during the jackpot end INT, the game may be controlled to be stopped at that point. As a result, the performance executed during the jackpot end INT is stopped/interrupted at the timing when the safety device activation flag is turned on, and the game is immediately controlled to be stopped. Since the jackpot end INT is executed after the round game in which a prize can be won in the jackpot openings 44 and 45 is finished, it is stopped/interrupted at the timing when the safety device activation flag is turned on, and immediately Even if the game is controlled to be stopped at any time, the player will not suffer any disadvantage.

Furthermore, if the safety device activation flag is turned ON during the jackpot end INT, the game may be controlled to be in the game stop state after the jackpot game ends. As a result, it is possible to control the game to be stopped after notifying the player of the performance content of the jackpot end INT, so for example, by displaying a "display to prevent forgetting to remove a card", the game can be controlled to be stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to take out the prepaid card later. In addition, it is possible to execute the end INT effect, the "absorption prevention display", and the company logo without being canceled/interrupted, so it is possible to avoid giving players a sense of discomfort or discomfort regarding the display effect. It can be prevented.

In addition, the "safety device activation warning display" executed by the performance control unit 540 in the second and subsequent ending effects 1 and the first and second and subsequent ending effects 2 to 4 is not limited to the activation warning display or the activation notice display. It may be an operation notification (operation advance notification, operation warning notification). Moreover, both the safety device operation display (operation advance notice display, operation warning display) and the safety device operation notification (operation advance notice, operation warning notice) may be provided.

In any case, the second and subsequent ending effects 1, the first and second and subsequent ending effects 2 to 4 are executed in the ending effect shown in Figure 5-1-1, and these and other various functions and Regarding the relationship with the performance content, please refer to Figure 5-1-1.

Each of the embodiments described above can preferably have the following configurations (configuration examples 1 to 7). Note that although the correspondence in each embodiment is shown in parentheses, the present invention is not limited thereto.

[Configuration example 1]
(1) Special game execution means (e.g., main control) that can execute special games (e.g., jackpot game, small win game) that are advantageous to the player when a player wins in a random number lottery (e.g., jackpot lottery processing) during a game. section 520, special symbol management processing (S1031));
a first counting means (e.g., main control unit 520, performance display LED aggregation/division processing (S1048)) that performs a counting process of counting first predetermined information (e.g., base value) based on gaming performance;
specific display means (e.g. performance display LED 521) capable of displaying the first predetermined information;
A second counting means (main control unit 520, safety device counting process (S1528, S1512), difference ball Counter counting processing (S1531, S1541)),
a second predetermined information storage means (e.g., a difference ball counter) capable of storing the second predetermined information;
A game stopping unit (main control unit 520, game stopping process (S1520, S1509 to S1511)) and
Equipped with
The game stopping means is configured to execute a stopping process after the special game ends when the second predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means becomes a predetermined value during the special game,
When a stop process is executed after the end of the special game, the second counting means does not perform counting processing during the special game, and the first counting means performs counting processing.
Regarding [Configuration Example 1], (2) second predetermined information clearing means for clearing the second predetermined information storage means after power is turned on (main control unit 520, out-of-area game start setting process (S1503), S1507, S1537, S1559),
The game stopping means executes a stopping process after the special game ends even if the power is cut off during the special game and the second predetermined information storage means is cleared by the second predetermined information clearing means. It may be possible.

[Configuration example 2]
Special game execution means (e.g., main control unit 520) that can execute special games (e.g., jackpot game, small win game) that are advantageous to the player when winning a random number lottery (e.g., jackpot lottery processing) during the game; Special symbol management processing (S1031)),
a first counting means (e.g., main control unit 520, performance display LED aggregation/division processing (S1048)) that performs a counting process for counting first predetermined information (e.g., base value) based on gaming performance;
specific display means (e.g. performance display LED 521) capable of displaying the first predetermined information;
a specific display control unit (for example, main control unit 520, out-of-use area LED update process (S1052)) that performs display control of the specific display unit;
A second counting means (e.g., main control unit 520, safety device counting process (S1528, S1512), Difference ball counter counting process (S1531, S1541))
a second predetermined information storage means (e.g., a difference ball counter) capable of storing the second predetermined information;
A game stopping unit (main control unit 520, game stopping process (S1520, S1509 to S1511)) and
Equipped with
When the stop processing is executed by the game stop means, the counting process by the first counting means can be executed while the specific display control means hides the specific display means. A gaming machine.

[Configuration example 3]
An opening/closing means (for example, the movable piece 39b of the special pattern 2 starting port 39) that can be opened and closed between an open state where a game ball can enter and a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball;
Special symbol variation execution means (example: LED 76a for special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol variation display) that executes special symbol variation (example: special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol 2 variation display) based on special symbol lottery (example: jackpot lottery process) Symbol 2 fluctuation display LED 76b, main control unit 520, special symbol management processing (S1031)),
Special game execution means (e.g., main control unit 520, special symbol management) that can execute special games (e.g., jackpot game, small win game) that are advantageous to the player when the result of the special symbol variation is in a specific manner. processing (S1031));
Normal symbol variation execution means (e.g., normal symbol variation display LED 76e, main control unit 520, normal symbol management processing) that executes normal symbol variation (e.g., normal symbol variation display) based on the normal symbol lottery (e.g., winning lottery process) (S1029)) and
Opening/closing control means (e.g., main control unit 520, normal electric accessory management processing (S1030)) that controls the opening/closing means to an open state when the result of the normal symbol variation becomes a specific mode;
Counting means (e.g. main control unit 520, safety device counting process (S1528, S1512), difference ball counter counting processing (S1531, S1541)),
a predetermined information storage means (e.g., a difference ball counter) capable of storing the predetermined information;
A game stop means (main control unit 520, game stop process (S1520, S1509 to S1511)) that performs a stop process to stop processing related to the game when the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value. and,
Equipped with
During the special game, the special symbol variation is not executable, while the normal symbol variation is configured to be executable,
During a non-special game that is not the above-mentioned special game (e.g., low probability low base state (normal game state), low probability high base state (time-saving game state), high probability low base state (potential game state), high probability high base The state (probable variable gaming state) is configured such that the special symbol variation and the normal symbol variation are executable,
The normal symbol variation execution means is capable of continuously executing the normal symbol variation that is being executed when the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value during the special game. . A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value during the non-special game, the normal symbol variation being executed is terminated.

[Configuration example 4]
A symbol variation execution means (example: LED 76a for special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol 2 variation display) that executes symbol variation (example: special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol 2 variation display) based on symbol lottery (example: jackpot lottery process) Display LED 76b, main control unit 520, special symbol management processing (S1031)),
Special game execution means (e.g., main control unit 520, special symbol management processing) that can execute special games (e.g., jackpot game, small win game) that are advantageous to the player when the result of the symbol variation is in a specific manner. (S1031)) and
Counting means (e.g. main control unit 520, safety device counting process (S1528, S1512), difference ball counter counting processing (S1531, S1541)),
a predetermined information storage means (e.g., a difference ball counter) capable of storing the predetermined information;
A game stop means (main control unit 520, game stop process (S1520, S1509 to S1511)) that performs a stop process to stop processing related to the game when the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value. and,
Notification means (e.g. production control unit 540) capable of executing special notification (e.g. operation warning display, operation warning notification) regarding the stop processing when the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value. , image display means 31, panel side LED 63a, frame side LED 64a, speakers 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d),
Equipped with
When the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value during the special game, the game stopping means causes the notifying means to execute the special notification for a predetermined time, and then executes the stopping process. On the other hand, if the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value during a non-special game that is not the special game, the special notification by the notification means is not executed and the A game machine characterized by executing a stop process.

[Configuration example 5]
A symbol variation execution means (example: LED 76a for special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol 2 variation display) that executes symbol variation (example: special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol 2 variation display) based on symbol lottery (example: jackpot lottery process) Display LED 76b, main control unit 520, special symbol management processing (S1031)),
Special game execution means (e.g., main control unit 520, special symbol management processing) that can execute special games (e.g., jackpot game, small win game) that are advantageous to the player when the result of the symbol variation is in a specific manner. (S1031)) and
Counting means (e.g. main control unit 520, safety device counting process (S1528, S1512), difference ball counter counting processing (S1531, S1541)),
a predetermined information storage means (e.g., a difference ball counter) capable of storing the predetermined information;
A game stop means (main control unit 520, game stop process (S1520, S1509 to S1511)) that performs a stop process to stop processing related to the game when the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value. and,
Game mode notification means (e.g. performance control unit 540, image display means 31) for notifying mode information regarding the game mode in which the symbol variation is executed (e.g. mode display, mode entry display, mode continuation display);
Equipped with
When the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value during the special game, the game stop means causes the game mode notification means to notify the mode information, and then A game machine characterized by executing a stop process.

[Configuration example 6]
A symbol variation execution means (example: LED 76a for special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol 2 variation display) that executes symbol variation (example: special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol 2 variation display) based on symbol lottery (example: jackpot lottery process) Display LED 76b, main control unit 520, special symbol management processing (S1031)),
Special game execution means (e.g. main control unit 520, special symbol management) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player (e.g. jackpot game, small win game) when the result of the symbol variation is in a specific manner. processing (S1031));
Counting means (e.g. main control unit 520, safety device counting process (S1528, S1512), difference ball counter counting processing (S1531, S1541)),
a predetermined information storage means (e.g., a difference ball counter) capable of storing the predetermined information;
A game stop means (main control unit 520, game stop process (S1520, S1509 to S1511)) that performs a stop process to stop processing related to the game when the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value. and,
special notification means (e.g., production control unit 540, image display) capable of executing special notification (e.g., operation warning display) regarding the stop processing when the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value; Means 31) and
A warning notification means (e.g., performance control unit 540, image display means 31) capable of issuing a warning notification (e.g., a display to prevent addiction, a display to prevent forgetting to take out a card) regarding getting addicted to a game or forgetting to take out a game value;
Equipped with
If the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value during the special game, the special notification and the alert notification can be executed;
A game machine characterized in that the special notification is executed so that the warning notification does not become invisible.

[Configuration example 7]
A symbol variation execution means (example: LED 76a for special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol 2 variation display) that executes symbol variation (example: special symbol 1 variation display, special symbol 2 variation display) based on symbol lottery (example: jackpot lottery process) Display LED 76b, main control unit 520, special symbol management processing (S1031)),
Special game execution means (e.g., main control unit 520, special symbol management processing) that can execute special games (e.g., jackpot game, small win game) that are advantageous to the player when the result of the symbol variation is in a specific manner. (S1031)) and
Counting means (e.g. main control unit 520, safety device counting process (S1528, S1512), difference ball counter counting processing (S1531, S1541)),
A game stop means (main control unit 520, game stop process (S1520, S1509 to S1511)) that performs a stop process to stop processing related to the game when the predetermined information reaches a predetermined value;
Equipped with
The game stopping means is characterized in that, when the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value during the special game, the game stopping means is configured to execute a stopping process after the special game ends. Game machine.

The above describes the gaming machine of this embodiment shown in Figures 1-1 to 3-3 and the main control unit equipped with the safety device shown in Figures 4-1-1 to 4-4-2. Each embodiment of the control flow (Embodiment 1-1, Embodiment 1-2, Embodiment 1-3, Embodiment 1-4), operation of safety devices in Figures 5-1-1 to 5-3-2 Each embodiment of the time chart regarding (Embodiment 2-1, Embodiment 2-2, Embodiment 2-3, Embodiment 2-4, Embodiment 2-5), jackpot end INT regarding the operation of the safety device in FIG. Regarding each embodiment of the time chart (Embodiment 3-1), one or more may be combined. Moreover, the contents described in each embodiment are not limited to only individual embodiments, and may be applied to different embodiments.

In addition, the embodiments described above are applicable to pinball game machines that use game balls, such as arrangement ball machines and mahjong ball game machines, as well as reel-type game machines that use game medals, and game media (game balls, game balls, etc.). The game machine may also be a managed gaming machine (managed pachinko gaming machine, managed slot gaming machine) that manages medals, etc.) using an electromagnetic method.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 Game machine 2 Outer frame 3 Inner frame 4 Front frame 5 Game frame 5
6 Outer frame hinge 7 Inner frame hinge 8 Game board 8a Game area 9 Inner frame opening 10 Front frame opening 11 Non-transparent decorative cover 12 Transparent decorative cover 13 Firing handle unit 13a Firing handle 13b Handle touch sensor 14 Middle push button unit 14a Middle push Button press part 14b Middle press button detection switch 14c Middle press button detection switch 14d Middle press button movable motor 15 Upper tray 16 Volume adjustment button 16a Volume button upper 16b Volume button lower 16c Volume button upper switch 16d Volume button lower switch 17 Light intensity adjustment button 17a Light intensity Upper button 17b Lower light level button 17c Upper light level button switch 17d Lower light level button switch 18 Cross button 18a Upper button 18b Right button 18c Lower button 18d Left button 19a, 19b, 19c, 19d Speaker 19e Upper left speaker cover 19f Upper right speaker cover 19g Lower left speaker Cover 19h Lower right speaker cover 19I Lower speaker cover 20 Ball lending button 21 Return button 22 Side unit 22a Blower device 22b Touch device 22c Side unit movable motor 22d Side unit position detection switch 22f Opening 23 Prize ball dispensing device 23a Storage tank 23b Payout motor 23c Ball counting switch 23d Out-of-supply detection switch 23e Payout cassette 24 Power supply board case 25 Payout board case 25a Case heat radiation hole 26 Main board case 26a Case heat radiation hole 27 Effect board case 27a Case heat radiation hole 30 Board side movable motor 30a Bottom Movable part 30b Upper movable part 31 LCD unit 32 Drawer connector 33 Game ball rental device 34 Shooting stop switch 35 Frame release switch 35a Front frame release switch 35b Inner frame release switch 36 Ball jam detection switch 37a Shooting solenoid 37b Ball feeding solenoid 38 Special Symbol 1 starting opening 38a Special symbol 1 starting opening switch 39 Special symbol 2 starting opening 39a Special symbol 2 starting opening switch 39b Movable piece 40 Upper left prize opening 40a Prize opening switch 41 Left middle prize opening 42 Lower left winning opening 42a Prize opening switch 43 Right Winning opening 43a Winning opening switch 44 Upper big winning opening 44a Big winning opening switch 44b Opening/closing board 45 Lower big winning opening 45a Big winning opening switch 45b Opening/closing plate 46 Right gate 46a Right gate switch 47 Out opening 47a Out switch 48 Ball removal button 49a , 49b, 49c, 49d Cross button detection switch 50 Power supply board 51 Payout firing control board 52 Main control board 53 Production IF board 54 Liquid crystal control board 55 Liquid crystal IF board 56 ROM board 60 External terminal board 61 Backup board 62 Frequency display board 62a Frequency Display 63 Panel side LED board 63a Panel side LED
64 Frame side LED board 64a Frame side LED
70, 71 Big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 72 Special symbol 2 starting opening opening/closing solenoid 73 Magnetic sensor 74 Radio wave sensor 75 Vibration sensor 76 Symbol display device 76a Special symbol 1 fluctuation display LED
76b Special pattern 2 variable display LED
76c Special symbol 1 memory display LED
76d Special symbol 2 memory display LED
76e Normal symbol fluctuation display LED
76f Normal symbol memory display LED
76g Right-handed display LED
76h Round display LED
76i, 76j Status display LED
77 Board side movable object position detection switch 80 Plywood board 81 Guide rail 81a Inner rail 81b Outer rail 82 Center decoration 83 Windmill 84 Upper left corner decoration 85 Lower right corner decoration 86 Opening 87 Eaves portion 87a Apex portion 88 Left flow passage 89 Right flow passage 90 Ball flow lower part 90a Resin nail 91 Stage 91a Passing port 91b Falling route 92 Left side decoration 92a Base plate 92b Ball guide path 93 Special symbol 1 starting port unit 93a Base plate 94 Center accessory unit 94a Base plate 95 Variable display device 96 Game Nail 100 left decorative map 100A character portion 100B numerical part 101 Character decorative pattern 101a character part 101B numerical part 102 left decorative portion 102a Character portion 102B character part 102B numeric portion 103a mini pattern 104 reservation display area 104A storage display 105 identity display 105 Indication Area 105a Relevant hold 106a Special symbol 1 memory number display 106b Special symbol 2 memory number display 500 Power switch 510 Payout control unit (payout CPU)
520 Main control unit (main control CPU)
521 Performance display LED
522 RWM clear switch 523 Setting key switch 530 Movable object IC
531 Audio IC
532 Audio ROM
540 Production control unit (production control CPU)
541 VDP circuit 542 Control ROM
560 Performance ROM (CGROM)

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. Note that reference numerals of embodiments to be described later are given in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) Special game execution means (e.g., main control) that can execute special games (e.g., jackpot game, small win game) that are advantageous to the player when a player wins in a random number lottery (e.g., jackpot lottery processing) during a game. section 520, special symbol management processing (S1031));
a first counting means (e.g., main control unit 520, performance display LED aggregation/division processing (S1048)) that performs a counting process of counting first predetermined information (e.g., base value) based on gaming performance;
specific display means (e.g. performance display LED 521) capable of displaying the first predetermined information;
A second counting means (main control unit 520, safety device counting process (S1528, S1512), difference ball Counter counting processing (S1531, S1541)),
a second predetermined information storage means (e.g., a difference ball counter) capable of storing the second predetermined information;
A game stopping unit (main control unit 520, game stopping process (S1520, S1509 to S1511)) and
Equipped with
The game stopping means is configured to execute a stopping process after the special game ends when the second predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means becomes a predetermined value during the special game,
When the stop processing is executed after the special game ends, during the special game, the counting process by the second counting means is not performed , the counting process by the first counting means is limited, and the counting process by the specific display means is 1. Configured to display specified information
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) comprising a second predetermined information clearing means (main control unit 520, out-of-area game start setting processing (S1503), (S1507, S1537, S1559)) that clears the second predetermined information storage means after power is turned on;
The game stopping means executes a stopping process after the special game ends even if the power is cut off during the special game and the second predetermined information storage means is cleared by the second predetermined information clearing means. The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that:

Claims (2)

special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when winning a random number lottery during the game;
a first counting means that performs a counting process of counting first predetermined information based on gaming results;
specific display means capable of displaying the first predetermined information;
a second counting means that performs a counting process of counting second predetermined information based on gaming results;
a second predetermined information storage means capable of storing the second predetermined information;
a game stopping means that performs a stopping process to stop processing related to the game when the second predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means reaches a predetermined value;
Equipped with
The game stopping means is configured to execute a stopping process after the special game ends when the second predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means becomes a predetermined value during the special game,
When a stop process is executed after the end of the special game, the second counting means does not perform the counting process during the special game, and the first counting means performs the counting process.
comprising second predetermined information clearing means for clearing the second predetermined information storage means after power is turned on;
The game stopping means executes a stopping process after the special game ends even if the power is cut off during the special game and the second predetermined information storage means is cleared by the second predetermined information clearing means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that: